Sunteți pe pagina 1din 316

Guidelines

for machine configuration



___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________

SINUMERIK, SINAMICS
SINUMERIK 840D sl,
SINAMICS S120
Guidelines
for machine configuration
System Manual
Valid for
NCU SW 2.6 SP1

(MA1), 10/2009
6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Preface
System overview

1
Structure of the drive group

2
Communication within the
system

3
Safety Integrated

4
Connection of the
Components

5
Signal Interconnection

6
Typical circuit diagrams

7
Additional Information

8
Activate/Deactivate Drive
System

9
Appendix

A


Legal information

Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Ordernumber: 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
03/2010
Copyright Siemens AG 2006.
Technical data subject to change

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 3
Preface
SINUMERIK Documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:
General documentation
User documentation
Manufacturer/service documentation
You can obtain further information for publications about SINUMERIK 840D sl and for
publications that concern all SINUMERIK controllers from your SIEMENS regional office.
An overview of publications, which is updated monthly and also provides information about
the language versions available, can be found on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Select "Support" "Technical Documentation".
The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb
Target readership of this documentation
This guide has as audience the experienced drive and CNC configuration engineers who
have already worked with the current Siemens SIMODRIVE and SINUMERIK systems . This
document should provide you with a compact guide for integrating the SINAMICS S120 and
SINUMERIK 840D sl components.
This document supplements the product-related manuals for SINAMICS S120 and
SINUMERIK 840D sl. The document contains examples for the mechanical layout of the
components, for their functional integration and for the logical connection to the signal
interfaces of a machine tool.
Where necessary for the understanding and for important general conditions, this guide
contains extracts from the product manuals listed below. You can find there detailed
descriptions for the product-internal functions and properties, and for the mechanical and
electrical user interfaces.
SINUMERIK 840D sl manual, 07/2007 edition
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK 840D sl, SINAMICS S120 IBN CNC: NCK, PLC,
Drive, 03/2009 edition
SINAMICS S120 Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual, 11/2009 edition
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual, 11/2009 edition
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual, 11/2009 edition
Safety Integrated sl Function Manual, 03/2009 edition
Preface

Guidelines for machine configuration
4 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Standard version
This documentation also mentions components that have not been released for use with
SINUMERIK 840D sl. The NC61 catalog is binding for the permitted combinations.
Technical Support
If you have any questions, please contact our hotline:

Europe / Africa Asia / Australia America
Phone +49 180 5050 222 +86 1064 719 990 +1 423 262 2522
Fax +49 180 5050 223 +86 1064 747 474 +1 423 262 2289
Internet http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request
E-mail mailto:adsupport@siemens.com


Note
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following
Internet address:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Questions about the Manual
If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please
fax or e-mail us:

Fax: +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 63315
E-mail: mailto:motioncontrol.docu@siemens.com

Fax form: See the reply form at the end of this publication
SINUMERIK Internet address
http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik
SINAMICS Internet address
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 5
Table of contents

Preface...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 System overview...................................................................................................................................... 11
1.1 Application....................................................................................................................................11
1.2 System configuration ...................................................................................................................12
1.3 Variants........................................................................................................................................13
1.4 SINAMICS S120 components......................................................................................................14
1.5 SINAMICS S120 / SINUMERIK 840D sl Component Overview..................................................16
1.6 User interface software (HMI software) .......................................................................................18
2 Structure of the drive group ..................................................................................................................... 21
2.1 Structure.......................................................................................................................................21
2.1.1 Drive group structure ...................................................................................................................21
2.1.2 Single row layout..........................................................................................................................23
2.1.3 Two-row / multi-row construction.................................................................................................24
2.1.4 Center infeed (single row construction) for 16 to 120 kW Line Modules .....................................26
2.1.5 Direct installation of a CU-/NCU-/NX module on the Line Module ..............................................27
2.2 Layout of the Components...........................................................................................................27
2.2.1 Layout and Fastening of the NCU/ NX Modules..........................................................................27
2.2.2 Layout of the NX for single row construction integrated in the power unit group ........................29
2.2.3 NCU/NX Layout as Offset Solution..............................................................................................29
2.3 Current Carrying Capacity of the DC Link Busbar .......................................................................30
2.4 Shield Connection........................................................................................................................32
2.4.1 SINAMICS Components Dimension Drawings (Internal Air Cooling)..........................................33
2.4.2 SINAMICS Components Dimension Drawings (External Air Cooling).........................................37
2.4.3 Shield Connection for Internal Heat Dissipation ..........................................................................40
2.5 Note for the installation clearance for the connection cables ......................................................41
2.5.1 General information .....................................................................................................................41
2.5.2 Clearance of the Power Components..........................................................................................42
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet.......................................................................................43
2.6.1 Ventilation Clearances of the SINUMERIK Components ............................................................43
2.6.2 General information .....................................................................................................................43
2.6.3 General information on ventilation...............................................................................................50
2.6.4 Power Loss of the SINUMERIK Components..............................................................................52
2.6.5 Power Loss of the SINAMICS Components ................................................................................52
2.6.6 Power loss for Control Units, Sensor Modules, and other system components..........................53
2.6.7 Power loss for line filters and line reactors ..................................................................................54
2.6.8 Power loss for power units with internal air cooling.....................................................................55
2.6.9 Power loss for power units with external air cooling....................................................................57
2.6.10 Power loss for power units with cold plate...................................................................................58
2.6.11 Power loss for liquid-cooled power units .....................................................................................59
2.6.12 Electronics losses of power units.................................................................................................60
2.6.13 Dimensioning Climate Control Equipment ...................................................................................62
Table of contents

Guidelines for machine configuration
6 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
3 Communication within the system............................................................................................................ 63
3.1 Communication overview............................................................................................................ 63
3.2 X122 and X132 Interface Overview............................................................................................ 67
3.3 NCU 7x0 and NX1x Terminal Assignment.................................................................................. 69
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants................................................................................................. 73
3.4.1 Ways of connecting the line supply............................................................................................. 73
3.4.2 Operation of the line connection components on the supply network ........................................ 74
3.4.3 Operation of the line connection components via an autotransformer ....................................... 75
3.4.4 Operation of the line connection components via an isolating transformer ................................ 76
3.4.5 Residual-current operated circuit breakers (RCD)...................................................................... 78
3.4.6 Residual-current monitors (RCM) ............................................................................................... 80
4 Safety Integrated ..................................................................................................................................... 83
4.1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated ...................................................................................................... 83
4.1.1 Control of the "Safe Standstill" Safety Function.......................................................................... 83
4.1.2 Safe Brake Control (SBC) ........................................................................................................... 89
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated.................................................................................................... 90
4.2.1 Fundamentals ............................................................................................................................. 90
4.2.2 Connection to Monitoring Channels............................................................................................ 90
5 Connection of the Components ............................................................................................................... 97
5.1 Line Contactor Control ................................................................................................................ 97
5.1.1 Line contactor control for Line Modules without DRIVE-CLiQ interface (5 kW and 10 kW
versions)...................................................................................................................................... 97
5.1.2 Line Contactor Control for Line Modules with DRIVE-CLiQ Interface ........................................ 99
5.1.3 Line Contactor Control Commissioning using an Example....................................................... 100
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)................................................................................................... 102
5.2.1 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 102
5.2.2 Description ................................................................................................................................ 103
5.2.3 Operating an Active Interface Module on an isolated-neutral network (IT system) ..... 104
5.2.4 IT systems................................................................................................................................. 104
5.2.5 Electronics power supply X124................................................................................................. 105
5.2.6 X121 temperature sensor and fan control................................................................................. 105
5.2.7 Line/power connection .............................................................................................................. 106
5.2.8 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 107
5.2.9 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 111
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules ...................................................................................... 111
5.3.1 Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 111
5.3.2 Combining line reactors and line filters..................................................................................... 113
5.3.3 Description ................................................................................................................................ 114
5.3.4 Line/power connection .............................................................................................................. 114
5.3.5 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 115
5.3.6 Technical data........................................................................................................................... 117
5.3.7 Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 118
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description......................................................................................... 123
5.4.1 Line Modules Overview............................................................................................................. 123
5.4.2 Active Line Modules with Internal Air Cooling........................................................................... 126
5.4.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 126
5.4.2.2 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 127
5.4.2.3 X1 line connection..................................................................................................................... 128
5.4.2.4 Active Line Module X21 EP Terminals...................................................................................... 129
Table of contents

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 7
5.4.2.5 Active Line Module X24 24 V Terminal Adapter ........................................................................130
5.4.2.6 X200-X202 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces...........................................................................................130
5.4.2.7 24 V busbar................................................................................................................................131
5.4.2.8 Active Line Module DC Link Busbar ..........................................................................................131
5.4.2.9 Meaning of the LEDs on the active line module ........................................................................132
5.4.3 Smart Line Modules (5 kW und 10 kW) with internal air cooling ...............................................133
5.4.3.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................133
5.4.3.2 Connection example ..................................................................................................................136
5.4.3.3 X1 line connection......................................................................................................................137
5.4.3.4 X21 terminals: smart line module...............................................................................................138
5.4.3.5 X22 terminals: smart line module...............................................................................................140
5.4.3.6 X24 24 V terminal adapter .........................................................................................................141
5.4.3.7 24 V busbar................................................................................................................................141
5.4.3.8 Smart Line Module DC Link Busbar ..........................................................................................141
5.4.3.9 Meaning of the LEDs on the Smart Line Module.......................................................................142
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description.........................................................................................143
5.5.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................143
5.5.2 Connection examples ................................................................................................................144
5.5.3 Motor/brake connection .............................................................................................................145
5.5.4 X21/X22 EP Terminals / Motor Module Temperature Sensor Connection................................147
5.5.5 X200-X203 DRIVE-CLiQ interface.............................................................................................149
5.5.6 Meaning of the LEDs on the Motor Module ...............................................................................149
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies .............................................................................................................150
5.6.1 DRIVE-CLiQ topology................................................................................................................150
5.6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ wiring ....................................................................................................................152
5.6.3 NX10/15 wiring...........................................................................................................................156
5.6.4 Connectable DRIVE-CLiQ components.....................................................................................158
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)...........................................................................159
5.7.1 DMC20.......................................................................................................................................159
5.7.1.1 Description .................................................................................................................................159
5.7.1.2 Overview....................................................................................................................................160
5.7.1.3 DRIVE-CLiQ interface................................................................................................................160
5.7.1.4 Electronics power supply X524..................................................................................................161
5.7.1.5 Significance of the LED on the DMC20 .....................................................................................162
5.7.1.6 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................163
5.7.1.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................163
5.7.2 DME20 .......................................................................................................................................164
5.7.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................164
5.7.2.2 Safety information......................................................................................................................164
5.7.2.3 Overview....................................................................................................................................165
5.7.2.4 Electronics power supply X524..................................................................................................165
5.7.2.5 DRIVE-CLiQ interface................................................................................................................166
5.7.2.6 Cable lengths .............................................................................................................................167
5.7.2.7 Specifications for use with UL approval .....................................................................................167
5.7.2.8 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................169
5.7.2.9 Installation..................................................................................................................................170
5.7.2.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................171
5.8 Electronics Power Supply ..........................................................................................................171
5.8.1 External power supply (SITOP modular) ...................................................................................171
5.8.2 Selection of the Power Supply Devices.....................................................................................172
5.8.3 24 V current consumption of the components ...........................................................................172
5.8.4 Calculation of the 24 VDC Power Requirement Example .........................................................174
5.8.5 Assignment of the power supply to other components..............................................................175
Table of contents

Guidelines for machine configuration
8 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.8.6 Overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................. 177
5.8.7 Line formation ........................................................................................................................... 179
5.8.8 Power Supply Connection Example.......................................................................................... 181
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM) .................................................................................................. 181
5.9.1 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 183
5.9.2 Criteria for the protection, line formation and monitoring.......................................................... 185
5.9.3 Interconnection of the voltage output for the CSM ................................................................... 186
5.9.4 Control Supply Module Power Supply - Connection Example.................................................. 189
5.10 Cable Lengths ........................................................................................................................... 190
5.10.1 General information................................................................................................................... 190
5.10.2 Cable shielding and routing....................................................................................................... 190
5.10.3 Equipotential Bonding ............................................................................................................... 192
5.10.4 Protective Ground Connection.................................................................................................. 192
5.11 Motor Connection...................................................................................................................... 193
5.11.1 Motor connection plug............................................................................................................... 193
5.11.1.1 Installation of the motor connection plug with locking mechanism........................................... 193
5.11.1.2 Installation of the motor connection plug with screwed joint..................................................... 194
5.11.1.3 Removal and coding ................................................................................................................. 196
5.11.2 Connection examples................................................................................................................ 199
5.11.3 Motor/brake connection............................................................................................................. 200
5.11.4 X21/X22 EP terminals / temperature sensor Motor Module ..................................................... 202
5.12 Sensor Systems Connection..................................................................................................... 203
5.12.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 203
5.12.2 Overview of Sensor Modules .................................................................................................... 204
5.12.3 X200-X203 DRIVE-CLiQ interface............................................................................................ 206
5.12.4 Examples of encoder connections............................................................................................ 206
5.13 Brake connection ...................................................................................................................... 208
5.13.1 General Notes ........................................................................................................................... 208
5.13.2 Connection of the Brake Directly on the Motor Module ............................................................ 208
5.13.3 Connection of the Brake using Interface Relay......................................................................... 209
5.14 Brake Control ............................................................................................................................ 210
5.15 Voltage Protection Module (VPM), external.............................................................................. 215
6 Signal Interconnection ........................................................................................................................... 219
6.1 Application 1.............................................................................................................................. 220
6.2 Application 2.............................................................................................................................. 222
6.3 Application 3.............................................................................................................................. 224
6.4 Application 4.............................................................................................................................. 227
6.5 Application 5.............................................................................................................................. 230
6.6 Application 6.............................................................................................................................. 234
6.7 Application 7.............................................................................................................................. 236
7 Typical circuit diagrams ......................................................................................................................... 239
7.1 Connection Notes, Technical Data, Device Selection .............................................................. 239
7.2 Functional description of the typical circuit diagrams ............................................................... 240
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1........................................................................................................... 242
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2........................................................................................................... 250
Table of contents

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 9
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3............................................................................................................259
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4............................................................................................................268
7.7 Circuit Manual Group =5............................................................................................................277
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6............................................................................................................281
8 Additional Information............................................................................................................................ 295
8.1 Distributed configuration ............................................................................................................295
8.2 Cooling Systems ........................................................................................................................296
8.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................296
8.2.2 Internal Air Cooling ....................................................................................................................296
8.2.3 External Air Cooling ...................................................................................................................297
8.2.4 Cold Plate...................................................................................................................................298
9 Activate/Deactivate Drive System.......................................................................................................... 301
9.1 Overview of the Status Signals..................................................................................................301
9.2 Drive Group with Several Axes..................................................................................................302
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 307
A.1 Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................307
A.2 Description of drive wizard (up to SINUMERIK V2.5)................................................................309
A.2.1 Commissioning Macros Overview..............................................................................................309
A.2.2 Functions in the macro...............................................................................................................309
A.2.3 Drive wizard for commissioning .................................................................................................309
A.2.4 Procedure for calling ACX macros.............................................................................................311
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 315
Table of contents

Guidelines for machine configuration
10 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 11
System overview
1
1.1 Application
General system characteristics and areas of application
SINUMERIK 840D sl is a digital complete system integrated in the SINAMICS S120 drive
system and supplemented by the SIMATIC S7-300 automation system that is suitable for the
mid-sized and large power range.
Maximum performance and flexibility, above all for complex multi-axis systems.
Uniform openness from operation up to the NC core.
Optimum integration into networks.
Uniform structure in respect of operation, programming and visualization.
Integrated safety functions for man and machine: SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Operating and programming software such as ShopMill or ShopTurn, as well as Motion
Control Information System Products (MCIS-Products) can be used for the production
sector.
Fields of application
The SINUMERIK 840D sl can be used anywhere in the world for the following applications:
machine tools, packaging and textile machines, rotary indexing machines, transfer machines
and handling systems, glass and wood processing machines, press equipment, plastic
processing and printing machines. It can be used in production and preparatory areas and is
also suitable for both series and one-off production environments.
Thanks to this level of versatility, it offers all the main forms of technology associated with
metal working (e.g. milling, turning, grinding, hobbing, laser cutting, punching, nibbling, and
erosion).
The optional version is ideal for high-technology tool and mold making applications. It can
also be used for high-speed cutting applications in 3 or even as many as all 5 axes, as well
as for special applications.
The SINUMERIK 840DE sl is available as an export version for use in countries requiring an
export authorization.
System overview
1.2 System configuration
Guidelines for machine configuration
12 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1.2 System configuration
The heart of the SINUMERIK 840D sl is the Numerical Control Unit (NCU). It combines NCK,
HMI, PLC, closed-loop control and communication tasks.
Components
For operating, programming, and visualization, the corresponding HMI software is integrated
in the NCU software. For increased operating performance, the SINUMERIK PCU 50.3
industrial PC can be used.
With the TCU (Thin Client Unit), the operator panel can be installed as much as 100 meters
away. Up to 4 distributed operator panel fronts can be operated on an NCU or PCU 50.3.
PROFlBUS
lndustrial Ethernet
DRlVE-CLiQ
SlNAMlCS S120
Main spindle motor
Servo motors
SlNUMERlK
840D sl with
SlNAMlCS S120
SlNUMERlK operator panel front with TCU
l/O
SlMATlC
ET 200pro
Power supply
NX15


SlNUMERlK
HT 8
SlNUMERlK
PCU 50.3

Figure 1-1 Typical topology of the SINUMERIK 840D sl complete system
The following components can be attached to the Control Unit:
SINUMERIK operator panel front with TCU/PCU 50.3 and machine control
panel/pushbutton panel
SIMATIC CE panel
Handheld units
SIMATIC S7-300 I/O
Distributed PLC I/Os using a PROFIBUS DP connection or PROFINET I/O (only applies
to NCU 720.2 PN and NCU 730.2 PN)
System overview
1.3 Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 13
Programming device
SINAMICS S120 drive system with feed and main spindle motors, such as
1FT/1FK/1FN/1FW6/1FE1/2SP1 synchronous motors
1PH/1PM asynchronous motors
With the NCU 720.2 PN and NCU 730.2 PN components, the SINUMERIK 840D sl offers
integrated PROFINET functionality.
Supported:
PROFINET CBA functionality
The CBA functionality integrated in the NCU allows users to modularize machinery and
systems: Rapid real-time communication (up to 10 ms) between the controllers means
that systems lend themselves better to standardization and can be reused or expanded
more easily. Response to customer demands is faster and more flexible and startup is
simplified and speeded up by pretesting at component level.
PROFINET IO
As part of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communication concept that is used to
implement modular, distributed applications. PROFINET IO is based on Industrial
Ethernet and allows distributed field and I/O equipment to be connected to the central
processing unit.
256 PROFINET IO devices can be operated on the NCU as an IO controller.
The typical topology with Industrial Ethernet, illustrated above, can be integrated in
exactly the same way using PROFINET IO (or PROFINET components). Using
PROFINET machine control panels or operator panels means, of course, that diagnostics
is available as a PN device.
1.3 Variants
Thanks to the scalability of the hardware and software, both in the controller and operating
areas, the SINUMERIK 840D sl can be used in many sectors. The possibilities range from
simple positioning tasks up to complex multi-axis systems.
Application areas and performance
As many as 6 axes can be implemented on one NCU 710.x in SERVO control mode, with
a sampling time of 125 s for both the speed and current controllers. The NCU 710.x can
be expanded by up to 2 NX modules in order, for example, to improve drive control
performance.
On the NCU 720.x/730.x, the number of axes can be increased to as many as 31 and/or
drive control performance can be improved in SERVO control mode, with a sampling time
of 125 s for both the speed and current controllers. This is achieved by using the
NX10.x/15.x module. The NCU 720.x/730.x can be expanded by up to 5 NX10.x/15.x
modules for the purpose of increasing drive control performance or the number of axes.
System overview
1.4 SINAMICS S120 components
Guidelines for machine configuration
14 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
The NCU 730.x is recommended for maximum dynamics and accuracy in mold making
applications or the high-speed cutting sector.
Since it has the highest PLC capacity, the NCU 730.2 PN represents the most advanced
configuration within the SINUMERIK 840D sl range.
The following table shows the essential features of the various Control Units:
Table 1- 1 Versions, increased numbers of axes
Property NCU 710 .2 NCU 720.2/.2 PN NCU 730.2/.2 PN
DRIVE CLiQ ports 4 6 6
Axes in SERVO control mode with
speed and current controller
sampling times of 125 s
Up to 6 Up to 31 Up to 31
NX10/15 expansions Up to 2 Up to 3/Up to 5 Up to 3/Up to 5
TCU Up to 2 Up to 4 Up to 4
Further information
Please refer to the following for detailed information on the number of axes and controller
axis performance:
/FH1/SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions, 11/2009 edition, Section 12.13.
1.4 SINAMICS S120 components
Modular system toolbox for complex drive tasks
SINAMICS S120 can be used to solve complex drive tasks for a very wide spectrum of
industrial applications and consequently designed as a modular system toolbox. From a wide
range of matched components and functions, the user uses just the combination that best
meets the user's requirements. The powerful SIZER configuration tool simplifies the
selection and the determination of the optimum drive configuration.
SINAMICS S120 is supplemented with a large range of motors. Irrespective whether
synchronous or asynchronous motors, SINAMICS S120 optimally supports them all.
Drive for multi-axis applications
The trend to desynchronization in machine construction continues uninterrupted. Unless it
has already been done, central drives will be replaced by electronically-coordinated servo
drives. These require drives with coupled DC link to provide a cost-effective energy
compensation between braking and driving axes.
SINAMICS S120 has a wide power range using power feeds and inverter modules designed
for a smooth installation in its type and which permit space-saving multi-axis drive
configurations.
System overview
1.4 SINAMICS S120 components
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 15
New system architecture with central control unit
Electronically-coordinated single drives solve your drive task together. Overlaid controllers
control the drives so that the required coordinated motion results. This requires a cyclical
data exchange between the controller and all drives. Previously, this exchange had to be
realized using a fieldbus with the associated installation and configuration cost. SINAMICS
S120 follows new paths here: a central control unit performs as master the drive control for
all attached axes and also realizes the technological links between the axes. Because all
required information is present in the central control unit, it does not need to be transferred
with difficulty. Inter-axis couplings can be created within a component and are configured in
the STARTER commissioning tool or the drive wizard in the HMI of the SINUMERIK 840D sl
simply by clicking the mouse.
The SINAMICS S120 control unit solves simple technological tasks by itself. For complex
numeric or motion control tasks, powerful modules from the SINUMERIK 840D sl product
range are used in conjunction with the integrated SINAMICS S120 drive control instead.
DRIVE-CLiQ the digital interface between SINAMICS components
The SINAMICS S120 components, including the motors and encoders, are connected with
each other using the shared DRIVE-CLiQ serial interface. The standardized form of the
cable and plug engineering reduces the range of parts and the storage costs.
Converter modules for the conversion of traditional encoder signals to DRIVE-CLiQ are
available for non-Siemens motors or retrofit applications.
Electronic rating plate in all components
All SINAMICS S120 components have an electronic rating plate. This rating plate contains
all relevant technical data for the corresponding component. In the motors, these are, for
example, the parameters of the electrical equivalent circuit diagram and characteristic values
of the installed motor encoder. This data is recorded automatically by the control unit via
DRIVE-CLiQ and does not have to be entered during the commissioning or after
replacement.
The electronic rating plate contains not only the technical data, but also logistical data, such
as the manufacturer identification, the order number and the worldwide unique identification
number. Because these values can be fetched electronically both on-site and by remote
diagnosis, a unique identification of all components used in a machine is always possible
with the consequent simplification of the servicing.
System overview
1.5 SINAMICS S120 / SINUMERIK 840D sl Component Overview
Guidelines for machine configuration
16 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1.5 SINAMICS S120 / SINUMERIK 840D sl Component Overview
The following overview contains the SINAMICS S120 and SINUMERIK components that
should be used in preference for multi-axis drive tasks.

Figure 1-2 SINAMICS, SINUMERIK components
System overview
1.5 SINAMICS S120 / SINUMERIK 840D sl Component Overview
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 17
The following power components are offered:
Line-side power components, such as fuses, contactors, chokes and filters for switching
the energy supply and for observing the EMC regulations
Line Modules that are responsible for the central energy supply in the DC link and, where
necessary, for feeding energy back into the supply system
DC link components used optionally for stabilizing the DC link voltage
Motor modules that operate as inverter obtain their energy from the DC link and supply
the attached motors.

To handle the required functions, SINAMICS S120 has
A Control Unit that carries out all drive and technological functions across all axes.
Additional system components to expand the functionality and to handle various
interfaces for encoders and process signals.

The SINAMICS S120 components have been developed for installation in control cabinets.
They are characterized by the following properties:
Simple handling, simple installation and wiring
Practice-oriented connection engineering and EMC-conform cable placement
Consistent design, seamless installation,
multi-tier configuration and configuration involving gaps also available where required
Alternative cooling solutions tailored to the application
Modules for internal air cooling, external air cooling, and other innovative cooling
methods (e.g. cold plate) are also available.
Power units
Line Modules
The three-phase supply voltage is converted into the DC voltage for the DC link.
Smart Line Modules
The Smart Line Modules generate a non-regulated DC link voltage and are capable of
regenerative feedback.
Active Line Modules
The Active Line Modules generate a regulated DC link voltage and are capable of
regenerative feedback.
System overview
1.6 User interface software (HMI software)
Guidelines for machine configuration
18 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Motor Modules
They make the energy from the DC link available at an adjusted voltage and with variable
frequency. This is used to operate the connected motors.
1.6 User interface software (HMI software)
The HMI software is used to operate and program machine tools. There are several
versions:
The user interface software (SINUMERIK Operate, HMI-Embedded, ShopMill HMI,
ShopTurn HMI) integrated in the CNC software
The HMI software (SINUMERIK Operate, HMI-Advanced) running on the PCU 50.3
Linking of HMI software
Use HMI software on the NCU 7x0. A thin client (TCU) is responsible for NCU - operator
panel communication.
Operator
Panel
Operator
Panel
Operator
Panel
NCU NCU
X120 Ethernet
X130 Ethernet
TCU TCU
X127 Ethernet
(service)
Ethernet 2
X202
X120 Ethernet
X130 Ethernet
X127 Ethernet
(service)
Ethernet 2
X202
Ethernet 1
X501
X120 Ethernet
X130 Ethernet
PCU 50.3
X127 Ethernet
(service)
Ethernet 2
X502
HMl in NCU HMl in PCU
PCU in operator panel
HMl in PCU
PCU in the control cabinet
Ethernet 2
Ethernet 1
System network
lndustrial Ethernet/Company network
NCU
PCU

Figure 1-3 HMI SW connection options
System overview
1.6 User interface software (HMI software)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 19
Switching between operator panels
When an Ethernet switch is used, you can switch between embedded HMI (available on
NCU) and HMI-Advanced (available on PCU 50.3).
Ethernet
switch
NCU
PCU 50.3
Operator
panel with
TCU
Operator
panel with
TCU
Operator
panel with
TCU
Operator
panel with
TCU
Anlagennetz
Firmennetz

Figure 1-4 HMI connection with switch

Note
Detailed information about the operator panels, TCU and PCU 50.3 is contained in the "sl
Operator Components Device Manual" and in "CNC Commissioning, Part 2 (HMI)".


System overview
1.6 User interface software (HMI software)
Guidelines for machine configuration
20 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 21
Structure of the drive group
2
2.1 Structure
2.1.1 Drive group structure
The individual components, such as Control Unit and power units, can be attached directly to
each other without any separation. The specified safety clearance and ventilation space
above, below and in front of the associated components must be observed. The maximum
configuration of the drive group depends on the rated power of the Line Module or on the
current load of the DC link busbar of the individual components.
The components can be assembled in a single line or as several lines. The stacked
installation is possible for the multi-line layout; the installation next to each other in various
cabinet sections is also possible for the cabinet string.

Note
For the layout of the components, ensure that the maximum cable lengths are not exceeded.
See Section Cable Lengths (Page 190).

Note
Higher-power Motor Modules must be placed directly next to the Line Module. The lower-
power components then follow. This prevents overloading of the DC link busbar of the
associated component.
See also Section Current Carrying Capacity of the DC Link Busbar (Page 30).

Note
The appropriate measures must be adopted to satisfy the EMC requirement (see below).

Note concerning the use of components with a width of 50 mm
If a 50 mm wide Motor Module or a DC link component with a similar width (e.g. Braking
Module or Control Supply Module) is located at the left-hand end of the drive group, then the
DC link bridge, including all of the screws, must be removed.

DANGER
The insertion of the screws without the DC link bridge is not permitted.

Structure of the drive group
2.1 Structure
Guidelines for machine configuration
22 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Figure 2-1 Removal of the DC link bridge
The DC link bridges must be removed by loosening the M4 screws.

DANGER
The DC link bridge must not be removed for power units and DC link components (e.g.
Capacitor Module) that are wider than 50 mm.

Structure of the drive group
2.1 Structure
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 23
2.1.2 Single row layout
All required components, such as Control Unit and power units are arranged in a row. The
drive group is constructed depending on the available installation location in the control
cabinet and the corresponding general conditions (see above).
The following rule is used as installation rule of the power units from left to right:
Line Module
Motor Modules depending on their power, starting with the highest power and ending with
the lowest power
DC link components (e.g. Braking Module, Control Supply Module, Capacitor Module)
P (kW)
Line supply
3-ph. 400 VAC
Line filter
1)
Line reactor
1)
Line
Module
Motor
Modules
1) lt is better to use Active lnterface Modules for
Active Line Modules. With this approach, no line
reactor or line filter is required.

Figure 2-2 Single row layout



Note
For information on the NCU 7x0 or NX1x layout, see Section Layout of the Components
(Page 27).

Structure of the drive group
2.1 Structure
Guidelines for machine configuration
24 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.1.3 Two-row / multi-row construction
The components of the SINAMICS system can also be constructed as two or more rows. As
previously described above, the limit is the maximum DC link length and the current carrying
capacity of the DC link busbar. For the stacked construction, the appropriate ventilation
clearances must be observed in accordance with the Equipment Manual for Booksize Power
Units.

Note
Observe the installation and cooling clearances; see Section Note for the installation
clearance for the connection cables (Page 41).

P (kW)
P (kW)
Max. 10 m
35 95 mm
2
Max. 200 A
Line supply
3-ph. 400 VAC
Line filter Line reactor
Line
Module
Motor
Modules
Motor
Modules
DC link
adapter
Cooling
clearance


Figure 2-3 Two-row construction

Note
For information on the NCU 7x0 or NX1x layout, see Layout of the Components (Page 27).

Structure of the drive group
2.1 Structure
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 25
DC link adapters are used to forward the DC link. Cross-sections of 35 mm to 95 mm, max.
200 A, can be connected to the connection terminals.
The wiring outside the components is based on single-core, finely stranded, shielded cables.
These should be laid in such a way that they are inherently short-circuit and earth fault proof.
The individual wires must be shielded, and the shield must be attached at both ends.
Minimum size for the ventilation clearances for the two-/multi-row construction
Cooling clearance

Figure 2-4 Ventilation clearance for the two-row construction
The distance between the rows of components largely depends on the wiring, the cable
cross-section, and the bending radius of the power cables to be connected.
The inlet temperature of the air sucked in for cooling the components must not exceed
40 C (with derating, it must not exceed 55 C). This must be ensured by means of
suitable air guidance, e.g. involving the distance between the component rows or air
baffle plates.
Structure of the drive group
2.1 Structure
Guidelines for machine configuration
26 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.1.4 Center infeed (single row construction) for 16 to 120 kW Line Modules
Another variant of the DC link supply is the center infeed. For the 16 to 120 kW Line
Modules, the DC link can be fed from both the left and right side of the device. This allows
the drive group to be mounted on both sides. The installation guidelines are the same as the
previous guidelines.
P (kW) P (kW)
Line
400 V 3 AC
Line filter Line choke
Line
Module
Motor
Modules
Motor
Modules

Figure 2-5 Center infeed construction

Note
For information on the NCU 7x0 or NX1x layout, see Section Layout of the Components
(Page 27).

Structure of the drive group
2.2 Layout of the Components
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 27
2.1.5 Direct installation of a CU-/NCU-/NX module on the Line Module
The Line Modules permit the docking of a CU320-/ NCU-/ NX component using the
attachment elements present as standard on the left-hand side of the housing.
Remove the holder for securing the Control Unit.
If an additional component is to be flush-mounted to the left of the component, the holders
for securing the Control Unit must be removed.


Use suitable tools to lift the latching device
and push up the holder
Remove the holder After the removing the holder
2.2 Layout of the Components
2.2.1 Layout and Fastening of the NCU/ NX Modules
Fastening of the NCU 7x0/ NX Modules
For the fastening of the NCU / NX modules, a differentiation is made between fastening
using direct installation, using fastening clip or using spacers.
The fastening of the NX component to the NCU differs depending on whether an NCU 710 or
an NCU 720/730 is used (cooling fins on the rear side of the NCU 720/730).
Structure of the drive group
2.2 Layout of the Components
Guidelines for machine configuration
28 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Fastening Possibilities
A
B
C

Figure 2-6 Main NCU-NX fastening types
Table 2- 1 Fastening possibilities for NCU 710 and NX
NCU 710 NX NCU 710+NXs
A (direct to the Line Module) possible possible
B (with fastening clip) possible
C (with spacer) possible possible possible

Table 2- 2 Fastening possibilities for NCU 720/730 and NX
NCU 720/730 NX NCU 720/730 +NXs
A (direct to the Line Module) possible possible
B (with fastening clip) possible
C (with spacer) possible possible possible


Note
To ensure the optimum reachability and the access to the connection plugs for digital signals
/ bus connections, the following placement notes should be observed.

Structure of the drive group
2.2 Layout of the Components
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 29
2.2.2 Layout of the NX for single row construction integrated in the power unit group
If NX components are present, they should be added between the power unit and the NCU.
This ensures the best-possible reachability and access to the connection plugs for digital
signals / bus connections.

Figure 2-7 NX between NCU and Line Module
2.2.3 NCU/NX Layout as Offset Solution
The DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the SINAMICS components permits any layout of the NCU /
NX modules. The layout of the NCU / NX directly in the drive group is thus not mandatory.
This type of installation involves fastening clips or spacers. To stabilize a group containing
several NX components, specially prepared connection brackets can be fastened to the front
of the NX between the components.

Line
Module
NX
NCU
DRlVE-CLiQ

Figure 2-8 NCU/NX as offset solution
Structure of the drive group
2.3 Current Carrying Capacity of the DC Link Busbar
Guidelines for machine configuration
30 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.3 Current Carrying Capacity of the DC Link Busbar
The current carrying capacity of the DC link busbar must be observed for the configuring and
the construction of the drive group.
Depending on the width of the power units, the maximum current carrying capacity of the DC
link busbar is represented by the following values:
With power units between 3 A and 30 A (max. width 100 mm) and DC link components
(Braking, Capacitor, and Control Supply Modules), the DC link busbar can be loaded with
100 A
With power units between 45 A and 200 A (150/300 mm width), the DC link busbar can
be loaded with 200 A
DC link busbar gain
Gain is possible as an option. It may be required if the drive group is fed via a Line Module >
55 kW or a DC link adapter.
Using reinforced DC link busbars raises the current carrying capacity from 100 A to 150 A for
all booksize components with widths of 50 mm or 100 mm.
Table 2- 3 "Reinforced DC link busbar" option
Area Order No.
Suitable for 50 mm components 6SL3162-2DB00-0AAx
Suitable for 100 mm components 6SL3162-2DD00-0AAx
Optimizing current load
The current in the DC link busbar is directly dependent on the current active power of the
motor. To calculate the current generated, the entire process operation associated with the
drive group connected to the DC link needs to be considered. The current load for the DC
link busbar can be optimized if influencing variables such as partial load, duty cycles, and the
simultaneity factors of the individual drive motors are taken into account.
If the current carrying capacity of the DC link busbar is exceeded, two solutions are possible:
either the building of the drive group with infeed from left and right (center infeed; see below)
or the use of another Line Module.

Note
The following examples are based on the concurrent use and loading of the Motor Modules
with the rated output current of the Motor Modules. The current values are taken from the
Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual or the NC61 catalog.

Structure of the drive group
2.3 Current Carrying Capacity of the DC Link Busbar
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 31
Example 1:
Connection of several Motor Modules with different current carrying capacity of the DC link
busbar to a Line Module.
3.6 A 9.6 A 81.6 A 183.6 A
+6 A
Line
Module
120 kW
Motor
Module
3 A
Motor
Module
5 A
Motor
Module
60 A
Motor
Module
85 A
3 A 5 A 60 A 85 A
3.6 A 6 A 72 A 102 A
+72 A +102 A
Current carrying capacity of
the DC-link busbar
Loading of the DC-link busbar;
DC-link current lD for rated
output current lN for the Motor
Module
lncrease of the loading of
the DC-link busbar
Motor current = rated output
current lN Motor Module

Figure 2-9 Regular construction; DC link busbars not overloaded
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
32 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Example 2:
Connection of several Motor Modules with the same current carrying capacity of the DC link
busbar to a Line Module with center infeed.
22 A 94 A 28 A 17 A 6 A
Line
Module
120 kW
Motor
Module
18 A
Motor
Module
60 A
Motor
Module
5 A
Motor
Module
9 A
Motor
Module
9 A
18 A 60 A 9 A 9 A 5 A
22 A 72 A 11 A 11 A 6 A
+72 A +11 A +11 A
Current carrying capacity of
the DC-link busbar
lncrease of the loading of
the DC-link busbar
Loading of the DC-link busbar;
DC-link current lD for rated
output current lN for the Motor
Module
Motor current = rated output
current lN Motor Module

Figure 2-10 Infeed from left and right (center infeed)

Note
A center infeed with Motor Modules to the right and left of the Line Module can be configured
for all Line Modules.
Exception: Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW

A single-sided infeed would overload the DC link busbar for a 60 A Motor Module. This type
of configuration is therefore not permitted.
2.4 Shield Connection
For information on the shield connection, please see the dimension drawings of the
SINAMICS components.
For details of the shield connections of Active Interface Modules, please refer to the relevant
figures in the Overview (Page 107) section. The shield connections are located near the line
supply connections.
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 33
2.4.1 SINAMICS Components Dimension Drawings (Internal Air Cooling)
65
(2.56)
1
2
5
.
5

(
4
.
9
4
)
173 (6.81)

Figure 2-11 Dimension drawing of shield connecting plate on a 100 mm component with internal air cooling, all dimensions
in mm and (inches)
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
34 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
100
(3.94)
2
4
0
.
4

(
9
.
4
6
)
168.7 (6.64)

Figure 2-12 Dimension drawing of shield connecting plate on a 150 mm component with internal air cooling, all dimensions
in mm and (inches)
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 35
132 (5.20)
2
3
4

(
9
.
2
1
)
163.6 (6.44)

Figure 2-13 Dimension drawing of shield connecting plate on a 200 mm component with internal air cooling, all dimensions
in mm and (inches)
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
36 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
132 (5.20)
2
3
3
.
5

(
9
.
1
9
)
165 (6.50)

Figure 2-14 Dimension drawing of shield connecting plate on a 300 mm component with internal air cooling, all dimensions
in mm and (inches)
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 37
2.4.2 SINAMICS Components Dimension Drawings (External Air Cooling)

Figure 2-15 Dimension drawing of shield connecting plate on a 100 mm component with external air cooling, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
38 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Figure 2-16 Dimension drawing of shield connecting plate on a 150 mm component with external air cooling, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 39

Figure 2-17 Dimension drawing of shield connecting plate on a 200 mm component with external air cooling, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Structure of the drive group
2.4 Shield Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
40 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Figure 2-18 Dimension drawing of shield connecting plate on a 300 mm component with external air cooling, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
2.4.3 Shield Connection for Internal Heat Dissipation
The two examples for preassembled cables on power components of different width follow:

Structure of the drive group
2.5 Note for the installation clearance for the connection cables
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 41


Preassembled cable on a 100 mm
component
Preassembled cable on a 200 mm component
2.5 Note for the installation clearance for the connection cables
2.5.1 General information
The arrangement of the components and equipment takes account of
Space requirements
Cable routing
Bending radii of the connection cables
MOTION-CONNECT cables, refer to catalog PM21 or NC61
Heat dissipation
EMC
Components are usually located centrally in a cabinet.
The necessary mounting and installation clearances above an below the components can,
under certain circumstances, exceed the minimum clearances specified in the product
documentation.
Structure of the drive group
2.5 Note for the installation clearance for the connection cables
Guidelines for machine configuration
42 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.5.2 Clearance of the Power Components
The installation clearance is defined by
Ventilation clearance
Cable clearance
Cooling clearance
(80 mm)
Cable
clearance
Mounting
clearance

Figure 2-19 Clearance in the vicinity of the power components
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 43
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
2.6.1 Ventilation Clearances of the SINUMERIK Components
Table 2- 4 Ventilation clearances above and below the components
Component Clearance [mm]
NCU 7x0 80 mm
NX1x 80 mm
2.6.2 General information
The cabinet can be cooled, among others, by using:
Filter fans
Heat exchangers
Refrigerators
Liquid cooling
external air cooling
external liquid cooling
The decision in favor of one of these methods will depend on the prevailing ambient
conditions and the cooling power required.
The air routing inside the control cabinet and the cooling clearances specified here, must be
carefully observed. No other components or cables must be located in these areas.

CAUTION
If you do not observe the guidelines for installing SINAMICS equipment in the cabinet, this
can reduce the service life of the equipment and result in premature component failure.

Note
When the line reactor is being installed, it is best not to install it in the same cabinet (max.
distance approx. 0.5 m). If necessary, it can be installed on the heat sink.

You must take into account the following specifications when installing a SINAMICS drive
line-up:
Ventilation clearance
Wiring and cabling
Air guidance, air-conditioner
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
44 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Table 2- 5 Ventilation clearances above and below the components
Component Order number Clearance [mm]
CU320/CU320-2 DP 6SL3040-0MA00-0AAx 80
SMCxx 6SL3055-0AA00-5xAx 50
TM15 6SL3055-0AA00-3FAx 50
TM31 6SL3055-0AA00-3AAx 50
TM41 6SL3055-0AA00-3PAx 50
Line filter for Line Module
5 kW - 120 kW

6SL3000-0BExx-xAAx

100
Active Interface Module
16 kW
36 kW
50 kW
80 kW
120 kW

6SL3100-0BE21-6ABx
6SL3100-0BE23-6ABx
6SL3100-0BE25-5ABx
6SL3100-0BE28-0ABx
6SL3100-0BE31-2ABx

80
Line reactor for Active Line Module
16 kW 120 kW

6SN1111-0AA00-xxAx

100
Line reactor for Basic Line Module
20 kW 100 kW

6SL3000-0CExx-0AAx

100
Line reactor for Smart Line Module
5 kW 36 kW

6SL3000-0CExx-0AAx

100
Active Line Module
16 kW 55 kW
80 kW 120 kW

6SL3130-7TExx-xAAx
6SL3130-7TExx-xAAx

80
80 (additional 50 in front of fan)
Smart Line Module Booksize format
5 kW 36 kW

6SL3130-6AExx-0AAx

80
Smart Line Module Booksize Compact
format
16 kW


6SL3430-6TE21-6AAx


80
Basic Line Module
20 kW 100 kW
6SL3130-1TExx-xAAx 80
Motor Module Booksize format < 132 A 6SL312x-1TExx-xAAx 80
Motor Module Booksize format
132 A a. 200 A

6SL312x-1TE3x-xAAx

80 (additional 50 in front of fan)
Motor Module Booksize Compact
format
1.7 A - 18 A


6SL3420-xTExx-xAAx


80
Braking Module 6SL3100-1AE31-0AAx 80
Control Supply Module 6SL3100-1DE22-0AAx 80
Capacitor Module 6SL3100-1CE14-0AAx 80
The specifications regarding ventilation clearances for two-tier configurations are provided in
Drive Line-Up.
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 45
Mounting surface
Air inlet
Warm discharged
air
8
0

m
m
8
0

m
m

Figure 2-20 Clearances for booksize drive line-up with internal air cooling
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
46 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
80 mm
80 mm
Mounting surface
Warm
dischar-
ged air
W
a
r
m

d
i
s
-

c
h
a
r
g
e
d

a
i
r
Supply air
S
u
p
p
l
y

a
i
r

Figure 2-21 Clearances for booksize drive line-up with external air cooling

Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 47
C
o
o
l
i
n
g
-
l
u
b
r
i
c
a
t
i
n
g


















m
e
d
i
u
m
C
o
o
l
i
n
g
-
l
u
b
r
i
c
a
t
i
n
g

















m
e
d
i
u
m
Control cabinet
lnner
Control cabinet
Outer
Control cabinet
lnner
Control cabinet
Outer
Spray
protection

Figure 2-22 Spray protection for external cooling

Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
48 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
lnstallation/mounting
surface
8
0

m
m
50 mm
Air inlet
Warm discharged air
Cooling
clearances
Device fan

Figure 2-23 Cooling clearances for 300 mm components with mounted equipment fan
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 49
Mounting surface
Air inlet
Warm
discharged
air
DlN rail
5
0

m
m
5
0

m
m

Figure 2-24 Cooling clearances, rail-mounted modules (e.g. VSM, SMC, TM, DMC)
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
50 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.6.3 General information on ventilation
The SINAMICS equipment is ventilated separately by means of integrated fans and is in
some cases cooled by means of natural convection.
The cooling air must flow through the components vertically from bottom (cooler region) to
top (region heated by operation).
If filtered fans, heat exchangers, or air conditioners are used, you must ensure that the air is
flowing in the right direction. You must also ensure that the warm air can escape at the top.
A ventilation clearance of at least 80 mm above and below must be observed.

NOTICE
The connected signal and power cables must be routed to the components in such a way
that they do not cover the ventilation slots.
Cold air must not be allowed to blow directly onto electronic equipment.

Note
The distance between the blow-out aperture of the air conditioner and the electronic
equipment must be at least 200 mm.

Note
If the components are installed in a sealed cabinet, an internal air cooling system must be
installed to circulate the air and prevent hot spots. It is best to install the fan above the
components to optimize the air flow (suction).


Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 51
Cooling unit
Switching cabinet

Figure 2-25 Examples of cabinet ventilation

CAUTION
The air guidance and arrangement of the cooling equipment must be chosen in such a way
as to prevent condensation from forming. If necessary, cabinet enclosure heating may have
to be installed.

If air conditioners are used, the relative air humidity of the expelled air increases as the air in
the air conditioner cools and may exceed the dew point. If the relative humidity of the air
entering the SINAMICS equipment is over 80% for an extended period of time, the insulation
in the equipment may fail to function properly due to electrochemical reactions (refer to
System Overview). Using air baffle plates, for example, you must ensure that the cold air
expelled from the air conditioner mixes with warm air in the cabinet before it enters the
equipment. This reduces the relative air humidity to uncritical values.
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
52 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.6.4 Power Loss of the SINUMERIK Components
The following power losses apply to operation with rated power:
Table 2- 6 List of power losses
Component Power loss
NCU 710.2 170 W
NCU 720.2 174 W
NCU 720.2 PN 216 W
NCU 730.2 216 W
NCU 730.2 PN 225 W
NX1x.x 20 W
2.6.5 Power Loss of the SINAMICS Components
The tables below provide an overview of the power loss of all components during rated
operation. The characteristic values apply for the following conditions:
Line voltage for Line Modules 400 V
Pulse frequency of the Motor Modules 4 kHz
Rated pulse frequency of the Active Line Modules 8 kHz
Operating components at their rated power
The total losses of the relevant power unit (Line Module, Motor Module) are calculated from
the power loss and the corresponding electronics loss of the power unit.
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 53
2.6.6 Power loss for Control Units, Sensor Modules, and other system components
Table 2- 7 Overview of power loss during rated operation for Control Units, Sensor Modules, and
other system components
Unit Power loss
Control Units and Option Boards
CU320 W 20
CU320-2 DP W 24
TB30 W < 3
CBC10 W < 3
CBE20 W 2,8
Sensor Modules
SMC10 W < 10
SMC20 W < 10
SMC30 W < 10
SME20 W 4
SME25 W 4
SME120 W 4,5
SME125 W 4,5
Terminal Modules
TM15 W < 3
TM31 W < 10
TM41 W 10
TM54F W 4,5
Additional system components
VSM10 W < 10
DC-link components
Braking Module W 20
Capacitor Module W 25
Control Supply Module
Line
DC link

W

70
65
Voltage Clamping Module W 50
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
54 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.6.7 Power loss for line filters and line reactors
Table 2- 8 Overview of power loss during rated operation for line filters and line reactors
Unit Power loss
Basic Line Filter for Active Line Modules
16 kW W 16
36 kW W 26
55 kW W 43
80 kW W 56
120 kW W 73
Basic Line Filter for Active Line Modules with Active Interface Module
16 kW W 16
36 kW W 26
55 kW W 43
80 kW W 56
120 kW W 73
Wideband Line Filter for Active Line Modules
16 kW W 70
36 kW W 90
55 kW W 110
80 kW W 150
120 kW W 200
Basic Line Filter for Smart Line Modules
5 kW W 5
10 kW W 9
16 kW W 16
36 kW W 26
Basic Line Filter for Basic Line Modules
20 kW W 16
40 kW W 26
100 kW W 73
Active Interface Modules
16 kW W 270
1)

36 kW W 340
1)

55 kW W 380
1)

80 kW W 490
1)

120 kW W 585
1)

Line reactors for Active Line Modules (HF/HFD line reactors)
16 kW W 170
36 kW W 250
55 kW W 350
80 kW W 450
120 kW W 590
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 55
Unit Power loss
Line reactors for Smart Line Modules
5 kW W 62
10 kW W 116
16 kW W 110
36 kW W 170
Line reactors for Basic Line Modules
20 kW W 130
40 kW W 270
100 kW W 480
1) Referred to VDC link 600 V
2.6.8 Power loss for power units with internal air cooling
Table 2- 9 Overview of power loss at rated operation for power units with internal air cooling
(including electronics losses)
Unit Power loss
Active Line Modules
16 kW W 282,8
36 kW W 666
55 kW W 945,6
80 kW W 1383,6
120 kW W 2243,2
Smart Line Modules Booksize
5 kW W 79,2
10 kW W 141,6
16 kW W 187,8
36 kW W 406
Smart Line Modules Booksize Compact
16 kW W 187,8
Basic Line Modules
20 kW W 144
40 kW W 283,6
100 kW W 628
Single Motor Modules Booksize
3 A W 50,4
5 A W 75,4
9 A W 100,4
18 A W 185,4
30 A W 309,2
45 A W 455,2
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
56 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Unit Power loss
60 A W 615,2
85 A W 786
132 A W 1270,4
200 A W 2070,4
Single Motor Modules Booksize Compact
3 A W 68
1)

5 A W 98
1)

9 A W 100,4
18 A W 185,4
Double Motor Modules Booksize
3 A W 97,6
5 A W 132,6
9 A W 187,6
18 A W 351,2
Double Motor Modules Booksize Compact
1.7 A W 114
1)

3 A W 134
1)

5 A W 194
1)

1) Power loss at 8 kHz
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 57
2.6.9 Power loss for power units with external air cooling
Table 2- 10 Overview of power loss at rated operation for power units with external air cooling (including electronics
losses)
Unit Internal
Power loss
1)

External power loss Total power loss
Active Line Modules
16 kW W 82,8 (60 + 22,8) 200 282,8
36 kW W 171 (135 + 36,0) 495 666
55 kW W 245,6 (200 + 45,6) 700 945,6
80 kW W 338,6 (305 + 33,6) 1045 1383,6
120 kW W 533,2 (490 + 43,2) 1710 2243,2
Smart Line Modules
5 kW W 41,2 (22 + 19,2) 38 108,2
10 kW W 66,6 (45 + 21,6) 75 141,6
Single Motor Modules
3 A W 35,4 (15 + 20,4) 15 50,4
5 A W 43,4 (23 + 20,4) 30 73,4
9 A W 55,4 (35 + 20,4) 45 100,4
18 A W 95,4 (75 + 20,4) 90 185,4
30 A W 99,2 (80 + 19,2) 210 309,2
45 A W 135,2 (110 + 25,2) 320 455,2
60 A W 160,2 (135 + 25,2) 455 615,2
85 A W 196 (160 + 36,0) 590 786
132 A W 270,4 (250 + 20,4) 1000 1270,4
200 A W 455,4 (435 + 20,4) 1615 2070,4
Double Motor Modules
3 A W 62,6 (35 + 27,6) 35 97,6
5 A W 72,6 (45 + 27,6) 60 132,6
9 A W 92,6 (65 + 27,6) 95 187,6
18 A W 111,2 (80 + 31,2) 240 351,2
1) Power loss of the power electronics + power loss of the 24 V electronics
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
58 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.6.10 Power loss for power units with cold plate
With cold-plate cooling, only part of the power loss remains in the cabinet.
The table below shows the internal and external power loss of the components.

Table 2- 11 Overview of power loss at rated operation for power units with cold plate (including electronics losses)
Unit Internal power loss
1)
External power loss Total power loss
Active Line Modules
16 kW W 70,4 (50 + 20,4) 210 280,4
36 kW W 135,2 (110 + 25,2) 520 655,2
55 kW W 187,6 (160 + 27,6) 740 927,6
80 kW W 283,6 (250 + 33,6) 1100 1383,6
120 kW W 443,2 (400 + 43,2) 1800 2243,2
Smart Line Modules Booksize
5 kW W 34,4 (20 + 14,4) 40 74,4
10 kW W 56,8 (40 + 16,8) 80 136,8
Smart Line Modules Booksize Compact
16 kW W 56,6 (36,2 + 20,4) 130 186,6
Basic Line Modules
20 kW W 46,6 (25 + 21,6) 95 141,6
40 kW W 71,4 (45 + 26,4) 205 276,4
100 kW W 168,4 (130 + 38,4) 450 618,4
Single Motor Modules Booksize
3 A W 27,6 (12 + 15,6) 18 45,6
5 A W 35,6 (20 + 15,6) 35 70,6
9 A W 45,6 (30 + 15,6) 50 95,6
18 A W 80,6 (65 + 15,6) 100 180,6
30 A W 85,6 (70 + 15,6) 220 305,6
45 A W 108 (90 + 18,0) 340 448
60 A W 128 (110 + 18,0) 480 608
85 A W 149,2 (130 + 19,2) 620 769,2
132 A W 220,4 (200 + 20,4) 1050 1270,4
200 A W 370,4 (350 + 20,4) 1700 2070,4
Single Motor Modules Booksize Compact
3 A W 25,6 (10 + 15,6) 40 65,6
5 A W 30,6 (15 + 15,6) 65 95,6
9 A W 45,6 (30 + 15,6) 50 95,6
18 A W 80,6 (65 + 15,6) 100 180,6
Double Motor Modules Booksize
2x3 A W 55,6 (34 + 21,6) 36 91,6
2x5 A W 61,6 (40 + 21,6) 65 126,6
2x9 A W 81,6 (60 + 21,6) 100 181,6
2x18 A W 95,2 (70 + 25,2) 250 345,2
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 59
Unit Internal power loss
1)
External power loss Total power loss
Double Motor Modules Booksize Compact
2x1.7 A W 42 (20,4 + 21,6) 72 114
2x3 A W 44 (22,4 + 21,6) 90 134
2x5 A W 59 (37,4 + 21,6) 135 194
1) Power loss of the power electronics + power loss of the 24 V electronics


Note
Lower average power losses are obtained for intermittent duty.


2.6.11 Power loss for liquid-cooled power units
Table 2- 12 Overview of power loss during rated operation for liquid-cooled power units (including electronics losses)
Unit Internal power loss
1)
External power loss Total power loss
Active Line Modules
120 kW W 443,2 (400 + 43,2) 1800 2243,2
Single Motor Modules
200 A W 370,4 (350 + 20,4) 1700 2070,4
1) Power loss of the power electronics + power loss of the 24 V electronics
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
60 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.6.12 Electronics losses of power units
Table 2- 13 Electronics losses for power units with internal/external air cooling
Component Internal/external air cooling
Power loss [W]
3 A 20,4
5 A 20,4
9 A 20,4
18 A 20,4
30 A 19,2
45 A 25,2
60 A 25,2
85 A 36,0
132 A 20,4
Single Motor Modules
200 A 20,4
3 A 20,4
5 A 20,4
9 A 20,4
Single Motor Modules Booksize
Compact
18 A 20,4
3 A 27,6
5 A 27,6
9 A 27,6
Double Motor Modules
18 A 31,2
1.7 A 27,6
3 A 27,6
Double Motor Modules Booksize
Compact
5 A 27,6
16 kW 22,8
36 kW 36,0
55 kW 45,6
80 kW 33,6
Active Line Modules
120 kW 43,2
20 kW 24
40 kW 33,6
Basic Line Modules
100 kW 48
5 kW 19,2
10 kW 21,6
16 kW 22,8
Smart Line Module
36 kW 36,0
Smart Line Module Booksize Compact 16 kW 22,8

Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 61
Table 2- 14 Electronics losses for power units with cold plate
Component Cold plate
Power loss [W]
3 A 15,6
5 A 15,6
9 A 15,6
18 A 15,6
30 A 15,6
45 A 18,0
60 A 18,0
85 A 19,2
132 A 20,4
200 A 20,4
2x3 A 21,6
2x5 A 21,6
2x9 A 21,6
Motor Modules Booksize
2x18 A 25,2
3 A 15,6
5 A 15,6
9 A 15,6
18 A 15,6
2x1.7 A 21,6
2x3 A 21,6
Motor Modules Booksize Compact
2x5 A 21,6
16 kW 20,4
36 kW 25,2
55 kW 27,6
80 kW 33,6
Active Line Modules
120 kW 43,2
5 kW 14,4 Smart Line Module Booksize
10 kW 16,8
Smart Line Module Booksize Compact 16 kW 20,4
20 kW 21,6
40 kW 26,4
Basic Line Modules
100 kW 38,4

Table 2- 15 Electronics losses for liquid-cooled power units
Component Liquid cooled
Power loss [W]
Motor Module 200 A 20,4
Active Line Module 120 kW 43,2
Structure of the drive group
2.6 Heat Dissipation of the Control Cabinet
Guidelines for machine configuration
62 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2.6.13 Dimensioning Climate Control Equipment
Cabinet manufacturers provide calculation programs for selecting climate control equipment.
It is important to know the power losses for the components and devices in the control
cabinet.
Formula to calculate the power loss
q = Q - k A T
q = thermal power that has to be dissipated through a refrigerator [W]
Q = power loss [W]
T = temperature difference between the room and cabinet interior [K]
k = thermal resistance value, e.g. sheet-steel, painted 5.5 [W/(m
2
* K)]
A = freestanding cabinet surface area [m
2
]
Example
Table 2- 16 Power loss calculation for a drive configuration
Component Number Total power loss [W]
(including electronic losses)
Total power loss [W]
CU320 )
1
1 20 20
Line filter 1 90 90
Line reactor 1 250 250
Active Line Module 36 kW 1 666 666
Motor Module 18 A 2 185.4 370.8
Motor Module 30 A 3 311.6 934.8
SMC 5 10 50
SITOP 20 1 53 53
Line contactor 1 12 12
Total: 2,446.6
1)
For information on NCU and NX, see Power Loss of the SINUMERIK Components (Page 52).
Assumption:
freestanding cabinet surface area A = 5 m
2

temperature difference between the room and cabinet interior T = 10 K
q = 2,446.6 W - 5.5 W/(m
2
K) 5 m
2
10 K = 2,171.6 W.

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 63
Communication within the system
3
3.1 Communication overview
1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10
64 128
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OFF
ON
Machine Control Panel
S7 Hardware Confg
Switch
Switch position:
Server
Obtain lP
address
Obtain lP
address
X130:
Display of lP address in menu:
"Diagnostics" "TCP/lP bus"
"TCP/lP diagnostics"
OP with TCU
PG/PC
System network
Company network
Service
192.168.214.1 System network
192.168.215.1 Service (standard)
255.255.255.0
X20/Port 1
X21/Port 2
X127:
lP: 192.168.215.1
Sub.: 255.255.255.224
X120:
lP: 192.168.214.1
Sub.: 255.255.255.0
Ethernet 2
SlNUMERlK 840D sl
PCU 50.3
Ethernet 1
lP: 192.168.214.241
lP: 192.168.214.192
X130
Ethernet X127
Ethernet TCP/lP X120

Figure 3-1 Example based on the SINUMERIK 840D sl network configuration

Note
The significance of items to is explained on the pages that follow.

Communication within the system
3.1 Communication overview
Guidelines for machine configuration
64 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
(NCU)
IP assignment of the server
The ports need to be activated if VNC and HMI/Step7 are to be used (SW2.4.xxx and
higher):
/user/system/etc/basesys.ini
[LinuxBase]
FirewallOpenPorts="TCP/102 TCP/5900"
(S7 Hardware Config)
If the DHCP of the NCU (X120) is active:
Set the "Settings system network" program on the "TCU support" tab.
Set "No boot support".

Access parameters need to be set in the S7 hardware configuration.
1. Check the network connection (ping on selected access path X120/X130/X127).
2. Select the PG/PC interface in SIMATIC Manager.



Note
Do not select "TCP/IP (AUTO)" or "ISO Ind. Ethernet ..." under any circumstances!

3. Set parameters for HW Config Machine control panel using the selected access IP
address (X120/X130/X127).
4. Load the parameter assignment to the station.

NOTICE

SW 2.4 and higher:
The ports must be activated first where connections via the company network are
involved (X130).

Communication within the system
3.1 Communication overview
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 65
(PG/PC)

On the system network (X120): On the service network (X127):
TCP/IP Internet protocol
properties
general
Set fixed IP addresses
Example:
IP: 192.168.214.250
Sub.: 255.255.255.0
TCP/IP Internet protocol
properties
general
IP address obtained automatically
(System Network Center > TCU support)
When TCU PCU50.3 (HMI Advanced) is powered up, the IP address of the PCU must be
entered in the
/user/common/<TCU-Name>/common/tcu/config.ini
file:
[Station]
mcpIndex=
tcuIndex=
dckEnable=
MaxHostIndex=1
[host_1]
Address=192.168.214.241
Communication within the system
3.1 Communication overview
Guidelines for machine configuration
66 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
(machine control panel Industrial Ethernet)
Note
The Service menu (Backup/Restore) is only available for an analog monitor, TCU OP, or
PCU OP.

mcp_client.ini file:
copy mcp_client.ini from
/siemens/sinumerik/mcp_client/mcp_client.ini
to
/user/sinumerik/mcp_client/mcp_client.ini
"addrMode" change: 1=DNS (default) 0=HWS
This may be required after a change of software if the machine control panel no longer
uses PROFIBUS for communication
Organization block 100 (OB100):
CALL "RUN_UP" , "gp_par
"MCPNum :=1
MCP1BusAdr :=192 // bus address in accordance with MCP switch
MCPMPI :=FALSE
MCPSDB210 :=FALSE
MCPCopyDB77 :=FALSE
MCPBusType :=B#16#55 (PROFIBUS = 3)




Note
In B#16#55, the initial "5" refers to the first machine control panel and the last "5" refers to
the second.

Communication within the system
3.2 X122 and X132 Interface Overview
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 67
3.2 X122 and X132 Interface Overview
X122 and X132 interfaces for NCU 7x0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Digital inputs
Pin 1 - 4
Digital inputs/digital outputs
Pin 7 - 8 and 10 - 11
X132 X122

Figure 3-2 X122 and X132 interfaces for NCU 7x0

Note
The NX1x component has only the X122 interface.

Communication within the system
3.2 X122 and X132 Interface Overview
Guidelines for machine configuration
68 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
X122 and X132 block diagram for NCU 7x0
. . . .
+
M
X10n X101 X100
X126
M
+
3)
3)
2)
2)
Dl 0
X122
4
3
2
1
Dl 1
Dl 3
Dl 2
5
M 1
M
6
Dl/DO 8
7
8
9
10
11
12
Dl/DO 9
1)
Dl/DO 10
1)
Dl/DO 11
1)
M
M
Dl 4
X132
4
3
2
1
Dl 5
Dl 7
Dl 6
5
M 2
M
6
Dl/DO 12
7
8
9
10
11
12
Dl/DO 13
1)
Dl/DO 14
1)
Dl/DO 15
1)
M
M
+ 24 V
M
X124
M
+
M
+
M
X136
Ext.
24 V
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

n
SlNUMERlK NCU 7x0
PROFlBUS
PROFlBUS/MPl
1) Rapid inputs/outputs
(must be shielded)
2) Jumper open,
electrical isolation for
digital inputs (Dl)
3) Parameterizable
as input/output
4)
4) Number n depends on
NCU version

Figure 3-3 X122 and X132 block diagram for NCU 7x0
Communication within the system
3.3 NCU 7x0 and NX1x Terminal Assignment
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 69
X122 block diagram for NX1x
Numerical extension NX..
Ext.
24 V
+
1) High-speed inputs/outputs
(must be shielded)
2) Jumper open,
galvanic isolation for
digital inputs (Dl)
3) Can be parameterized as
input/output
M
X103 X102
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

1
X101 X100
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

3
M
+
3)
2)
Dl 0
X122
4
3
2
1
Dl 1
Dl 3
Dl 2
5
M 1
M
6
Dl/DO 8
7
8
9
10
11
12
Dl/DO 9 1)
Dl/DO 10 1)
Dl/DO 11 1)
M
M
+ 24 V
M
X124
M
+
M
+
M

Figure 3-4 NX1x block diagram
3.3 NCU 7x0 and NX1x Terminal Assignment
Introduction
When the drive wizard is used, various terminals are pre-assigned for commissioning:
For the NCU 7x0:
X122
X132
For the NX1x:
X122
Communication within the system
3.3 NCU 7x0 and NX1x Terminal Assignment
Guidelines for machine configuration
70 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Terminal assignment X122 (NCU 7x0)

Pin
no.
Function Assignment recommendation BICO source/sink Macro number
(up to SW 2.5)
ON/OFF 1 infeed for:
Line Module with DRIVE-CLiQ connection
CU: r0722.0 Line Module: p0840 1 1 Input
1)

Alternative assignment:
"Infeed ready signal" for:
Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ connection

SLM X21.1

Drive p0864

5
2 Input "OFF3 rapid stop"

CU: r0722.1 Each drive
2. OFF3, p0849
1
5
3 Input SH/SBC 1 - Group 1
SINAMICS Safety Integrated
(SH enable = p9601)
CU: r0722.2 p9620 (all drives in
the group)
4 Input SH/SBC 2 - Group 2
SINAMICS Safety Integrated
(SH enable = p9601)
CU: r0722.3 p9620 (all drives in
the group)


No pre-
assignment
5 Ground for pins 1 ... 4
6 - Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
7 Output SH/SBC 1 - Group 1
SINAMICS Safety Integrated
CU: p0738 p9774 Bit 1
BICO from CU after
the first drive in the
group
8 Output SH/SBC 2 - Group 2
SINAMICS Safety Integrated
CU: p0739 p9774 Bit 1
BICO from CU after
the first drive in the
group



No pre-
assignment
9 Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
10 Input BERO 1 - zero mark substitute CU: r0722.10 Drive: p0495 = 2 No pre-
assignment
Probe 1 - central measurement (MD13210 =
0)
CU: p0680[0] =
3
Each drive
p0488[n] = 0
1 and 5 11 Input
Alternative assignment:
Probe 1 - distributed measurement
(MD13210 = 1)

CU: p0680[0] =
0

Each drive
p0488[n] = 3

No pre-
assignment
12 Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
1)
Positive edge required!
Communication within the system
3.3 NCU 7x0 and NX1x Terminal Assignment
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 71
Terminal assignment X132 (for NCU 7x0)

Pin
no.
Function Assignment recommendation BICO source/sink Macro
number
1 Input Digital input $A_IN[1] CU: r0722.4 CU: p2082[0]
2 Input Digital input $A_IN[2] CU: r0722.5 CU: p2082[1]
3 Input Digital input $A_IN[3] CU: r0722.6 CU: p2082[2]
Digital input $A_IN[4] CU: r0722.7 CU: p2082[3]

1 and 5
4 Input
Alternative assignment:
Line contactor, feedback signal
CU: r0722.7 Line Module: p0860 No pre-
assignment
5 Ground for pins 1, 2, 3, 4
6 Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
Infeed operation (Line Module with
DRIVE-CLiQ connection)
LM :r0863.0 CU: p0742 1 7 Output
Alternative assignment:
Digital output $A_OUT[4]

CU: p2091.3

CU: p0742

5
Infeed ready to start (Line Module with
DRIVE-CLiQ connection)
LM : r0899.0 CU: p0743 1 8 Output
Alternative assignment:
Digital output $A_OUT[3]

CU: p2091.2

CU: p0743

5
9 Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
Digital output $A_OUT[2] CU: p2091.1 CU: p0744 1/5 Output
Alternative assignment:
Line contactor control

LM : r0863.1

CU: p0744
No pre-
assignment
BERO 2 - zero mark substitute CU: r0722.14 Drive: p0495 = 5
10
Alternativ
e:
Input
2. OFF 2 CU: r0722.14 Drive: p0845
No pre-
assignment
Output Digital output $A_OUT[1] CU: p2091.0 CU: p0745 1 and 5
Probe 2 - central measurement
(MD13210 = 0)
CU: p0680[1] = 6
CU: p0728
Bit 15=0
Each drive
p0489[n] = 0
11
Alternativ
e: Input
Probe 2 - distributed measurement
(control MD13210 = 1)
CU: p0680[1] = 0
CU: p0728
Bit 15=0
Each drive
p0489[n] = 6


No pre-
assignment
12 Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
Communication within the system
3.3 NCU 7x0 and NX1x Terminal Assignment
Guidelines for machine configuration
72 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Terminal assignment X122 (NX 10/15)

Pin
no.
Function Assignment recommendation BICO source/sink Macro
number
1 Input
1)
"Infeed ready signal" NX: r8510.0
2)
(NX: r0722.0
3)
)
Drive: p0864
2 Input "OFF3 - rapid stop"

NX: r8511.1
2)

(NX: r0722.1
3)
)
Each drive
2. OFF3, p0849
3 Input SH/SBC 1 - Group 1
SINAMICS Safety Integrated (SH
enable = p9601)
NX: r0722.2 p9620 (all drives in the
group)
4 Input SH/SBC 2 - Group 2
SINAMICS Safety Integrated (SH
enable = p9601)
NX: r0722.3 p9620 (all drives in the
group)


No pre-
assignment



No pre-
assignment
5 Ground for pins 1, 2, 3, 4
6 Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
7 Output SH/SBC 1 - Group 1
SINAMICS Safety Integrated
NX: p0738 r9774 bit 1
BICO from CU after the
first drive in the group
8 Output SH/SBC 2 - Group 2
SINAMICS Safety Integrated
NX: p0739 p9774 bit 1
BICO from CU after the
first drive in the group


No pre-
assignment
9 Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
10 Input BERO 1 - zero mark substitute NX: r0722.10 Drive: p0495 = 2
BERO 2 - zero mark substitute NX: r0722.11 Drive: p0495 = 3 11 Input
Alternative assignment:
2. OFF 2

NX: r0722.11

Drive: p0845

No pre-
assignment
12 Ground for pins 7, 8, 10, 11
1)
Positive edge required!
2)
Pre-assignment as part of "device configuration" commissioning
3)
With external wiring
n
Encoder index
Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 73
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
3.4.1 Ways of connecting the line supply
A distinction is made between:
Direct operation of the line connection components on the supply system
Operating line connection components via an autotransformer
Operating line connection components via an isolating transformer
Line
filter
(optional)
Line
reactor
Active
lnterface
Module
Basic
Line
Filter
(optional)
Active
Line
Module
Line
Module
(ALM,
SLM,
BLM)
TN system
3)
Autotransfor-
mer
lsolation
transformer
Direct connection
380 V 3 AC to 480 V 3 AC +/-10%
Type B AC/DC-sensitive RCCB (optional)
1)
RCCB,
not AC/DC-sensitive,
type A and type AC
Line voltage
< 480 V 3 AC +10%
1)
Line voltage
> 480 V 3 AC +10%
2)
lnstallation altitude > 2,000 m
2)
Line filter required
on lT/TT systems
1) TN or TT systems with grounded neutral point or lT systems with monitoring
2) Any supply system
3) With grounded neutral point
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
D
C
N
D
C
P
D
C
N
D
C
P

Figure 3-5 Overview of line connection versions

Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
74 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1


Note
Line connection of motors
In combination with the drive system, the motors are generally approved for operation on
TN and TT systems with grounded neutral point and on IT systems.
In operation on IT systems, the occurrence of a first fault between an active part and
ground must be signaled by a monitoring device. In accordance with IEC 60364-4-41, it is
recommended that the first fault be eliminated as quickly as is practically possible in order
to minimize the temporary overload of the motor insulation.
In all other systems, except TN and TT systems with grounded neutral point and IT
systems, such as systems with a grounded line conductor, an isolation transformer with
grounded neutral point (secondary side) must be connected between the supply and the
drive system in order to protect the motor insulation from excessive stress.


3.4.2 Operation of the line connection components on the supply network
The SINAMICS S Booksize converter system is rated for direct operation on TN, TT, and IT
line supply systems with a rated voltage of 380 V 3 AC to 480 V 3 AC.
L1
L3
PE
L2
W1 V1 U1
DCP DCN
Fuses
Line reactor
Line Module
Line contactor
(optional)
Further
consumers
Line filter
(optional)
Basic
Line Filter
Active
lnterface
Module
Active
Line
Module
Fuses
Line contactor
(optional)

Figure 3-6 Direct operation on the line supply
Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 75
3.4.3 Operation of the line connection components via an autotransformer
An autotransformer can be used to adapt the voltage in the range up to 3-ph. 480 V AC +10
%.

DANGER
To ensure protective separation an isolating transformer must be used for voltages greater
than 3-ph. AC 480 V AC +10 %.

Applications:
The motor insulation must be protected from excessive voltages.
The active line module must provide a stabilized DC link voltage. This is possible with a
rated voltage of 380 V to 415 V.
A combination with motors that may be operated with a DC link voltage of up to 660 V,
and a line voltage > 415 V requires a controlled DC link voltage.
Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
76 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
W1 V1 U1
DCP DCN
L1
L3
PE
L2
Fuses
Line reactor
Line Module
Fuses
Autotransformer
Line contactor
(optional)
Line filter
(optional)
Further
consumers
Basic
Line Filter
Active
lnterface
Module
Active
Line
Module
Fuses
Fuses
Autotransformer
Line contactor
(optional)

Figure 3-7 Autotransformer
3.4.4 Operation of the line connection components via an isolating transformer
The isolating transformer converts the network configuration of the system (e.g. IT/TT
system) to a TN system. Additional voltage adaptation to the permissible voltage tolerance
range is possible.
An isolating transformer must be used in the following cases:
The insulation of the Motor Module and/or the motor is not suitable for the voltages that
occur.
There is no compatibility with an existing residual-current protective device.
Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 77
The installation altitude is higher than 2000 m above sea level.
A line filter should be used in a line supply system that is not a TN line supply system with
grounded neutral conductor.

CAUTION

If the supply voltage is greater than 480 V +10 %, it is not permissible to use an
autotransformer.
An isolating transformer must be used to ensure protective separation.

L1
L3
PE
L2
W1 V1 U1
DCP DCN
N
Fuses
Line reactor
Line Module
Fuses
lsolating transformer
Line contactor
(optional)
Line filter
(optional)
Further
consumers
Fuses
Fuses
lsolating transformer
Line contactor
(optional)
Basic
Line Filter
(optional)
Active
lnterface
Module
Active
Line
Module

Figure 3-8 Isolating transformer
Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
78 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
3.4.5 Residual-current operated circuit breakers (RCD)
Residual-current operated circuit breakers (RCD) can be used in addition to the overcurrent
protection devices provided.

DANGER
Residual-current circuit-breakers alone are not permissible to provide protection against
direct and indirect contact.

DANGER
As a general rule, the higher loop impedance of TT systems means they are not suitable for
tripping the installed overcurrent protection devices within the prescribed period should an
insulation fault occur. If TT systems are used, residual-current operated circuit breakers
should ideally be used in addition to the overcurrent protection devices.

Note
Operation on residual-current operated circuit breakers is currently only possible with Line
Modules up to and including 36 kW.

Please note the following:
It is only permissible to use a delayed tripping, selective AC/DC-sensitive residual-current
operated circuit breaker, type B.
The max. permitted grounding resistance of the "selective protective device" is observed
(83 max. for residual-current devices with 0.3 A rated differential current).
Accessible parts of the Power Drive System and the machine are connected to the
system's protective ground conductor.
The total length of the shielded power cables in the drive line-up (motor cables incl. line
supply conductors from line filters to the connecting terminals of the Line Module) must
be less than 350 m.
Only recommended line filters must be used during operation.
Only one residual-current circuit-breaker may be connected in series (cascading is not
possible).
Switching elements (disconnector unit, contactors) for connecting and disconnecting the
drive line-up have max. 35 ms delay time time between the closing/opening of the
individual main contacts.
Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 79
L1
L3
PE
L2
W1 V1 U1
DCP DCN
Fuses
Line filter
Line reactor
Line Module
Optional
Further
consumers
Line contactor
(optional)
Selective
universal current sensitive
residual-current circuit
breaker (RCCB)
Fuses
Optional
Line contactor
(optional)
Basic
Line Filter
Active
lnterface
Module
Active
Line
Module

Figure 3-9 Connecting a residual-current operated circuit breaker
Recommendation
SIEMENS selectively switching AC/DC-sensitive residual-current circuit-breakers in
accordance with EN 61009-1 of the 5SM series (e.g. 5SM3646-4 or 5SM3646-4+5SW3300
with an auxiliary disconnector (1 NC contact / 1 NO contact) for a rated current of 63 A and
rated fault current of 0.3 A (see catalog "BETA Modular Installation Devices - ET B1")).

NOTICE
AC or pulse-sensitive RCCBs are not suitable.

Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
80 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
3.4.6 Residual-current monitors (RCM)
Used in conjunction with appropriate circuit breakers, residual-current monitors (RCMs)
provide fire and system protection even at high levels of grounding resistance (in TT
systems, for example).

DANGER
Residual-current monitors must always be used in conjunction with appropriate circuit
breakers.

DANGER
As a general rule, the higher loop impedance of TT systems means they are not suitable for
tripping the installed overcurrent protection devices within the prescribed period should an
insulation fault occur. When operating on TT systems at infeed powers above 55 kW and
with systems that extend across a large area, residual-current monitors must be installed in
addition to appropriate circuit breakers.

Please note the following:
It is only permissible to use a delayed tripping, AC/DC-sensitive RCM type B, in order to
ensure reliable tripping even with smooth residual currents.
Accessible parts of the power drive system and the machine are connected to the
system's protective conductor.
The protective conductor must not be routed through the measuring current transformer,
as this would negate its protection function.
Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 81
Residual-
current
monitor
Line filter
Line reactor/
AlM
Measuring
current
transformer
Circuit
breaker
lsolation
transformer
PE
L2
PE
L3
L1
l > l > l > U <
A1 A2
11 12

Figure 3-10 Connecting a residual-current monitor
Recommendation
Bender AC/DC-sensitive residual-current monitor RCMA471LY, with measuring current
transformer W120B (120 mm) or W210B (210 mm)
Circuit breaker with thermal overload release, short-circuit release, and undervoltage
release
To protect the units against line-side surge voltages, you are advised to install an
overvoltage protection device directly at the infeed point (upstream of the main switch). To
fulfill the requirements of CSA C22.2 no. 14-05, surge protection is essential. For examples
of suitable voltage surge arresters, see www.raycap.com (for example)
Communication within the system
3.4 Power Supply Interface Variants
Guidelines for machine configuration
82 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 83
Safety Integrated
4


WARNING
The following chapter describes the uses of the "Safety Integrated" functionality. The
detailed knowledge of the "Safety Integrated sl Function Manual" (FBSI sl) is assumed as
prerequisite.

4.1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated
SINAMICS Safety Integrated provides the following safety functions:
Safe standstill (SH)
Safe Brake Control

1. The functions must be released using parameters.
2. The control terminals for the Safe Standstill (SH) function can be grouped.
3. The functions are drive-integrated, i.e. they are present for each drive and must be
individually brought into operation for each drive.
4.1.1 Control of the "Safe Standstill" Safety Function
Terminals for safe standstill
The safe standstill function is selected/deselected separately for each drive using a specific
terminal on the Control Unit and Motor Module.
Control Unit
The required input terminal for safe standstill (SH) is selected via the BICO
interconnection (BI: p9620).
Digital input DI 0 ... DI 7 on the Control Unit can be used as a signal source (NCU). The
NX modules have DI 0 to DI 3 digital input.
Motor Module
The input terminal for "safe standstill (SH)" is terminal "EP" ("enable pulses").
Safety Integrated
4.1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
84 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Both terminals must be simultaneously energized, otherwise a fault will be issued.

Note
For the secure control of the safety functions using terminals, an external safety control, e.g.
safety relay (3TK28...) or SIMATIC S7 F control (e.g. ET200S F-DO- P/M-switching) in
accordance with EN954-1 or prEN 13849-1 must be provided.

SERVO,
VECTOR 1
SERVO, VECTOR n
SERVO, VECTOR 1
Control Unit
U2
V2
W2
Dl 2
Dl/
DO 8
M1
M
Motor Module 1
Motor Module n
3~
M
G
1
2
3
4
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
X21 / X22
X122.3
X122.5
X122.6
X122.7 Status
r9774.1 9774.1
p9620
722.2
p0738
Temp +
Temp -
EP +24 V
EP M
BR+
BR-
3TK28...
<1>
r0722.2
0
1
p0728.8 = 1
Safety control
Safe standstill in
the group active
Safe standstill
control
Safe standstill control
Signal must be led parallel to the Motor Modules of a group. <1>
Monitoring channel 1 (Control Unit)
Monitoring channel 2 (separate for each Motor Module)

Figure 4-1 Terminals for "safe standstill"
Safety Integrated
4.1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 85
SERVO,
VECTOR 1
SERVO, VECTOR n
SERVO, VECTOR 1
Control Unit
U2
V2
W2
Dl 2
Dl x
Dl/
DO 8
M1
M
M
P
<2>
<2>
Motor Module 1
Motor Module n
3~
M
G
1
2
3
4
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
X21 / X22
X122.3
X122.5
X122.6
X122.7 Status
r9774.1 9774.1
p9620
722.2
p0738
Temp +
Temp -
EP +24 V
EP M
BR+
BR-
ET200S
Dl-ST
ET200S
F-DO
<1>
r0722.2
0
1
p0728.8 = 1
DO x
(P)
DO x
(M)
Safety-
Controller
Safe standstill in
the group active
Safe standstill
control
Safe standstill control
Signal must be led parallel to the Motor Modules of a group.
Establish potential reference to the power supply of the ET200S.
<1>
<2>
Monitoring channel 1 (Control Unit)
Monitoring channel 2 (separate for each Motor Module)
F

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
,

e
.
g
.

C
P
U

3
1
5
-
F

Figure 4-2 Safe standstill terminals; control, e.g. with the fail safe output of the ET200S
Grouping drives
If the function is to be simultaneously initiated for several drives, the terminals for the
corresponding drives must be grouped together:
Control Unit
By appropriately interconnecting the binector input to a joint input terminal for the drives
to be combined to form a group.
Motor Module
By appropriately connecting terminal "EP" for the individual Motor Modules belonging to a
group.



Note
The same grouping must be set in both monitoring channels.
If a fault in a drive causes the safe standstill (SH), the other drives of the same group will
not automatically be placed in the safe standstill (SH).

Safety Integrated
4.1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
86 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Example: Terminal grouping for safe standstill (SH)
The "Safe standstill" function should be able to be selected/deselected separately for group
1 (drive 1 and 2) and group 2 (drive 3 and 4).
The same grouping for the safe standstill must be performed for both the Control Unit and for
the Motor Modules.
SERVO,
VECTOR l
SERVO, VECTOR n
SERVO, VECTOR l
SERVO,
VECTOR ll
SERVO, VECTOR m
SERVO, VECTOR ll
Control Unit
U2
V2
W2
Dl 2
Dl/
DO 8
M1
M
Motor Module l
Motor Module n
3~
M
G
1
2
3
4
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
X21 / X22
X122.3
X122.5
X122.6
X122.7 Status
Status
r9774.1 9774.1
p9620
722.2
p0738
Temp +
Temp -
EP +24 V
EP M
BR+
BR-
3TK28...
<1>
r0722.2
0
1
p0728.8 = 1
U2
V2
W2
Dl 3
Dl/
DO 9
Motor Module ll
Motor Module m
3~
M
G
1
2
3
4
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
X21 / X22
X122.4
X122.8
r9774.1 9774.1
p9620
722.3
p0739
Temp +
Temp -
EP +24 V
EP M
BR+
BR-
<1>
r0722.3
0
1
p0728.9 = 1
Safety control
Safe standstill in
the group active
(Group 1)
Safe standstill
control
(Group 1)
Safe standstill control (group 1)
Signal must be led parallel to the Motor Modules of a group. <1>
Establish potential reference to the power supply. <2>
<2>
Monitoring channel 1 (Control Unit)
Monitoring channel 2 (separate for each Motor Module)
Safe standstill in
the group active
(Group 2)
Safe standstill
control
(Group 2)
Safe standstill control (group 2)
Monitoring channel 1 (Control Unit)
Monitoring channel 2 (separate for each Motor Module)
Group 1
Group 2

Figure 4-3 Terminal grouping for "safe standstill"
Safety Integrated
4.1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 87
SERVO,
VECTOR l
SERVO, VECTOR n
SERVO, VECTOR l
SERVO,
VECTOR ll
SERVO, VECTOR m
SERVO, VECTOR ll
Control Unit
U2
V2
W2
Dl 2
Dl x
Dl/
DO 8
M1
M
M
P
<2>
<2>
Motor Module l
Motor Module n
3~
M
G
1
2
3
4
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
X21 / X22
X122.3
X122.5
X122.6
X122.7 Status
Status
r9774.1 9774.1
p9620
722.2
p0738
Temp +
Temp -
EP +24 V
EP M
BR+
BR-
ET200S
Dl-ST
ET200S
F-DO
<1>
r0722.2
0
1
p0728.8 = 1
DO x
(P)
DO x
(M)
Control Unit
U2
V2
W2
Dl 3
Dl y
Dl/
DO 9
P
<2>
Motor Module ll
Motor Module m
3~
M
G
1
2
3
4
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
DRlVE-
CLiQ
X21 / X22
X122.4
X122.8
r9774.1 9774.1
p9620
722.3
p0739
Temp +
Temp -
EP +24 V
EP M
BR+
BR-
ET200S
Dl-ST
ET200S
F-DO
<1>
r0722.3
0
1
p0728.9 = 1
DO y
(P)
DO y
(M)
Safety-
Controller
Safe standstill in
the group active
(Group 1)
Safe standstill
control
(Group 1)
Safe standstill control (group 1)
Signal must be led parallel to the Motor Modules of a group.
Establish potential reference to the power supply of the ET200S.
<1>
<2>
Monitoring channel 1 (Control Unit)
Monitoring channel 2 (separate for each Motor Module)
F

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
,

e
.
g
.

C
P
U

3
1
5
-
F
Group 1
Safe standstill in
the group active
(Group 2)
Safe standstill
control
(Group 2)
Safe standstill control (group 2)
Monitoring channel 1 (Control Unit)
Monitoring channel 2 (separate for each Motor Module)
Group 2

Figure 4-4 Safe standstill terminals grouping; control, e.g. with the fail safe output of the ET200S
Safety Integrated
4.1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
88 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Enabling the safe standstill (SH) function
The safe standstill (SH) function is enabled using the following parameters:

p9601.0 SH using terminals on the Control Unit
p9801.0 SH using terminals on the Motor Module
The "Safe standstill" function does not need to be enabled for applications that do not require
any Safety Integrated. All input terminals on the Control Unit can be used.
The SH terminal on the Motor Module does not need to be used.
Selecting/deselecting safe standstill
The "Safe standstill" function does not need to be selected/deselected concurrently in both
monitoring channels using input terminals and acts only on the affected drive.
1 signal: Deselection of the function
0 signal: Selection of the function
Restart once the safe standstill function has been selected
1. Deselect the function in each monitoring channel via the input terminals.
2. Issue drive enable signals.
3. Cancel the power-on inhibit and power-up again.
1/0 edge at input signal "ON/OFF1" (cancel power-on inhibit)
0/1 edge at input signal "ON/OFF1" (power-up drive)
4. Move/traverse the drives again.
Status with safe standstill
The status of the safe standstill (SH) function is indicated using the following parameters:

r9772 CO/BO: Safety Integrated Status (Control Unit)
r9872 CO/BO: Safety Integrated Status (Motor Module)
r9773 CO/BO: Safety Integrated Status (Control Unit + Motor Module)
r9774 CO/BO: Safety Integrated Status (Safe Standstill Group)
Safety Integrated
4.1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 89
4.1.2 Safe Brake Control (SBC)
Description
The Safe Brake Control (SBC) is used to control the holding brakes that operate using the
quiescent current principle.
Safe pulse cancellation for safe brake control (SBC)
When safe standstill is selected or when safety monitor functions respond with safe pulse
cancellation, SBC is initiated.

Note
The monitoring and the forced checking procedure of the brake outlet is possible only when
the brake is connected directly and not using a coupling relay to the connection terminals!

Safety Integrated
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
90 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
4.2.1 Fundamentals
Functions
SINUMERIK Safety Integrated can use not only "Safe standstill (SH)" and "Safe brake
control (SBC)", but also additional safety functions. The function and system description is
contained in the Safety Integrated sl function manual.
External safety-related process signals are read by an appropriate provided peripheral and
further processed by the system. An external safety relay (3TK28...) and a safety controller
(SIMATIC S7) are no longer essential.
4.2.2 Connection to Monitoring Channels
The following example illustrates the wiring possibilities of the ET200S PROFIsafe
component.
No complete plant with all required hardware and software settings is shown. Only the data
always required for the application is described for each of the used ET200S components. A
detailed description is contained in the associated product/function manuals.
The sensor/actuator connection for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated is performed using
PROFIBUS with PROFIsafe profile and PROFIsafe-conform peripheral modules (e.g.
ET200S, ET200eco or ET200pro).
Overview of the ET200S peripheral connection to the NCU
PROFlBUS

Figure 4-5 Overview of the ET200S peripheral connection to the NCU
Safety Integrated
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 91
Signal assignment and significance
Part of the signal assignment and significance for the PROFIsafe modules is explained in the
following section:
4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PROFIsafe electronic module
The safety-related I/O input signals are connected to this module. These sensors in the
example are optionally exclusive OR with two break contacts (emergency stop activator and
protective door interlocked state), i.e. provided with a break contact and a make contact
(agreement button) or with two make contacts (<drive on> button).
All of the sensor signals are connected through two channels.
VS 2
VS 1
Dl 0
Dl 4
VS 2
VS 1
Dl 1
Dl 5
VS 1
Dl 2
Dl 6
VS 2
VS 1
Dl 3
Dl 7
Emergency stop
Type: Break contact
Protective door closed
and locked
Type: Break contact
Agreement button
Type: Exclusive OR break /
make contact
Drives On
Type: Make contact

Figure 4-6 Signal assignment, electronics module, 4/8F-DI, 24 VDC, PROFIsafe
Meaning and use of the individual signals
Emergency stop activator [F-DI terminal 1 (channel 0), terminal 9 (channel 4)]
Signal state channel 0 = "1" and channel 4 = "1":
Emergency stop activator not pressed.
Signal state channel 0 = "0" and channel 4 = "0":
Emergency stop activator pressed.
Protective door interlocked state [F-DI terminal 5 (channel 1), terminal 13 (channel 5)]
The door switch only interlocks if the actuator is inserted. The contacts of the monitoring
circuit then signal the status "closed and interlocked"
Safety Integrated
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
92 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Signal state channel 1 = "1" and channel 5 = "1":
Protective door closed and interlocked.
Signal state channel 1 = "0" and channel 5 = "0":
Protective door not closed or not interlocked.
Agreement button [F-DI terminal 3 (channel 2), terminal 11 (channel 6)]
Signal state channel 2 = "1" and channel 6 = "0":
Agreement button pressed.
Signal state channel 2 = "0" and channel 6 = "1":
Agreement button not pressed.
Drives On button [F-DI terminal 7 (channel 3), terminal 15 (channel 7)]
Signal state channel 3 = "0" and channel 7 = "0":
Drives On button not pressed.
Signal state channel 3 = "1" and channel 7 = "1":
Drives On button pressed.

VS1: internal sensor supply for channel 0 to 3
VS2: internal sensor supply for channel 4 to 7

These two sensor supplies must be used when the short-circuit test is activated. The
exclusive OR sensor agreement button is an exception. For this sensor variant, in
conjunction with the short-circuit test, the VS1 sensor supply must be used for both contacts.
Electronics module 4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A PROFIsafe
The actuators that must be shut-down in a safety-related fashion are connected through two
channels. Each output channel can be separately shutdown.
Two valve units are connected in the configuration example. These are used to control the
motion of the supplementary pneumatic axis.
Safety Integrated
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 93
DO 0 (P)
DO 0 (M)
DO 2 (P)
DO 2 (M)
Possibly process feedback for
forced dynamization, fed to PLC
input
Possibly process feedback for
forced dynamization, fed to PLC
input
Valve
unit 1
Valve
unit 2

Figure 4-7 Signal assignment electronics module, 4F-DO, 24 VDC_2 A, PROFIsafe
Meaning and use of the individual signals
Valve unit 1 F-DO terminal 1,2 (channel 0 P/M)
Signal state channel 0 = "0"
Valve in the locked neutral position
Signal state channel 0 = "1"
Valve in the flow position
Not assigned [F-DO terminal 5,6 (channel 1 P/M)]
Valve unit 2 [F-DO terminal 9,10 (channel 2 P/M)]
Signal state channel 2 = "0"
Valve in the locked neutral position
Safety Integrated
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
94 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Signal state channel 2 = "1"
Valve in the flow position
Not assigned [F-DO terminal 13.14 (channel 3 P/M)]
Power module PM-E F
This module combines two functions. Not only can individual actuators (comparable with the
functionality of an F-DO module) be connected to all three two-channel output channels, but
the third DO2 output channel also has a further function.
The DO2 output channel is used to internally (no external wiring required) disconnect safety-
oriented (i.e. with two potentials) to supply power for the subsequent standard DO or also
standard DI modules. Namely, the outputs on the DO modules can not only be controlled
using a single channel in the PLC for the "normal" function, but also a safety-oriented
shutdown of the power supply for all DO modules following the PM-E F module is possible.
DO 0 (P)
DO 0 (M)
Valve
unit 3
Possibly process feedback
for forced dynamization, fed
to PLC input
Ext. wiring for additional
actuators, comparable with
DO 0, possible

Figure 4-8 Signal assignment, power module PM-E F PROFIsafe 24 V DC
Meaning and use of the individual signals
Valve unit 3 [PM-E F terminal 9,10 (channel 0 P/M)]
Signal state channel 0 = "0"
Valve in the locked neutral position
Signal state channel 0 = "1"
Valve in the flow position
Not assigned [PM-E F terminal 13.14 (channel 1 P/M)]
Safety Integrated
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 95
Not assigned [PM-E F terminal 11,12 or channel 15,16 (channel 2 P/M)]
Shutdown of the power supply for the following external standard DO module (terminal 11,12
or terminal 15,16)
Signal state, channel 2 = "0"
The supply power at the two P1/P2 voltage buses for the following standard DO module is
switched off.
Signal state, channel 2 = "1"
The supply power at the two P1/P2 voltage buses for the following standard DO module is
switched on.
Power module PM-D F 24 V DC PROFIsafe
The power module can switch off fail-safe the SG 1 to SG 6 voltage buses using six digital
outputs. The outputs are implemented using two P switches. There is a main power switch
for all six shutdown groups and six subsequent (downstream) individual switches for each
shutdown group.
The voltage bus U 1 (electronics power supply for the motor starter) is supplied with 24 V
DC. If an overvoltage or undervoltage condition exists, U 1 is shutdown through two P
switches and the subsequent (downstream) motor starters are brought into the passive state.
If the motor starter is safely shutdown, U 1 is not shutdown.
Through the six available shutdown groups (SG1...SG6), the power module is, among other
things, suitable for supplying fail-safe motor starters such as F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x.
Fail-safe direct starters F-DS1e-x
The fail-safe direct starter with electronic overload protection can either power-up or power-
down the connected motor (implemented in the application through the PLC I/O interface).
Further, when the SG signal is missing at the upstream PM-D F, the PM module can
shutdown the motor in a safety-related fashion.
Depending on the type, three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW can be connected and operated
with integrated protection against overload and short-circuit.
On the one hand, the SG 1...SG 6 safe shutdown group will be assigned to the fail-safe
motor starter using the STEP 7 hardware configuration. On the other hand, the assignment
is realized using the coding connector on the terminal module of the motor starter. Both
assignments must match one another.
Safety Integrated
4.2 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Guidelines for machine configuration
96 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Fail-safe
F-DS1e-x direct
starters
Switching groups
status display
SG1 ... SG6

Figure 4-9 Signal assignment, power module PM-D F 24 V DC PROFIsafe, fail-safe motor starter
Significance and use of the individual signals:
No (external) wiring is require (except for the 24 VDC power supply). The safety-oriented
shutdown is performed internally using the SG 1...SG 6 shutdown groups. In addition to the
safety-oriented shutdown using the upstream PM-D F PROFIsafe module, if the shutdown
group has been enabled, the motor starter can be enabled and disabled using its PLC output
interface.

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 97
Connection of the Components
5
5.1 Line Contactor Control
The line contactor is used for the electrical isolation of the drive group and the DC link from
the energy supply system.
When selecting a line contactor, the characteristic values in the technical data apply. The
cable routing, the bundling factor, and the factor for the ambient temperature according to
EN 60204-1 must be taken into account when dimensioning the various cables.

CAUTION
Line contactors must not be switched under load.

Note
To limit the switching overvoltage, the contactor coil must be connected to a surge
suppression device (e.g. freewheeling diode or varistor).
When the digital output is used to control the line contactor, its switching capacity must be
taken into account.

5.1.1 Line contactor control for Line Modules without DRIVE-CLiQ interface (5 kW
and 10 kW versions)
If a line contactor is required for Line Modules without DRIVE-CLiQ interface, it must be
controlled and monitored using an external controller. An appropriate activation and
deactivation sequence must be observed here otherwise the line contactor or the Line
Module can be damaged.
A largely load-free switching of the line contactor must be provided for the control of the line
contactor.

Activation:
Once the line contactor has been activated and a feedback is present, the enable pulse of
the -X21:3/4 terminal can be made.

Deactivation:
The deactivation of the line contactor may only be made in a specific timing for the enable
pulse (-X21:3/4) and/or ready (-X21:1) signals.
Connection of the Components
5.1 Line Contactor Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
98 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Enable pulse (EP):
A deactivation of the line contactor may only be made when the enable pulse (EP) signal
has been removed previously (t 10 ms). The current is removed during the delay time.
Ready:
When the ready message leaves the SLM, the line contactor may only, if required, be
deactivated after a delay time (t 10 ms). The current is removed during the delay time.
0 = EP
tt = 10 ms
2 = RDY
tt = 10 ms
3 = NS 3 = NS

Figure 5-1 Line contactor control signal chart
L1
L2
L3
Smart Line Module 5/10 kW
PLC
Dl
PLC
DO
PLC
DO
PLC
Dl
PLC
Dl
U1 V1 1 4 3 2
(0) (3)
(2)
3 X22: W1 X21:
EP
(M)
EP
(+24 V)
M
R
e
a
d
y
P
r
e
W
a
r
n
i
n
g
R
e
s
e
t
L+
M
Safety
control
P
u
l
s
e

e
n
a
b
l
e

Figure 5-2 Line Contactor Control for Smart Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ

Connection of the Components
5.1 Line Contactor Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 99


Note
If the line contactor should also be safely disconnected (safety), the control must be
integrated in an existing safety control. This is the only way to ensure the line contactor is
switched in accordance with the required safety categories; see also Section Safety
Integrated (Page 83).

5.1.2 Line Contactor Control for Line Modules with DRIVE-CLiQ Interface
Line Modules with DRIVE-CLiQ interface can control an external line contactor. The closing
and opening of the line contactor can be monitored by evaluating the feedback contact of the
line contactor. This control ensures that the line contactor always switches in a defined
manner and so prevents overloading or damaging the line contactor and/or the infeed.
The line contactor can be controlled using the r0863.1 bit of the INFEED drive object (for
840D sl and 16 kW to 120 kW Line Module).

Note
For further information about the line contactor, refer to the device manuals.

Note
If the line contactor should also be safely disconnected (safety), the control must be
integrated in an existing safety control. This is required so that the line contactor is switched
in accordance with the required safety categories. See also Section Safety Integrated
(Page 83).

Connection of the Components
5.1 Line Contactor Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
100 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.1.3 Line Contactor Control Commissioning using an Example
Assumption:
Line contactor control uses a digital output of the Control Unit (DI/DO 14)
Line contactor feedback uses a digital input of the Control Unit (DI/DO 7)
Line contactor switching time is less than 100 ms



Note
The parameter assignment for interface X132 at pins 4 and 10 must be changed using
the "SINUMERIK Operate" drive commissioning wizard.

Active Line Module
r0863.1 p0744 = 0863.1
L1
L2
L3
r0723.7 p0860 = 0723.7
DI/DO 14
X132.10
DI 7
X132.4
p728.8 = 1
24 V
1
p0861 =
100 ms
=1
<1>
T
&
&
0
Line connection
F07300 fault
Line contactor feedback missing
As output
Control contactor
Line contactor
feedback
The current carrying capacity of the
outputs must be observed. An auxiliary
contactor may need to be used.
<1>
Line contactor
closed

Figure 5-3 Line Contactor Control
Commissioning steps:

Note
If the current carrying capacity of the digital output may be exceeded, an auxiliary contactor
must be used (refer to the Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual).

1. Connect control contact of the line contactor to DI/DO 14.
2. Parameterize DI/DO 14 as output (p0728.14 = 1).
3. Interconnect (BI: p0744 = r0863.1) DI/DO 14 with "control contactor" signal (r0863.1).
4. Connect the feedback contact of the line contactor to DI 7.
5. Interconnect (BI: p0860 = r0723.7) p0860 with the inverted input signal (p0723.7).
6. Enter the monitoring time of the line contactor (p0861 = 100 ms).
Connection of the Components
5.1 Line Contactor Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 101
Function diagram overview
8934 missing enables, line contactor control
Parameter overview
r0863.1 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word
p0860 BI: Line contactor feedback
References
/LH1/SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
102 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
5.2.1 Safety information

NOTICE
Active Interface Modules must only be operated if the option "Line filter available" has been
set for the Active Line Module in the commissioning wizard, and if "AIM 400 V xxkW
(6SL3100-0BE**-*AB*)" has been selected as the line filter. When used in conjunction with
SINAMICS V2.6 and SINUMERIK 840D sl CNC SW 2.6, the appropriate AIM is already
set by default when the Starter wizard or the HMI drive wizard is run.
With software release SINAMICS V2.5, the default is "Wideband Line Filter"; this must be
changed manually to "AIM (P220 = 4*)".
Operation with SINAMICS SW < V2.5 or SINUMERIK 840D sl CNC SW <2.5 is not
permitted.
Before putting the Active Interface Module into operation, it is essential to connect 24 VDC
at connector X124 to supply the fans. Current required 1.2 A.
The temperature signaling contact of the Active Interface Module must be connected to the
temperature input of the associated Active Line Module.
If this is not the case, the Active Interface Module may be destroyed.

DANGER
The drive components generate high leakage currents in the protective conductor. The
components must only be operated in cabinets or in closed electrical operating areas and
must be connected with the protective conductor. To protect against electric shock, the
protective conductor connection at the control cabinet or machine must be implemented in
accordance with one of the following measures:
Fixed connection and protective conductor connection by means of 10 mm
2
Cu or
16 mm
2
Al
Fixed connection and automatic disconnection of the supply system if the protective
conductor is interrupted
(See connection example: Active Interface Module)

CAUTION
The surface temperatures of the component may be high.

DANGER
The cooling clearances of 80 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Note
The Active Interface Modules must only be operated in a vertical position ("hanging").

Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 103
5.2.2 Description
Active Interface Modules are line-side interfaces for the Active Line Modules.
They contain the following functional units:
Line reactor
Low-frequency/switching frequency filters
Line filter to EN61800-3, category C3, max. total motor cable length 350 m (shielded)
Reduction of the stress on the motor insulation from system-dependent resonance factors
In conjunction with an Active Line Module and an EMC-compliant configuration the following
radio interference voltage categories are achieved:
EN 61800-3 category C3 without an additional line filter up to a total cable length of
350 m (shielded) for 16 kW, 36 kW, 55 kW, 80 kW and 120 kW components
EN 61800-3 category C2 with an additional Basic Line Filter up to a total cable length of
350 m (shielded) for 16 kW, 36 kW, 55 kW, 80 kW and 120 kW components
EN 61800-3, category C3, with an additional Basic Line Filter up to a total cable length of
630 m (shielded) for 16 kW and 36 kW components
1000 m (shielded) for 55 kW, 80 kW, and 120 kW components
The Active Interface Module is fitted with a fan. The 24 V supply is essential for operating the
component. Connection of the temperature signaling contact to the Active Line Module is
also required.
Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
104 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.2.3 Operating an Active Interface Module on an isolated-neutral network (IT system)
Operating an Active Interface Module on an isolated-neutral network (IT system)
Note
When an Active Interface Module is operated in an isolated-neutral system (IT system), the
connection bracket for the interference-suppression capacitor in the AIM must be removed.
The connection bracket for the interference-suppression capacitor is located on the lower
side of the component.
If the connection bracket for the interference-suppression capacitor is not removed, an
insulated supply will be grounded and may cause tripping of the isolation monitor in the case
of failure.

There are no limits of interference for isolated-neutral systems. Removing the connection
bracket to the interference-suppression capacitor eliminates the effect of the filter against
ground. It nevertheless makes sense to install an Active Interface Module because the clock
frequency filter is still effective and also protects other loads on the same network from clock
frequency disturbances.

DANGER
The connecting bracket may only be removed in the de-energized state.
Risk of electric shock. A hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the power
supply has been switched off.







Remove the connection bracket for the
interference-suppression capacitor with
a Tx25 screwdriver.
Remove the connection bracket. Connection bracket for the
interference-suppression capacitor
5.2.4 IT systems
In IT systems, all live parts are isolated from ground, or one point is connected to ground
through an impedance. The exposed conductive parts of the electrical installation are either
grounded separately or grounded together, or jointly connected to the system ground.
Only Line Modules without a line filter are to be operated on this system type. The emitted
interference can exceed the limit values of category C3. The Active Interface Module must
be set for operation on an IT system.
Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 105
5.2.5 Electronics power supply X124
Table 5- 1 Terminal block X124
Terminal Function Technical specifications
+ Electronics power supply
+ Electronics power supply
M Electronics ground
+
M

M Electronics ground
Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
Current consumption: max. 1.6 A
Max. current via jumper in connector:
20 A at 55 C
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm
2



Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply voltage
is looped through.

5.2.6 X121 temperature sensor and fan control
Table 5- 2 Plug-in screw terminal X121
Terminal Designation Technical specifications
1 +Temp Output temperature switch
Must be connected to X21 of the Active Line Module
2 -Temp Temperature switch output
3 +24 V power supply for digital
inputs
Current carrying capacity: 500 mA

4 Disable Fan The fan can be disabled. The fan may only be switched
off while the Active Line Module is disabled.
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm
2



Note
If the terminals are not connected (or connected with low level), the fan will run in continuous
mode.

Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
106 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.2.7 Line/power connection
Table 5- 3 Type of connection
Terminals Designations
Line supply connection (line supply) L1, L2, L3
Load connection (load) U2, V2, W2
Active Interface Module
16 kW Connector, cross-section 16 mm
Tightening torque 1.7 Nm
36 kW Screw terminal, cross-section 50 mm, ferrule
Tightening torque 6 Nm
55 kW Screw terminal, cross-section 50 mm, ferrule (see section on screw terminals)
Tightening torque 6 Nm
80 / 120 kW Threaded bolt M8, cross-section 120 / 2 x 50 mm,
tightening torque 13 Nm
1)

1) for ring cable lugs to DIN 46234


Note
The connection terminals of the 36 kW and 55 kW Active Interface Modules are only certain
to be finger-safe if cables with a minimum cross-section of 25 mm and insulated ferrules are
used.

Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 107
5.2.8 Overview
When establishing a shield connection, please use an appropriate plate at the base of the
component (36 kW and above).
X121 signal contacts
Temperature switch
X124 Electronic power supply
Line connection
Load connection
Protective conductor connection
M5 / 3 Nm

Figure 5-4 Interface description: Active Interface Module 16 kW
Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
108 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
X121 signal contacts
Temperature switch
X124 Electronic power supply
Line connection
Load connection
Protective conductor connection
M6 / 6 Nm

Figure 5-5 Interface description: Active Interface Module 36 kW
Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 109
Line supply connection
Load connection
X121 signaling contacts
Temperature switch
X124 Electronics power
supply
Protective conductor connection
M6 / 6 Nm

Figure 5-6 Interface description: Active Interface Module 55 kW
Connection of the Components
5.2 Active Interface Module (AIM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
110 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Power
connection
Load connection
Protective conductor
connection M8 / 13 Nm
X121 signal contacts
Temperature switch
X124 Electronics
power supply

Figure 5-7 Interface description: Active Interface Module 80 kW and 120 kW
Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 111
5.2.9 Connection example
L3 L2 L1
X21
4
3
2
1
U1 V1 W1
DO
CU
+
M
+ Temp
- Temp
T1
T2
4
3
2
1
-
-
+
+
U2 V2 W2
8
PE
PE PE
Active lnterface
Module Active Line Module
X121
X124
Fan of
ext.
24 V
1)

Figure 5-8 Connection example: Active Interface Module
1) Digital input (DI) or digital output (DO) controlled by the Control Unit
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
5.3.1 Safety information

CAUTION
Only the line reactors or Active Interface Modules described in the Booksize Power Units
Equipment Manual (GH2) are to be used.
If line reactors are used that have not been approved by Siemens for SINAMICS S120:
The Line Modules may become damaged/faulty
Line reactions may occur and damage or interfere with other consumers powered from
the same network

CAUTION
If system oscillations do occur and no damping resistor is connected, impermissibly high
voltages may arise at the additional winding of the HFD line reactor. For this reason, it is
essential that a damping resistor be connected.

Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
112 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
CAUTION
The surfaces of the line reactors can become extremely hot. To prevent adjacent
components from suffering damage due to these high temperatures, a clearance of
100 mm must be left on all sides of the reactors. If this clearance cannot be observed,
additional measures such as shielding plates or a cooling function must be put in place.

CAUTION
Reactors generate magnetic fields. Components and cables which could be subject to
interference or be affected by these fields must, therefore, be located a sufficient distance
(at least 100 mm) away or be shielded accordingly.

Note
Connection cables
The connection cables between line reactor and Line Module, as well as between line
reactor and line filter, must be kept as short as possible (max. 10 m).
You must use shielded connection cables, whose cable shields are attached at both ends.
Shielding for connection cables in the mains supply interface may only be omitted if the
following conditions are met:
The cables do not exceed 1 m in length.
The cables are laid flush with the rear metal wall of the control cabinet.
The cables are laid in a way that keeps them physically separate from signal lines.
Do not route any cables near the line reactor. If this cannot be avoided, observe a minimum
distance of 150 mm.


Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 113
5.3.2 Combining line reactors and line filters
Y
e
s
Y
e
s
y
e
s

1
)
n
o

3
)
n
o

3
)
n
o

3
)
n
o

3
)
n
o

3
)
n
o

3
)
y
e
s

1
)
N
o
N
o
N
o
N
o
N
o
N
o
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e

f
o
r
P
r
o
p
e
r
t
i
e
s

t
h
a
t

c
a
n

b
e

r
e
a
c
h
e
d
R
a
d
i
o

i
n
t
e
r
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

s
u
p
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

a
c
c
o
r
d
i
n
g

t
o
S
e
l
e
c
t
e
d

c
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
s
A c t i v e L i n e M o d u l e
S m a r t L i n e M o d u l e
B a s i c L i n e M o d u l e
B a s i c L i n e F i l t e r
W i d e b a n d L i n e F i l t e r
A c t i v e l n t e r f a c e M o d u l e
E
N

6
1
8
0
0
-
3
-
C
2

s
u
m
m
i
n
g

c
a
b
l
e
S
h
i
e
l
d
e
d
E
N

6
1
8
0
0
-
3
-
C
3

s
u
m
m
i
n
g

c
a
b
l
e
S
h
i
e
l
d
e
d
D
C

l
i
n
k
s
t
e
p
-
u
p
f
a
c
t
o
r
o
r

r
e
c
t
i
f
i
e
d
v
a
l
u
e

B
6
l
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
e
d
C
l
o
c
k
f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
f
i
l
t
e
r
8

k
H
z
O
p
e
r
a
t
e
d

o
n
l
T

l
i
n
e

s
u
p
p
l
i
e
s
1
)

R
e
m
o
v
e

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

b
r
i
d
g
e
2
)

T
h
e

i
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h

o
f

t
h
e

m
o
t
o
r
s

h
a
s

t
o

b
e

t
a
k
e
n

i
n
t
o

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
3
)

O
n
l
y

p
e
r
m
i
s
s
i
b
l
e

w
i
t
h

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

a
n
d

s
i
n
e
-
w
a
v
e

f
i
l
t
e
r
Y
e
s
Y
e
s
Y
e
s
Y
e
s
N
o
N
o
N
o
t

r
e
l
e
v
a
n
t
N
o
t

r
e
l
e
v
a
n
t
N
o
t

r
e
l
e
v
a
n
t
N
o
t

r
e
l
e
v
a
n
t
1
5
0

m
3
5
0

m
3
5
0

m
1
0
0
0

m
3
5
0

m
3
5
0

m
6
3
0

m
6
3
0

m
1
5
0

m
3
5
0

m
3
5
0

m
3
5
0

m
3
5
0

m
3
5
0

m
5 k W
1 0 k W
1 6 k W
3 6 k W
4 0 k W
5 5 k W
8 0 k W
1 0 0 k W
1 2 0 k W
2 0 k W
H F D l i n e r e a c t o r
F E l i n e r e a c t o r
N
o
t
e
l
d
e
a
l
l
y
,

n
e
w

s
y
s
t
e
m
s

u
s
i
n
g

A
c
t
i
v
e

L
i
n
e

M
o
d
u
l
e
s

s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

d
e
s
i
g
n
e
d

w
i
t
h

A
c
t
i
v
e

l
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

M
o
d
u
l
e
s

a
s

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

c
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
XX
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
,
4

-

2

2
)
1
,
4

-

2

2
)
1
,
4

-

1
,
6
1
,
4

-

1
,
6
1
,
4

-

1
,
6
1
,
3
5
1
,
3
5
1
,
3
5
1
,
3
5
1
,
4

-

2

2
)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Figure 5-9 Options for combining line reactors and line filters
Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
114 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.3.3 Description
The HFD reactor must be used to connect regulated infeed/regenerative feedback
components (Line Modules) to the network.
The HFD reactors perform the following functions:
Limiting of low-frequency line reactions
Energy store for the step-up operation of the infeed units
Current limiting for line supply oscillations
Together with a damping resistor, the HFD reactors dampen the system oscillations of the
converter system. HFD reactors with damping resistors are supplanting HF reactors
because they provide increased operational reliability and a longer lifetime.
The HFD reactor should be mounted as close as possible to the line supply infeed
component.
5.3.4 Line/power connection
Table 5- 4 Connection of HFD line reactors
Order number 6SL3000-0DE21-
6AAx
6SL3000-0DE23-
6AAx
6SL3000-0DE25-
5AAx
6SL3000-0DE28-
0AAx
6SL3000-0DE31-
2AAx
Power [kW] 16 36 55 80 120
Line supply
connection
1U1, 1V1, 1W1
POWER CAGE CLAMPS 95 mm
2
/self-
locking
1)

Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
Screw terminal 16
mm
2
/1.2 Nm
Screw terminal 35
mm
2
/2.5 Nm
Screw terminal 70
mm
2
/7 Nm
POWER CAGE CLAMPS 95 mm
2
/self-
locking
1)

PE connecting lug M10/25 Nm for ring
cable lugs in accordance with DIN
46234
PE connection Screw terminal 16
mm
2
/1.2 Nm
Screw terminal 35
mm
2
/2.5 Nm
Screw terminal 70
mm
2
/3.5 Nm
Note: No touch protection (IP00B acc.
to EN 60529)
Damping-resistor
connection
1, 2, 3 PE
Screw terminal max. 1.5 mm
2
/1.2 Nm
1) Refer to the chapter titled "Spring-loaded terminals"



Note
Data relating to the permissible tightening torques can also be found on the label showing
the terminal layout of the screw terminal for the corresponding HFD line reactor.


Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 115
5.3.5 Overview
Connection for
damping resistor
Line supply connection
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, PE
Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
PE, 3, 2, 1, PE, 1U1, 1U2, 1V1, 1V2, 1W1, 1W2, PE

Figure 5-10 HFD line reactor 16 kW
Connection for
damping resistor
Line supply connection
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, PE
Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
PE, 3, 2, 1, PE, 1U1, 1U2, 1V1, 1V2, 1W1, 1W2, PE

Figure 5-11 HFD line reactor 36 kW

Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
116 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Connection for
damping resistor
Line supply connection
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, PE
Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
PE, 3, 2, 1, PE, 1U1, 1U2, 1V1, 1V2, 1W1, 1W2, PE

Figure 5-12 HFD line reactor 55 kW

Connection for
damping resistor
Line supply connection
1U1, 1V1, 1W1
Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
1U2, 1U1 PE, 3, 2, 1 1V2, 1V1 1W2, 1W1
1

Figure 5-13 HFD line reactor 80 kW

Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 117
Connection for
damping resistor
Line supply connection
1U1, 1V1, 1W1
Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
1W2, 1W1 1V2, 1V1 PE, 3, 2, 1 1U2, 1U1

Figure 5-14 HFD line reactor 120 kW
5.3.6 Technical data
Table 5- 5 Technical data for HFD line reactors

Unit
6SL30000DE21-
6AAx
6SL30000DE23-
6AAx
6SL30000DE25-
5AAx
6SL30000DE28-
0AAx
6SL3000-0DE31-
2AAx
Power kW 16 36 55 80 120
Rated current Arms 30 67 103 150 225
Power loss
1)
W 170 250 350 450 590
Weight kg 13 21 27 37 67
Mounting position Any
1) For the data for rated operation/an overview, see the power loss tables in the chapter titled "Control cabinet installation".
Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
118 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.3.7 Dimension drawings
Warning label Terminal layout
Max. 75 (2.95) space for
cable installation
Rating plate
A
p
p
r
o
x
.

1
2
5

(
4
.
9
2
)
300 (11.81)
3(
0
.
1
2
)
175 0,5 (6.89 0.02)
1
5
0

(
5
.
9
1
)
1
3
6

0
,
5

(
5
.
3
5

0
.
0
2
)
8x15 (0.31x0.59)

Figure 5-15 Dimension drawing of HFD line reactor 16 kW, all dimensions in mm and (inches)
Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 119
M
a
x
.

2
3
5

(
9
.
2
5
)
Max. 75 (2.95) space
for cable installation
Terminal layout
Warning label
Rating plate
1
5
0

(
5
.
9
1
)
1
3
6

0
,
5

(
5
.
3
5

0
.
0
2
)
330 (12.99)
175 0,5 (6.89 0.02)
8x15
(0.31x0.59)
3

(
0
.
1
2
)

Figure 5-16 Dimension drawing of HFD line reactor 36 kW, all dimensions in mm and (inches)
Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
120 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Max. 75 (2.95) space
for cable installation
Terminal layout Rating plate
M
a
x
.

2
9
0

(
1
1
.
4
2
)
1
5
0
175 0,5 (6.89 0.02)
330 (12.99)
3

(
0
.
1
2
)
8x15
(0.31x0.59)
1
3
6

0
,
5

(
5
.
3
5

0
.
0
2
)

Figure 5-17 Dimension drawing of HFD line reactor 55 kW, all dimensions in mm and (inches)
Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 121
M
a
x
.

3
2
5

(
1
2
.
7
9
)
A
p
p
r
o
x
.

2
5
0

(
9
.
8
4
)
Max. 185 (7.28)
Rating plate 1
Rating plate 2 Terminal layout
Warning label
End holder
8

(
0
.
3
1
)
15
(0.59)
325 0,5 (12.79 0.02)
175 0,5 (6.88 0.02) 27
(1.06)
75 (2.95)
7
(
0
.
2
7
)
379 (14.92)
1
7
0

(
6
.
6
9
)
1
5
6

0
,
5

(
6
.
1
4

0
.
0
2
)
104 (4.09) 25 (0.98)
79 (3.11)
4
(
0
.
1
6
)

Figure 5-18 Dimension drawing of HFD line reactor 80 kW, all dimensions in mm and (inches)
Connection of the Components
5.3 HFD reactors for Active Line Modules
Guidelines for machine configuration
122 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Warning label Terminal layout
Rating plate 1
Rating plate 2
M
a
x
.

3
6
0

(
1
4
.
1
7
)
Max. 20
(7.79)
Lifting eyebolts
10 x 25 (0.39 x 0.98)
2
3
0

(
9
.
0
5
)
2
0
6

0
,
5

(
8
.
1
1

0
.
0
2
)
1
2
(
0
.
4
7
)
23
(0.90)
1
1
(
0
.
4
3
)
476 (18.74)
325 0,5 (12.79 0.02)
175 0,5 (6.89 0.02) 75
(2.95)
75,5
(2.97)
2
8
5

(
1
1
.
2
2
)
230 (9.05)
75 5 (2.95 0.19)
110 5
(4.33 0.19)
25 (0.98)
33 5
(1.29 0.19)
5
(
0
.
1
9
)

Figure 5-19 Dimension drawing of HFD line reactor 120 kW, all dimensions in mm and (inches)
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 123
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
5.4.1 Line Modules Overview
The Line Module is used to connect the drive group to the energy supply system.
The Line Module is used for the power infeed into the DC link.
In generator operation, the energy of the drives fed into the DC link will be returned to the
energy supply system. For an energy supply system that cannot accept any regenerative
energy (e.g. diesel generator), the regenerative capability of the Line Module must be
deactivated. The braking energy must then be converted into heat via a Braking Module with
braking resistor that also needs to be included in the drive group.
Line Modules can be directly connected to TN and TT systems, both with grounded neutral
point and grounded line conductor; they can also be connected to IT systems. Line Modules
have an integrated overvoltage protection function.
Additional references
/GH2/ SINAMICS S120, Booksize Power Units, 11/2009 edition, Section 3.2
Smart Line Module
The Smart Line Module is a non-regulated infeed/regenerative feedback unit. The
regenerative capability can be deactivated using a digital input.
The DC link is supplied using an uncontrolled diode bridge. The size of the DC link voltage is
based on the supply voltage according to the following formula: UDC link = Usupply * 1.35.
The following DC link values are achieved for the Smart Line Module:
Table 5- 6 Smart Line Module DC link voltages
Supply voltage 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 460 V 480 V
UDC link 513 V 540 V 561 V 594 V 621 V 648 V
The insulation voltage of the motors must be observed. (See the NC61 catalog or the
configuring guide for the motors.)

CAUTION
As soon as the energy supply is present at the infeed terminals (-X1:U1/V1/W1) of the
Smart Line Module, the DC link will be precharged.

Digital inputs/outputs are used exclusively to control and monitor the 5/10 kW types of the
Smart Line Module. No connection to the Control Unit using DRIVE-CLiQ exists.
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
124 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Active Line Module
The self-managed infeed/regenerative unit with booth converter creates an increased
controlled DC link voltage. This makes the connected Motor Modules independent of
tolerances in the energy supply system.
The Control Unit is used to control, trigger and monitor the Active Line Module. Data
exchange is performed via the DRIVE-CLiQ interface.
Control types:
The Active Line Module operates in two different control types depending on the
parameterized supply voltage (p0210).
Active Mode
The Active Line Module can control the DC link voltage in a rated voltage range of 3 AC
380 V to 3 AC 415 V; boost converter with controlled DC link voltage and sinusoidal
supply voltage.
Smart Mode
In the rated voltage range of 3 AC 416 V to 3 AC 480 V, the Smart Mode is automatically
activated and the supply system transistors will be switched to be synchronous with the
supply system. The DC link voltage is not regulated, but is based on the rectified supply
voltage according to the following formula: UDC link = Usupply * 1.35.
The setpoint for the DC link voltage (p3510) will be preassigned automatically.

The following DC link values will be attained for the Active Line Module in Active / Smart
Mode:
Table 5- 7 Active Line Module DC link voltages
Supply system voltage p0210 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 460 V 480 V
Active Mode (default values)
VDC set p3510 [V]
(with boost converter p3400.0=1)
600 V 600 V 600 V - - -
Smart Mode (p0210 x 1.35)
(without boost converter p3400.0=1)
513 V
1)

540 V
1)

561 V
1)

594 V
2)

621 V
2)

648 V
2)

1)
Smart Mode can be selected using parameter p3400.0=0.
2)
Smart Mode sets itself automatically during the parameter assignment for the supply voltage p0210 > 416 V.


NOTICE
The setpoint for the DC link voltage (p3510) can be changed. The insulation voltage of the
motors must be observed. (See the NC61 catalog or the configuring guide for the motors.)

Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 125
CAUTION
As soon as the energy supply is present at the infeed terminals (-X1:U1/V1/W1) of the
Active Line Module, the DC link will be precharged (UDC link = USupply x 1.35).
Once the "Enable Pulses" enabling signal is also present at the Active Line Module, the
boost converter increases the DC link to the specified setpoint p3510 (e.g. UDC link = 600 V
for Usupply = 400 V).



Note
The Active Line Module (16 kW, 36 kW) and the Smart Line Module (16 kW, 36 kW)
interfaces are identical.

Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
126 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.4.2 Active Line Modules with Internal Air Cooling
5.4.2.1 Overview
X200
X202
X21
Terminals
X200-X202
DRlVE-CLiQ
Protective cover
LEDs
Protective earth
conductor
connection
M5 / 3Nm
Electronics power
supply
DC link busbars
X1
Line supply connection
X24
24 V terminal adapter
Release for
protective cover
1 (0.5 x 3.5)
Shield plate
U1 V1 W1

Figure 5-20 Active Line Module with internal air cooling (example: 16 kW)
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 127
5.4.2.2 Connection example
ext.
24 V
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

2
Line disconnecting
device
Fuses
Line filters
(optional)
Line contactor
(optional)
1) Leading opening contact t > 10 ms
2) Dl/DO, controlled by the Control Unit.
3) No additional load permitted downstream of line contactor!
4) The current carrying capacity of the DO must be observed; an output coupling device must be used if required.
5) Contact through installation backplane or shield buses in accordance with EMC directive.
Active Line
Module
M
+
5)
DC24 V
CU
Dl
3) 4)
X
2
4
M +
M +
2)
CU
DO
W1 V1 U1
U2 V2 W2
+Temp
-Temp
EP M
1
2
3
4
X21
EP +24 V
1)
PE
1L1
1L2
1L3
PE
L1
L2
L3
X200
L
E
D
s
DC LlNK
READY
DCP
+
M
X201 X202
2)
Active
lnterface
Module
X121
X124
PE
PE PE
8
+
+
-
-
1
2
3
4
T2
T1
L1 L2 L3

Figure 5-21 Example connection of Active Line Module
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
128 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Note
If you are using a VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module, the leading opening contact can be
omitted.

5.4.2.3 X1 line connection
Table 5- 8 Terminal block X1 Active Line Module 16 kW
Terminal Technical specifications
U1
V1

W1
Max. connectable cross-section: 10 mm
2

Type: Screw terminal 6
Tightening torque: 1.5 - 1.8 Nm

PE connection Threaded hole M5/3 Nm
1

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234

Table 5- 9 Terminal block for the Active Line Module (36 kW to 120 kW)
Terminals Technical specifications
U1
V1

W1
Supply voltage:
380 V - 480 V 3 AC, 50 / 60 Hz
36 kW:
Threaded bolt M6/6 Nm
1)

55 kW, 80 kW and 120 kW
Threaded bolt M8/13 Nm
1)


36 kW:
Threaded hole M6/6 Nm
1)


PE connection
55 kW:
Threaded hole M6/6 Nm
1)

80 kW and 120 kW:
Threaded hole M8/13 Nm
1

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 129
5.4.2.4 Active Line Module X21 EP Terminals
Table 5- 10 X21 terminal block
Terminal Designation Technical specifications
1 Reserved, do not use
2 Reserved, do not use

3 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Enable EP control input:
The boost converter and regenerative operation are activated and,
therefore, enabled by applying a 24 VDC (High level) voltage to
the -X21:3 (EP +24 V) terminal.
The supply voltage must be provided from an external power
supply. The -X21:4 (EP M) terminal is used as reference ground
for the external supply voltage.
Disable EP control input:
If the EP control input is not enabled (Low level), the boost
converter for the Active Line Module must be deactivated (Smart
Mode). The diode bridge remains active, the DC link operates
unregulated, and the DC link voltage reduces to the value
UDC link = Usupply*1.35. The regenerative function is also disabled.
Signal propagation delays:
Enable: switch from Low to High level in 100 s
Disable: switch from High to Low level in 1000 s
Notice:
If the EP control input is disabled and the boost converter is non-
operational, the DC link remains connected to the supply voltage
via the diode bridge/precharging resistors. Energy continues to be
loaded into the DC link. If this is to be avoided, a line contactor, for
example, can be used.
Warning:
Before the main power switch is used to switch off the drive group,
the EP function (X21:3 (+ 24 V) and X21:4 (M) connections) on
the Active Line Module must be disabled via, for example, a
leading disabling auxiliary switch ( 10 ms) on the main power
switch.
Note:
If the EP control input is not enabled, the line contactor On/Off
control function will not be enabled.

4 EP M (Enable Pulses) Reference potential for the -X21:3 terminal
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm
2
Type: Screw terminal 1

Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
130 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

WARNING
For operation, ground must be attached to the -X21:3 24 VDC terminals and the -X21:4
terminals. For cancelation, a pulse suppression will be activated. Feedback is deactivated
and the bypass relay drops out. If the Line Module is not separated from the supply system
when the EP terminal is opened (e.g. no main power switch present), the DC link will
remain charged.

NOTICE
If the main power switch is used to switch off a running drive group, the voltage at terminal
3 (EP +24 V) and 4 (EP M) must be interrupted beforehand. This can be achieved with a
leading disabling auxiliary contact ( 10 ms), for example.

5.4.2.5 Active Line Module X24 24 V Terminal Adapter
Table 5- 11 X24 terminal strip
Terminal Designation Technical data
+ 24 V supply 24 V DC supply voltage

M Chassis ground Electronic ground
(tolerance limit 20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC, voltage
interruption for 3 ms without function impairment).
Used for the central infeed of the 24 VDC power supply
of the drive group
The 24 V terminal adapter is supplied as standard
Max. connectable cross-section: 6 mm
2
Type: Screw terminal 5
5.4.2.6 X200-X202 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
Table 5- 12 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X200-X202 for 16 kW and 36 kW Smart Line Modules
PIN Signal name Technical specifications
1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) 24 V power supply

B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 131
PIN Signal name Technical specifications
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces included in the scope of delivery;
blanking plate (50 pieces) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0
5.4.2.7 24 V busbar
Table 5- 13 24 V busbar
Busbar Designation Remarks
+ 24 VDC power supply busbar, plus
pole
M 24 VDC power supply busbar, ground
pole
Two connection straps on the distribution busbar
can be used to pass the voltage potential to
neighboring components.
5.4.2.8 Active Line Module DC Link Busbar

Busbar Designation Remarks
DCP DC link plus pole
DCN DC link minus pole
Two connection straps on the distribution busbar can be
used to pass the voltage potential to neighboring
components.
The Active Line Module is controlled via the -X21 terminal block, terminals 3 and 4 (EP), and
via DRIVE-CLiQ at the -X200/202/203 terminal block. The detailed function description for
the individual signals and control/status words is contained in the SINAMICS S120/S150 List
Manual (LH1).
Once the Active Line Module has been switched on, the DC link has been precharged and
the boost converter has attained the setpoint of the DC link voltage, the unit uses the r0863.0
parameter to signal the "infeed ready" status. The signal must then be connected by
parameter for enabling the Motor Modules. This ensures that the Motor Modules can be
started only when the DC link is operating correctly. The Motor Modules will be disabled
immediately in case of faults, etc.
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
132 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.4.2.9 Meaning of the LEDs on the active line module
Table 5- 14 Meaning of the LEDs on the Line Module
LED Color Status Description
- Off Electronics power supply outside permissible tolerance range
Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
communication is taking place.
Orange Steady light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red Steady light At least one fault is present in this component.
Green
Red
Flashing
2 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
READY
Green/Orange
or
Red/Orange
Flashing
2 Hz
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0124).
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0124 = 1.
- Off Electronics power supply outside the permissible tolerance
range.
Orange Steady light DC link voltage within permissible tolerance range (only when
ready for operation)
DC LINK
Red Steady light DC link voltage outside the permissible tolerance range (only
when Active Line Module is ready for operation).


WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the status of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the components must be carefully observed!

Cause and rectification of faults
The following reference contains information about the cause and rectification of faults:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120, Commissioning Manual.
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 133
5.4.3 Smart Line Modules (5 kW und 10 kW) with internal air cooling
5.4.3.1 Overview
terminals
24 V terminal adapter
Line supply
connection
DC-link
busbars
Electronic power
supply
M5/3 Nm
Lock for
protective
cover
LEDs
Protective
cover
Protective
conductor
X1
X21/X22
X24

Figure 5-22 Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW with internal air cooling (example 5 kW)
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
134 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Electronic power
supply
DC-link
busbars
Line supply
connection
Shield plate
Protective
conductor
connection
M5/3 Nm
terminal
DRlVE-CLiQ
Protective
cover
LEDs
24 V terminal adapter
Lock for
protective cover
X200
X202
X1
1 (0,5 x 3,5)
X24
X21
X200-X202
W1 V1 U1

Figure 5-23 Smart Line Module with internal air cooling (16 kW)
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 135
terminal
DRlVE-CLiQ
Protective cover
LEDs
Protective
conductor
connection
M6/3 Nm
Electronic power
supply
DC-link
busbars
Line supply
connection
24 V terminal adapter
Lock for
protective cover
X1
X24
X21
X200-X202
X200
X202
1 (0,5 x 3,5)

Figure 5-24 Smart Line Module with internal air cooling (36 kW)
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
136 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.4.3.2 Connection example
Smart Line
Module
M
+
DCN
DCP
READY
DC LlNK L
E
D
s
L3
L2
L1
Pl
1L3
1L2
1L1
Pl
+ 24 V
EP M
X21
4
2
3
1
Dl, Reset
EP +24 V
M1
X22
DO, Ready
1)
X
2
4 + M
+ M
Dl, Disable
4
2
3
1
2)
DO, Warning l*t
U
1
X
1
V
1
W
1
V
1
W
1
U
1
2)
5)
M 6)
2)
24 V
2)
3) 4)
PLC
Dl
PLC
Dl
PLC
DO
PLC
DO
PLC
DO
PLC
Dl
1) Leading breaking contact t >10 ms; for operation, 24 VDC and ground must be attached.
2) Dl/DO, controlled from the PLC.
3) No additional consumer after the line contactor permitted.
4) The current carrying capacity of the DO must be observed; an output interface element may
need to be used.
5) DO high, regeneration deactivated (for permanent deactivation, a jumper can be installed
between X22 pin 1 and 2).
6) X22 pin 4 must be connected with ground (ext 24 V).
Main power
switch
Fuses
ext.
24 V
Line contactor
(optional)
Line filter
Line choke

Figure 5-25 Smart Line Module connection example
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 137
5.4.3.3 X1 line connection
Table 5- 15 Terminal strip X1 of Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW
Terminal Technical specifications
U1
V1

W1
Supply voltage:
380 V - 480 V 3 AC, 50/60 Hz
Max. connectable cross-section: 6 mm
2

Type: Screw terminal 5 (see chapter Connection methods)
Tightening torque: 1.2 - 1.5 Nm

PE connection Threaded hole M5/3 Nm
1

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234

Table 5- 16 Terminal strip X1 Smart Line Module 16 kW
Terminal Technical specifications
U1
V1

W1
Supply voltage:
380 V - 480 V 3 AC, 50/60 Hz
Max. connectable cross-section: 10 mm
2

Type: Screw terminal 6 (see chapter Connection methods)
Tightening torque: 1.5 - 1.8 Nm

PE connection Threaded hole M5/3 Nm
1

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234

Table 5- 17 Terminal strip Smart Line Module 36 kW
Terminals Technical specifications
U1
V1

W1
Supply voltage:
380 V - 480 V 3 AC, 50/60 Hz
Threaded bolt M6/6 Nm
1)
(see chapter Connection system)

PE connection Threaded hole M6/6 Nm
1)

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
138 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.4.3.4 X21 terminals: smart line module
The Smart Line Module (5/10 kW) is controlled using the -X21, -X22 terminal block. A
connection to the Control Unit using DRIVE-CLiQ is not present. A detailed function
description for the individual signals and control/status words is contained in the
SINAMICS S S120/S150 List Manual.
A control of the line contactor by the Smart Line Module or in conjunction with the Control
Unit is not provided. If, however, a line contactor is used, it must be switched with a PLC or
hardware control, for example. See also Section Safety Integrated (Page 83) and Section
Line Contactor Control (Page 97).
If the Smart Line Module has been switched on, the DC link has been precharged and no
faults are present, the unit uses the "Ready" digital output to signal the "infeed ready" status.
This signal must then be fed appropriately to the Control Unit using an external
interconnection. The Control Unit forwards the "infeed ready" signal to the Motor Modules to
enable them (see above). This ensures that the Motor Modules can be started only when the
DC link is operating correctly. The Motor Modules will be disabled immediately in case of
faults, etc.
Table 5- 18 X21 terminal block
Terminal Name Technical specifications
1 DO: Ready Checkback: Smart Line Module ready
The signal switches to high level when the following conditions have
been met:
Electronics power supply (X24) OK
DC link is pre-charged
Enable pulse (X21:3/.4) present
No overtemperature
No overcurrent switch-off
Note: Because the Ready signal is cancelled only for fatal faults, this
signal must be processed by the Control Unit or some other
controller and used for the drive group enable/disable. This must be
performed as fast as possible for the ready cancelation.
Note: All connected actuators, contactor coils, magnetic valves,
holding brakes, etc. must be connected using surge suppression
devices (e.g. diodes, varistors, RC elements, etc.). This is also true
for switchgear/inductances controlled by a PLC output.

2 Pre Warning DO: Over-temperature prewarning threshold / I x t
High = no prewarning
Low = prewarning
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 139
Terminal Name Technical specifications
3 DI: Enable pulses

EP +24 V EnablePulses Enable EP control input:
The activation is achieved by placing a 24 VDC voltage (High level)
at the -X21:3 (EP +24 V) terminal.
The supply voltage must be provided from an external power supply.
The -X21:4 (EP M) terminal is used as reference ground for the
external supply voltage.
Disable EP control input:
The disable signal from the Smart Line Module cannot be set if the
EP control input is not enabled (Low level).
Notice:
If the EP control input is disabled, the DC link remains connected
with the supply system voltage using the diode bridge / precharging
resistors. No electrical isolation exists.
If this is to be avoided, a line contactor, for example, can be used.
Warning:
Before the main power switch is used to switch off the drive group,
the EP function (X21:3 (+ 24 V) and X21:4 (M) connections) on the
Active Line Module must be disabled via, for example, a leading
disabling auxiliary switch ( 10 ms) on the main power switch.
4 DI: Enable pulses
ground

EP M Enable Pulses
Reference potential for the X21:3 terminal.
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm
2

Type: Screw terminal 1


Note
For operation, ground must be attached to the -X21:3 24 VDC terminals and the -X21:4
terminals. When removed, pulse inhibit is activated, feedback is deactivated and the bypass
relay drops out. If the Line Module is not disconnected from the supply system when the EP
terminal is deactivated (e.g. a line contactor is not installed), the DC link remains charged.

NOTICE
If the main power switch is used to switch off a running drive group, the voltage at terminal -
X21:3 (EP +24 V) and -X21:4 (EP M) must be interrupted beforehand. This can be
achieved with a leading disabling auxiliary contact ( 10 ms), for example.

Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
140 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.4.3.5 X22 terminals: smart line module
Table 5- 19 Terminal block X22
Terminal Designation Technical specifications
1 24 V power supply 24 VDC electronic power supply (24 VDC, 100 mA)
for the control of the X22.2 and 3 digital inputs.
2 DI: Disable Regeneration Disable digital input Enable Disable control input:
Enable and, therefore, activate the regenerative capability of
the Smart Line Module when the Disable control input is open
(Low level).
Disable Disable control input:
If the Disable control input is not enabled (High level), the
regenerative capability of the Smart Line Module is
deactivated.
No energy from the DC link can be fed into the supply system.
The energy may need to be removed using braking resistors.
Note:
The Disable control input may not be operated during running
operation. The preselection should be made using a fixed wire
jumper.
Notice:
If the Disable control input has the High level and the
regenerative capability is, therefore, deactivated, the DC link
remains connected to the energy supply system via the diode
bridge/precharging resistors.
No electrical isolation exists.
3 DI: Reset DigitalinputReset
If this input is jumpered with the electronics ground or the
input is controlled from an external PLC, the internal fault
memory will be reset (a negative edge resets the fault). If the
fault is still present, no reset will be performed. The reset is
also possible by canceling the external 24 VDC (-X24).

4 Chassis ground Electronics ground
Reference potential for the -X22.2;3 terminal in order, for
example, to support external control from the PLC
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm
2

Type: Screw terminal 1
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 141
5.4.3.6 X24 24 V terminal adapter
Table 5- 20 Terminal block X24
Terminal Designation Technical specifications
+ 24 V power supply 24 V DC supply voltage

M Ground Electronic ground
The 24 V terminal adapter is supplied as standard
Max. connectable cross-section: 6 mm
2
Type: Screw terminal 5 (see Connection Methods)
5.4.3.7 24 V busbar
Table 5- 21 24 V busbar
Busbar Designation Remarks
+ 24 VDC power supply busbar, plus
pole
M 24 VDC power supply busbar, ground
pole
Two connection straps on the distribution busbar
can be used to pass the voltage potential to
neighboring components.
5.4.3.8 Smart Line Module DC Link Busbar

Busbar Designation Remark
DCP DC link plus pole
DCN DC link minus pole
Two connection straps on the distribution busbar
can be used to pass the voltage potential to
neighboring components.
Connection of the Components
5.4 Line Modules Interfaces Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
142 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.4.3.9 Meaning of the LEDs on the Smart Line Module
Table 5- 22 Meaning of the LEDs on the Smart Line Module
LED Color State Description
Green Steady light Operation
Orange Steady light Pre-charging not yet complete; bypass relay dropped out
READY Red Steady light Overtemperature/overcurrent switch-off, or
Electronics power supply outside the permissible tolerance range
--- OFF Electronics power supply outside the permissible tolerance range
Orange Steady light DC link voltage within permissible tolerance range DC LINK
Red Steady light DC link voltage outside permissible tolerance range


WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the status of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the components must be carefully observed!

Cause and rectification of faults
The following reference contains information about the cause and rectification of faults:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
Connection of the Components
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 143
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description
5.5.1 Overview
X200
X203
1 (0.5 x 3.5)
Protective cover
(use unlocking tool
provided
to open)
LEDs
Unlocking
protective cover
Protective conductor
connection
M5/3 Nm
Electronics power
supply
DC link
busbars
X1
Motor connection
X200-X203
DRlVE-CLiQ
X21/X22
Terminals
Rating plate
X2
Motor connection
24 V jumper
(under the protective cover)

Figure 5-26 Double Motor Module, booksize format, with internal cooling
Connection of the Components
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
144 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.5.2 Connection examples
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

1
24 V jumper
DRlVE-CLiQ socket 2
ln addition for Double Motor Modules
DRlVE-CLiQ socket 3
1) Required for Safety
2) SMC required for motors without DRlVE-CLiQ interface
3) 24 V to the next module
4) Optional, e.g. for encoderless motors
U
U
X2
BR-
W2
BR+
V2
U2
+
-
SMC
2)
1)
4)
4)

EP +24 V
EP M1
-Temp
1
2
3
4
X22
+Temp
E
3
M
~
X203
3)
+
M
+
M
8
8
8
1)
EP +24 V
EP M1
-Temp
1
2
3
4
X21
+Temp
DCP
DCN
L
E
D
s
DC LlNK
READY
2)
X1
BR-
W2
BR+
V2
U2
+
-
SMC
8
E
3
M
~
X202
DCP
DCN
X200 X201

Figure 5-27 Connection example of Motor Modules 3 A to 30 A and Double Motor Modules 3 A to 18 A
Connection of the Components
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 145
DRlVE-CLiQ socket 2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

1
24 V jumper
Motor Module
Fan
1) Required for Safety
2) ln addition for Motor Modules 132 A to 200 A
3) Contact through the shield plate
4) 24 V to the next module
5) Optional, e.g. for encoderless motors
U
4)
+
M
+
M
8
8
3)
1)
5)
-
1
2
X12
+
EP +24 V
EP M1
-Temp
1
2
3
4
X21
+Temp
L
E
D
s
DC LlNK
READY
2)
X11
E
3
M
~
X202
BR-
W2
BR+
V2
U2
1
2
DCP
DCN
DCP
DCN
X200 X201

Figure 5-28 Example connection of Single Motor Modules 45 A to 200 A
5.5.3 Motor/brake connection
Table 5- 23 Terminal strip X1/X2 Motor Modules 3 A to 30 A and Double Motor Modules 3 A to 18 A
Terminal Technical specifications
U (U2)
V (V2)
W (W2)
Motor connection
+ (BR+)
- (BR-)
Brake connection
max. load current 2 A
min. load current 0.1 A

PE connection Threaded hole M5/3 Nm
1

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234

Connection of the Components
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
146 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Table 5- 24 Terminal strip Single Motor Module 45 A to 200 A
Terminals Technical specifications
U2
V2

W2
45 A to 60 A:
Threaded bolt M6/6 Nm
1)

85 A:
Threaded bolt M8/13 Nm
1)

132 A to 200 A:
Threaded bolt M8/13 Nm
1)

+ (BR+)
+ -

- (BR-)
X11 brake connector
2)
:
Voltage 24 V DC
Max. load current 2 A
Min. load current 0.1 A
Max. connectable cross-section 2.5 mm
2
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 2 (see chapter Connection methods)
The brake connector is part of the pre-assembled cable

Single Motor Module with a rated output current of 45 A to 60:
Threaded bolt for motor cables: M6/6 Nm
1)
Threaded hole for PE: M6/6
Nm
1)


PE connection
Single Motor Module with a rated output current of 85 A
Threaded bolt for motor cables: M8/13 Nm
1)
Threaded hole for PE: M6/6 Nm
1)

Single Motor Module with a rated output current of 132 A to 200 A
Threaded bolt for motor cables: M8/13 Nm
1)
Threaded hole for PE: M8/13 Nm
1)

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234
2) The circuit for protecting the brake against overvoltage is integrated in the Motor Module and does not need to be
installed externally. The max. load current is 2 A, the min. load current 0.1 A.


Note
The overall length of the power cables (motor supply cables and DC-link cables) must not
exceed the values given in chapter "Possible line reactor and line filter combinations".

Note
The motor brake must be connected via connector X11. The BR- cable must not be
connected directly to electronic ground (M).

WARNING
Only protective extra-low voltages (DVC A) that comply with EN 60204-1 must be
connected to all connections and terminals between 0 and 48 VDC.
The voltage tolerances of the motor holding brakes (24 V 10%) must be taken into
account.

Connection of the Components
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 147
5.5.4 X21/X22 EP Terminals / Motor Module Temperature Sensor Connection

Note
The Motor Module is controlled using the -X21, -X22 terminal block and using DRIVE-CLiQ
at the -X200/201/202/203 terminal block. The detailed function description for the individual
signals and control/status words is contained in the SINAMICS S List Manual.
To enable the Motor Module, the "infeed ready" signal must be connected from the Line
Module.

Table 5- 25 Terminal strip X21/X22
Terminal Function Technical specifications
1 + Temp
2 - Temp
Temperature sensors: KTY 84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
switch with NC contact
3 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses)

4 EP M1 (Enable Pulses)
Supply voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
Current consumption: 10 mA
Isolated input
Signal propagation times:
L H: 100 s
H L: 1000 s
The pulse inhibit function is only available when Safety
Integrated Basic Functions are enabled.
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm
2

Type: Screw terminal 1 (see chapter Connection methods)


NOTICE
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.

NOTICE
The function of the EP terminals is only available when Safety Integrated Basic Functions
are enabled.

Note
The temperature sensor input is not needed if the motors feature an integrated DRIVE-CLiQ
interface or if temperature values are detected by means of a different module (SMC, SME,
TM).

Connection of the Components
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
148 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
The "Safe standstill (SH)" function is used in a fault situation or in conjunction with a machine
function for the safe disconnection (safe pulse suppression) of the energy supply to the
motor. No electrical isolation is made between the Motor Module and the motor!
In addition, if connected, the motor holding brake will be closed.
All hardware and software functions important for Safety Integrated are dual-channel
(Control Unit and Motor Module). This means in addition to the EP+/EPM terminal on the
Motor Module, a digital input on the Control Unit (e.g. DI3) must be configured with the "Safe
standstill" function.
EP+/EPM Low level (function selection) control input:
1. If the "Safe standstill" function is not activated using parameters, the signal level on the
EP+/EPM input has no significance.
2. The "safe pulse suppression" will be initiated and executed when the "Safe standstill"
function and the Low level at the EP+/EPM input are activated. For cancelation, a pulse
suppression will be activated.
EP+/EPM High level (function deselection) control input:
1. If the "Safe standstill" function is not activated using parameters, the signal level on the
EP+/EPM input has no significance.
2. The "safe pulse suppression" is not active when the "Safe standstill" function and the
High level at the EP+/EPM input are activated.



Note
The protective circuit of the Enable Pulses (EP) input is required only when the "Safe
standstill" function on the Motor Module and on the Control Unit was activated by
parameterizing.



Note
Protective measures must be adopted (e.g. for hanging axes) to prevent motions after
disconnection of the energy supply from the motor ("coast to a standstill").

Connection of the Components
5.5 Motor Modules Interface Description
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 149
5.5.5 X200-X203 DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Table 5- 26 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X200-X202: Single Motor Module
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X200-X203: Double Motor Module
Pin Name Technical specifications
1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply


B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces included in the scope of delivery;
blanking plate (50 pieces) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0
5.5.6 Meaning of the LEDs on the Motor Module
Table 5- 27 Meaning of the LEDs on the Motor Module
LED Color State Description
- Off Electronics power supply outside the permissible tolerance range.
Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
communication is taking place.
Orange Steady light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red Steady light At least one fault is present in this component.
Green
Red
Flashing
2 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.





READY
Green/ Orange
or Red/Orange
Flashing
2 Hz
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0124).
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is
activated via p0124 = 1.
- Off Electronics power supply outside the permissible tolerance range.
Orange Steady light DC link voltage within permissible tolerance range (only when ready
for operation)


DC LINK
Red Steady light DC link voltage outside permissible tolerance range (only when ready
for operation)
Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
150 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1


WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the status of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the components must be carefully observed!

Cause and rectification of faults
The following reference contains information about the cause and rectification of faults:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120, Commissioning Manual.
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
5.6.1 DRIVE-CLiQ topology
Introduction
The term "topology" is used in SINAMICS to refer to a wiring harness with DRIVE-CLiQ
cables. A unique component number is allocated to each component during the start-up
phase.
DRIVE-CLiQ (Drive Component Link with IQ) is a communication system for connecting the
various SINAMICS components (e.g. Control Unit, Line Module, Motor Modules, motors, and
encoders).
DRIVE-CLiQ supports the following functions:
Automatic detection of components by the Control Unit
Standard interfaces to all components
Standardized diagnostics down to component level
Standardized service down to component level
Electronic rating plate
The electronic rating plate contains the following data:
Component type (e.g. SMC20)
Order number (e.g. 6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0)
Manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS)
Hardware version (e.g. A)
Serial number (e.g. "T-PD3005049)
Technical data (e.g. rated current)
Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 151
Actual topology
The actual topology is the actual DRIVE-CLiQ wiring harness.
When the drive system components are started up, the actual topology is detected
automatically via DRIVE-CLiQ.
Target topology
The target topology is stored on the memory card on the Control Unit and is compared with
the actual topology when the Control Unit is started up.
The target topology can be specified in two ways and saved on the memory card:
Via the SINUMERIK 840D sl drive wizard or via the STARTER commissioning tool (by
creating the configuration and loading it to the drive unit)
Via quick commissioning (automatic configuration):
the actual topology is read and the target topology written to the memory card.
Comparison of topologies at Power On
Comparing the topologies prevents a component from being controlled/evaluated incorrectly
(e.g. drive 1 and 2).
When the drive system boots, the Control Unit compares the detected actual topology and
the electronic rating plates with the target topology stored on the memory card.
You can specify how the electronic rating plates are compared for all the components of a
Control Unit via p9906. The type of comparison can be changed subsequently for each
individual component. You can use p9908 for this or right-click in the topology view in the
STARTER tool. All data on the electronic rating plate are compared by default.
The following data in the target and actual topologies is compared depending on the settings
made in p9906/9908:
p9906/p9908 = 0 component type, order number, manufacturer, serial number
p9906/p9908 = 1 component type, order number
Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
152 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
p9906/p9908 = 2 component type
p9906/p9908 = 3 component class (e.g. Sensor Module or Motor Module)

Figure 5-29 Topology of the SINUMERIK drive wizard

NOTICE

The Control Unit and the Option Board are not monitored. A replacement of components
is accepted automatically and not displayed.

5.6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ wiring
Introduction
The components of the SINAMICS S120 drive family and the control unit are interconnected
using DRIVE-CLiQ. When connecting the components, please note the following rules.
Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 153
Rules for wiring DRIVE-CLiQ
The following rules must be observed when wiring DRIVE-CLiQ (the SINAMICS S120
Function Manual contains additional rules and information):
Ring wiring is not permitted.
Components must not be double-wired.
A maximum of 8 nodes can be connected in one row. A row is always regarded as
starting at the control unit.
Up to one Line Module, 6 Motor Modules (a Double Motor Module counts as 2 nodes)
and 3 direct measuring systems may be connected to one control unit.
A maximum of 14 DRIVE-CLiQ nodes can be connected to one DRIVE-CLiQ line at a
Control Unit.
Terminal Modules TM15 and TM41 have faster sample cycles than TM31. For this
reason, the two Terminal Module groups must be connected to separate DRIVE-CLiQ
lines.
A maximum of 2 Terminal Modules can be connected to the CU.
SINUMERIK 840D sl does not support vector operation.
For Active Line Modules (ALM) in booksize format, only a current controller sampling time
of 125.0 s or 250.0 s can be set.
For ALMs in chassis format, only a current controller sampling time of 250.0 s or
400.0 s/375.0 s (375 s when p0092 = 1) can be set.
A current controller sampling time between 62.5 s and 250.0 s can be set for servo
drives (62.5 s p0115[0] 250.0 s).
For servo drives with a current controller sampling time of p0115[0] = 62.5 s, the
following applies:
- only possible in booksize and blocksize format
- maximum quantity structure:
booksize: 2x servo with p0115[0] = 62.5 s + Line Module (connected to a different
DRIVE-CLiQ line)
servo drives in booksize format can be combined on one DRIVE-CLiQ line with a
servo with p0115[0] = 125.0 s (but with same quantity structure).
a DRIVE-CLiQ-Hub DMC20 cannot be operated with servo drives with p0115[0] =
62.5 s on one DRIVE-CLiQ line, but must be connected to a separate DRIVE-CLiQ
line instead
blocksize: 1 servo with p0115[0] = 62.5 s
The booksize Active Line Module and booksize Motor Modules, together with the
SINUMERIK 840D sl CU, should be connected in servo mode to separate DRIVE-CLiQ
lines.
The Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) should be connected to a free DRIVE-CLiQ port on
the associated Active Line Module (due to the automatic assignment of the VSM).
The Chassis Line Module (Active Line) and Chassis Motor Modules must be connected to
separate DRIVE-CLiQ lines.
Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
154 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
When a unit in chassis format is connected to a DRIVE-CLiQ line, the smallest current
controller sampling time must be at least 250 s.
Example: mixture of chassis and booksize units on a DRIVE-CLiQ line.
Motor Modules in chassis format with different current controller cycles must be
connected to separate DRIVE-CLiQ lines. For this reason, Chassis Motor Modules and
Booksize Motor Modules with a current controller sampling time < 250 s must also be
connected to separate DRIVE-CLiQ lines.
The current controller sampling times of the drive objects (DOs) and the sampling times
of the inputs/outputs of the Control Unit, TM, and TB modules must be a multiple integer
of 125 s.
The sampling times (p0115[0] and p4099) of all components that are connected to a
DRIVE-CLiQ line must be integrally divisible by one another. If the current controller
sampling time on a DO has to be changed to another pattern that does not match the
other DOs on the DRIVE-CLiQ line, the following options are available:
reconnect the DO to a separate DRIVE-CLiQ line
also change the current controller sampling time and the sampling time of the
inputs/outputs of the DOs not involved so that they fit back into the pattern
A Double Motor Module, a DMC20, and a CUA32 each correspond to two DRIVE-CLiQ
nodes. This also applies to Double Motor Modules, where just one drive is configured.
To enable the "Automatic configuration" function to assign the encoders to the drives, the
rules recommended below must be observed:
The DRIVE-CLiQ cable from the Control Unit must be connected to X200 on the first
booksize power unit or X400 on the first chassis power unit
The DRIVE-CLiQ connections between the power units must each be connected from
interface X201 to X200/from X401 to X400 on the next component
A Power Module with the CUA31 should be connected to the end of the DRIVE-CLiQ line
If a CUA31 is connected as the first module to the Control Unit, then the maximum
number is decreased by one
The motor encoder must be connected to the associated power unit
Table 5- 28 Connecting the motor encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ
Component Connecting the motor encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ
Single Motor Module booksize X202
Double Motor Module booksize Motor connection X1: Encoder at X202
Motor connection X2: Encoder at X203
Single Motor Module chassis X402
Power Module blocksize CUA31: Encoder at X202
CU310: Encoder at X100 or via TM31 at X501


Note
If an additional encoder is connected to a Motor Module, it is assigned to this drive as
encoder 2 in the automatic configuration.


Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 155
Table 5- 29 VSM connection
Component VSM connection
Active Line Module booksize X202
Active Line Module chassis X402
The SINAMICS S120 Function Manual 1 contains further information on DRIVE-CLiQ
topology.
Rules for DRIVE-CLiQ sockets
The following rules must be observed when using DRIVE-CLiQ sockets:
The control unit must be connected to X200 on the first booksize power unit after it.
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables between the power units should be connected from interface
X201 to X200 on the next component
The power line to the motor and the associated motor encoder must be connected to a
Motor Module. The motor encoder is connected via terminal X202 or X203 on Double
Motor Modules
X100
X101
X102
X103
NCU
X200
X201
X202
SMM
X200
X201
X202
SMM
X200
X201
X202
DMM
X203
X200
X201
X202
SMM
X200
X201
X202
SMM
X500
SMy
X500
SMx
X500
SMx
X500
SMx
X500
SMx
X500
SMx
X500
SMx
X500
SMy
X500
SMy
X200
X201
X202
ALM
ALM = Active Line Module
SMM = Single Motor Module
DMM = Double Motor Module
SMx = Motor encoder
SMy = Direct measuring system

Figure 5-30 DRIVE-CLiQ wiring
Miscellaneous
If an additional encoder is connected to a Motor Module, it is automatically assigned to this
drive as encoder 2.
Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
156 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.6.3 NX10/15 wiring
NX10/15 components can be connected to the control unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The following
rules apply to wiring of the NX10/15:
Only one star topology is permitted between the NX10/15 and the Control Unit, as the
address assignment is fixed (HW configuration). This means that only one NX10/15 can
be operated per DRIVE-CLiQ port on a control unit.
DRIVE-CLiQ ports not assigned to NX10/15 can be wired to other DRIVE-CLiQ
components
Once an NX10/15 has been connected and configured, you cannot simply insert it into a
different DRIVE-CLiQ port, as the addresses of the integrated drives are set permanently
from the point of view of the PLC. The following table illustrates this relation:
Table 5- 30 NX10/15 PROFIBUS addresses
DRIVE-CLiQ port on the NCU Drive PROFIBUS addresses
X105 15
X104 14
X103 13
X102 12
X101 11
The following figure shows a sample topology:
Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 157
External PROFlBUS DP1/DP2
ET 200
NCU 720
NX10/15 (1)
NX10/15 (2)
Subtopology
NX10/15 (2)
Subtopology
NX10/15 (1)
DP address 14
DP address 15
DRlVE-CLiQ
components on
the NCU 720
X126/
X136
X105
...
X100
X100
...
X103
X100
...
X103

Figure 5-31 NX10/15 topology
Additional references
For information on commissioning NX components, please refer to the "IBN CNC: NCK,
PLC, Drive Commissioning Manual".
Connection of the Components
5.6 DRIVE-CLiQ topologies
Guidelines for machine configuration
158 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.6.4 Connectable DRIVE-CLiQ components
Components
As a rule, all SINAMICS components approved for SINUMERIK can be connected using the
DRIVE-CLiQ interface.
Table 5- 31 Components with DRIVE-CLiQ
Component Description
Active/Smart Line Module,
Booksize
Line Modules provide the central power supply to the DC link.
Single/Double Motor Module,
Booksize
Motor Modules draw their power from the DC link to supply the
connected motors.
NX10/15 Drive expansion module for up to 6 axes
SMC10/20/30 Cabinet-Mounted Sensor Modules are needed when a motor with a
DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not available and when external encoders
are required in addition to the motor encoder.
SME20/25 Measuring systems outside the cabinet can be connected directly to
the Sensor Module External.
DMC20/DME20 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules are used to implement star-shaped
distribution of a DRIVE-CLiQ line.
TM15 The number of available digital inputs and outputs within a drive
system can be expanded with the Terminal Module.
Motors 1FT/1FK/1PH/1PM/1FW with DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Additional references
For information on SINAMICS S120 Line Modules and Motor Modules, please refer to the
Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual
Chassis Power Units Equipment Manual
You can find information on all the other components in the SINAMICS S120 "Equipment
Manual for Control Units and Additional System Components".
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 159
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
5.7.1 DMC20
5.7.1.1 Description
The DMC20 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module is used to implement a star-shaped configuration of a
DRIVE-CLiQ line. With the DMC20, an axis grouping can be expanded by up to 5 DRIVE-
CLiQ sockets for additional subgroups.
The component is especially suitable for applications which require DRIVE-CLiQ nodes to be
removed in groups, without interrupting the DRIVE-CLiQ line and, therefore, the data
exchange process.
DMC20 can be used for the SINUMERIK 840D sl with CNC SW 2.6 and higher.
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
160 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.7.1.2 Overview
X501
X505
DRlVE-CLiQ
lnterfaces
X524
Electronics power supply
Protective ground
conductor
connection
M4 / 1.8 Nm
LED
Shield connection
X500
X504
X502
X503
Type plate
DRlVE-CLiQ
lnterfaces

Figure 5-32 Interface description of the DMC20
5.7.1.3 DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Table 5- 32 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X500 - X505
Pin Signal name Technical specifications
1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use

8 Reserved, do not use
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 161
Pin Signal name Technical specifications
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Type: RJ45 plus socket
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface: Yamaichi, order number: Y-ConAS-13


Note
Only MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used to establish connections.
The maximum lengths of MOTION-CONNECT 500 and MOTION-CONNECT 800 cables are
100 m and 50 m respectively.

5.7.1.4 Electronics power supply X524
Table 5- 33 X524 terminals for the electronics power supply
Terminal Name Technical specifications
+ Electronics power supply
+ N. c.
M Electronics ground
+
M

M Electronics ground
24 DC (20.4 28.8)
Maximum connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm
2
Type: Screw terminal type 2


Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply voltage
is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node and digital
outputs.

Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
162 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.7.1.5 Significance of the LED on the DMC20
Table 5- 34 Significance of the LED on the DMC20
LED Color Status Description
- Off Electronics power supply outside the permissible
tolerance range.
Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Steady light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red Steady light At least one fault is present in this component.
READY
Green
Red
Flashing
2 Hz
The firmware is being downloaded.
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154).
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 163
5.7.1.6 Dimension drawing
1
5
0
8
9
105
2
8
111
3
5
50

Figure 5-33 Dimension drawing of the DMC20
5.7.1.7 Technical data
Table 5- 35 Technical data of the DMC20
Unit Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ
consumer)

VDC
ADC

24 DC (20.4 28.8)
0.15
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm stud
Weight kg 0.8
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
164 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.7.2 DME20
5.7.2.1 Description
The DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20 is used to implement star-shaped distribution
of a DRIVE-CLiQ line. With the DME20, an axis grouping can be expanded by up to 5
DRIVE-CLiQ sockets for additional subgroups.
The component has degree of protection IP67 and is especially suitable for applications
which require DRIVE-CLiQ nodes to be removed in groups, without interrupting the DRIVE-
CLiQ line and therefore the data exchange.
With firmware 2.6 and higher, the DME20 can be used in conjunction with the SINUMERIK
840D sl CNC SW2.6.
5.7.2.2 Safety information

NOTICE
In order to guarantee degree of protection IP67, all of the plug connectors must be correctly
screwed into place and appropriately locked.

NOTICE
The unused DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces must be closed using a protective cap (included in the
scope of delivery).

Note
All components operated on the DRIVE-CLiQ must be integrated into the equipotential
bonding concept.
They should preferably be connected by installing them on bright machine parts and devices,
which are all bonded to one another in an equipotential manner.
Alternatively, equipotential bonding can be achieved by means of a conductor (min. 6 mm),
which should be routed parallel to the DRIVE-CLiQ where possible. This applies to all
distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes, such as DM20, SME2x, SM12x, etc.
For the DME20 this also applies to the 24 V power supply.

Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 165
5.7.2.3 Overview
X500, X501, X502,
X503, X504, X505
DRlVE-CLiQ interfaces
X524 24 V power supply

Figure 5-34 Interface overview: DME20
5.7.2.4 Electronics power supply X524
Table 5- 36 X524 socket for the electronics power supply
Pin Designation Technical specifications
1 Electronics power supply
2 Electronics power supply
3 Electronics ground
4 Electronics ground
4
5 1
2
3
5 not connected
The connection voltage of 20.4 V
28.8 V refers to the (terminal) voltage at
the DME20. This must be taken into
account when selecting the cable cross-
section and supply cable lengths.
Pins 1 and 2: jumpered internally
Pins 3 and 4: jumpered internally
Max. connectable cross-section: 4 x 0.75 mm
2
e.g. 5-pole shielded connector, user-assembled: Phoenix company, Order No.: 1508365,
4-pole non-shielded connector, user-assembled, Speedcon quick-lock: Phoenix company, Order No.
1521601
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
166 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1


Note
The maximum cable length for the P24 supply of the DME20 is 100 m.

5.7.2.5 DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Table 5- 37 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500, X501, X502, X503, X504, X505
Pin Signal name Technical specifications
1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply

B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Type: RJ45 plus socket
Blanking plates for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.


Note
Only MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used to establish connections.
The maximum lengths of MOTION-CONNECT 500 and MOTION-CONNECT 800 cables are
100 m and 50 m respectively.

Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 167
5.7.2.6 Cable lengths
Table 5- 38 Cable length of P24 supply cable:
Connected
consumers
1)

1 2 3 4 5
Cross section
0.34 mm 75 m 45 m 30 m 25 m 20 m
2 x 0.34 mm 100 m 90 m 65 m 50 m 40 m
0.75 mm 100 m 100 m 75 m 60 m 50 m
2 x 0.75 mm 100 m 100 m 100 m 100 m 100 m
1)
Connected motors with DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, DRIVE CLiQ mounted encoder SME
Ta = 55 C
100 m DRIVE-CLiQ
5.7.2.7 Specifications for use with UL approval
Pre-assembled cables
Sensor/actuator cable, 5-pin, variable cable,
free cable end at straight socket M12-SPEEDCON,
cable length: 2, 5, 10, 15 m
SAC-5P-xxx-186/FS SCO
Up to 100 m on request
Phoenix Contact, www.phoenixcontact.com
Cables to be assembled by the user
Table 5- 39 Assembled by the user
Cable Connector
Cable coil, black PUR/PVC, 5-pin
Conductor colors: brown/white/blue/black/gray
Cable length: 100 m
SAC-5P-100.0-186/0.75
Order number: 1535590
Sensor/actuator connector, socket, straight, 5-pin, M12, A-coded
Screw connection, metal knurl, cable gland Pg9
SACC-M12FS-5CON-PG9-M
Order number: 1681486
Phoenix Contact, www.phoenixcontact.com
Power supply
The DME20 must be connected to a 24 V power supply with voltage limitation.
SITOP 6EP1x.. or 6ES7307..
SINAMICS Control Supply Module 6SL3100-1DE22-0Axx
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
168 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Pin assignment of the cable
Table 5- 40 Connection to X524 electronics power supply
Pin Designation Technical specifications
1 (brown)
1)
Electronics power supply
2 (white)
1)
Electronics power supply
3 (black)
1)
Electronics ground
4 (blue)
1)
Electronics ground
4
5 1
2
3

5 (gray)
1)
Not connected internally
The connection voltage of 20.4 V
28.8 V refers to the (terminal)
voltage at the DME20. This must be
taken into account when selecting
the cable cross-section and supply
cable lengths.
Pins 1 and 2: jumpered internally
Pins 3 and 4: jumpered internally
1) The colors stated refer to the cable specified above
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 169
5.7.2.8 Dimension drawing
9
9

(
3
.
9
0
)
55,7 (2.19)
43,5 (1.71)
86,5 (3.41)
88,5 (3.48)
1
4
9

(
5
.
8
7
)
1
3
6
,
5

(
5
.
3
7
)
1
3
4
,
5

(
5
.
3
0
)

Figure 5-35 Dimension drawing: DME20
Connection of the Components
5.7 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Modules (DMC20, DME20)
Guidelines for machine configuration
170 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.7.2.9 Installation
99 (3.90)
1
4
9

(
5
.
8
7
)
1
3
5
,
5

(
5
.
3
3
)
87,5 (3.44)

5
.
3

(
0
.
2
1
)

o
r

M
5
Contact surface

Figure 5-36 DME20 installation
Installation
1. Place the hole drilling template on the contact surface.
2. The contact surfaces must be unpainted metal.
3. Holes 5.3 or threads M5
4. Tighten with a tightening torque of 6.0 Nm.
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 171
5.7.2.10 Technical data
Table 5- 41 Technical data of the DME20
Unit Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ node)

VDC
ADC

24 DC (20.4 28.8)
0,15
PE/ground connection Fastened to housing M5 / 6 Nm
Degree of protection IP67
Weight kg 0,8
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
For the electronics power supply, a differentiation is made between:
external power supply with SITOP modular
internal power supply with Control Supply Module (CSM)
5.8.1 External power supply (SITOP modular)
An external SITOP modular power supply must be provided for the electronics power supply
of the individual SINAMICS components. This ensures the trouble-free operation of all
SINAMICS components. The SITOP electronics power supply also has the advantage that
the power supply is already equipped with an internal line filter (class B in accordance with
EN55022). This ensures an EMC-conform operation.
If a power supply other than SITOP is used, the required rated data (see Equipment Manual
for Booksize Power Units) must be observed to ensure a trouble-free operation.
24 VDC power is required to supply
the electronics of the SINAMICS components using the integrated 24 V busbar
the electronics for Control Units, Option Boards and Sensor Modules, and the process
voltage of their digital inputs
the load voltage of the digital outputs
the motor holding brakes
Other consumers may be connected to the power supply devices provided they have
separate protection against excess current.

CAUTION
If other consumers are connected to the power supply, switch inductances (contactors,
relays) must be provided with suitable over-voltage protective circuits.

Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
172 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
The operation of motors with integrated holding brake requires a regulated DC power supply.
The power is supplied from the internal 24 V busbars. The voltage tolerances of the motor
holding brakes and the voltage losses of the connection cables must be observed.
The DC power supply should be set to 26 V. The Control Supply Module supplies 26 V. This
ensures that the voltage supplied to the brake lies within the permitted range when the
following general conditions are satisfied:
Use of Siemens three-phase motors
Use of Siemens MOTION-CONNECT power cables
Motor cable lengths maximum 100 m
5.8.2 Selection of the Power Supply Devices
Devices specified in the following table are recommended. These devices satisfy the
associated EN 60204-1 requirements.
Table 5- 42 SITOP Power modular recommendation
Rated output current [A] Input voltage range [V] Short-circuit current [A] Order number
5 2AC 85-132/170 550 5.5 6EP1333-3BA00
10 2AC 85-132/176 550 30 for 25 ms 6EP1334-3BA00
20 3AC 320 550 23 6EP1436-3BA.0
40 3AC 320 550 46 6EP1437-3BA.0

Table 5- 43 Control Supply Module recommendation
Rated output current [A] Input voltage range [V] Short-circuit current [A] Order number
20 3AC 380 -10% (-15% < 1 min) to
3AC 480 +10%
DC 300 800 < 24 6SL3100-1DE22-0AA0
See also NC61 catalog.

WARNING
When external power supplies, such as SITOP, are used, the ground potential must be
connected to the protective conductor connection (PELV).

5.8.3 24 V current consumption of the components
A separate 24 V power supply must be used for the SINAMICS S120 drive group.
The following table can be used to calculate the 24 VDC power supply for the components.
The values of the typical power consumption serve as configuring basis.
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 173

Table 5- 44 Overview of 24 VDC current consumption
Component Typical current consumption [ADC]
NCU 7x0 (without load at the digital outputs) 2.1
NX1x 0.8
CSM 1.1
CU320 without load
each digital output
PROFIBUS Teleservice
0.8
0.1
CBC10 0.1
Active Line Modules
16 kW 1.1
36 kW 1.5
55 kW 1.9
80 kW 1.7
120 kW 2.1
Smart Line Modules
5 kW 0.9
10 kW 1.0
16 kW 1.1
36 kW 1.5
DRIVE-CLiQ and brake
DRIVE-CLiQ (e.g. motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interface) typ. 0.25, max. 0.45
Brake (e.g. motor holding brake) typ. 0.4 to 1.1; max. 2
Single Motor Modules
3 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 0.85
5 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 0.85
9 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 0.85
18 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 0.85
30 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 0.9
45 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 1.2
60 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 1.2
85 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 1.5
132 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 1.2
200 A (+ 1 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 1 x brake) 1.2
Double Motor Modules
2 x 3 A (+ 2 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 2 x brake) 1.15
2 x 5 A (+ 2 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 2 x brake) 1.15
2 x 9 A (+ 2 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 2 x brake) 1.15
2 x 18 A (+ 2 x DRIVE-CLiQ; + 2 x brake) 1.3
Sensor Modules Cabinet
SMC 10 0.25
SMC 20 0.25
SMC 30 0.33
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
174 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Component Typical current consumption [ADC]
Sensor Modules External
SME 20 0.19
SME 25 0.19
SME 120 0.24
SME 125 0.24
Additional system components
Braking Module 0.5

The details apply to Motor Modules / Line Modules with internal/external heat dissipation.
5.8.4 Calculation of the 24 VDC Power Requirement Example
Table 5- 45 Example of 24 V DC current requirements
Component Number Current consumption
[A]
Total current consumption [A]
NCU7x0
8 digital outputs
1
8
2,00
0,01
2,00
0,08
Active Line Module 36 kW 1 1,50 1,50
Motor Module 18 A 2 0,85 1,70
Motor Module 30 A 3 0,90 2,70
SMC 5 0,25 1,25
Brake 5 1,10 5,50
Total: 14,73

The following conditions should be considered for the configuring:
The line infeed of the power supply devices must be tapped in front of the line filter of the
Line Module.
The line connection of the power supply should be made directly and without additional
switched feeders.
The dimensioning of the output rated current of the power supply is determined by the
load of the connected consumers.
A load reserve should be provided; a utilization of 0.7 to 0.8 IN is recommended.
The total length (sum of all cables) of the supply cables for the 24 VDC electronic power
supply between the power supply and the SINAMICS components must not exceed 10
meters.
The connection cable does not need to be shielded nor twisted. The maximum value of
the ripple voltage, however, must not be exceeded. If this is the case, appropriate
measures must be adopted.
Where possible, the additional supply for consumers exterior to the SINAMICS system,
such as contactors, valves, etc., should come from a separate power supply. This
reduces any interactions (voltage dips, etc.).
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 175
5.8.5 Assignment of the power supply to other components
For Smart/Active Line Module, Motor Module and for the NX component, the supply voltage
is monitored by the system. The components are connected using DRIVE-CLiQ; the
monitoring is performed in the Control Unit.
Connection via 24 V terminal adapter
The component's front cover will need to be opened before establishing a 24 V connection to
a module in booksize format. This exposes other live components, such as DC link busbars.

DANGER
Risk of electric shock
A hazardous DC link voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the power supply has been
switched off.
The protective cover may only be opened after this time has elapsed.
When opening the protective cover for the DC link, you must press the release catch. A
suitable tool (e.g. screwdriver or supplied unlocking tool) must be used for this purpose.

An integrated 24 VDC busbar is used for the electronic power supply of the
Line/Motor/Braking and Capacitor Modules. The current carrying capacity of this busbar is
max. 20 A. The integrated busbar also supplies the motor brake control terminals of the
Motor Modules.
The infeed of the electronic power supply is normally made directly on the Line Module using
the 24 V terminal adapter (max. connectable cross-section 6 mm
2
, max. fuse 20 A) supplied
with the Line Modules.
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
176 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
24 V terminal adapter for
conductor cross-sections up to 6 mm
2
The adapter must be screwed on.

Figure 5-37 24 V terminal adapter on the booksize module, front cover open
The 24 V busbar is used to pass the 24 VDC power between the individual components.
24 V jumper plugs (supplied with the Line Modules) are used to jumper the 24 V busbar at
the component transitions.
If the maximum current carrying capacity (20 A ) of the 24 V busbar is exceeded, an
additional electronic current infeed must be provided. This must be implemented, for
example, on a Motor Module using an additional 24 V terminal adapter, which must be
ordered separately (order no. 6SL3162-2AA00-0AA0). The 24 V busbar must not be
jumpered upstream of the new infeed, because a new potential begins downstream of the
additional infeed.
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 177
M M + +
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Line
Module
NCU
7x0
Motor
Module
F F F
M +
M
24 VDC
MM
2
4

V
D
C

X
1
2
4
X
2
4
X
2
4
<1> <1>
<2> <2> <2>
M +
<1> 24 VDC terminal adapter
<2> Jumper plug

Figure 5-38 Electronic power supply infed more than once
For all other components, such as Control Unit or Sensor Module, the electronic power
supply is connected using appropriate infeed plugs at the associated component. The infeed
plugs are identical for all components. The maximum connectable cross-section is 2.5 mm
2

and the maximum current carrying capacity is 20 A.
To improve the wiring of the individual components with each other, a potential jumpering at
the infeed plugs is possible. The total current of all attached components, however, must not
exceed 20 A.
Power is supplied to the digital inputs/outputs at the Control Unit and Sensor Module, for
example, via appropriate terminals (max. 0.5 mm
2
).
5.8.6 Overcurrent protection
On the primary side and on the secondary side of the power supply device, devices and
cables must be protected from over-current using suitable protection devices.
Primary side
Recommended circuit-breakers (IEC 898) in the suppy cable can be found in the technical
data of the SITOP devices in the KT 10.1 catalog. The cable cross-section must be
considered.
The primary protection is responsible for providing device protection for the SITOP power
supply as well as line protection between the protective device and the power supply.
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
178 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Secondary side
For the protection of the secondary side, particular attention must be paid to:
Loading due to loads, possibly the simultaneity factor in response to machine operation
The current carrying capacity of the cables in normal operation and in a short-circuit
situation
The ambient temperature
The effect of bundling together cables, e.g. where these are laid in a common duct
Cable laying method to EN 60204-1
EN 60204-1, Section 14, can be used to determine the overcurrent protection devices.
Protection of the load feeders
Load feeders must be protected selectively. Circuit-breakers are suitable (order no.: 5S,
ETB1 catalog) or the SITOP select diagnostic component (order no.: 6EP1961-2BA.0).
Configuration details for the secondary protection of the load feeders are contained in the KT
10.1 catalog (SITOP Power Supplies, "Technical Information and Configuration Notes"
section).
The rated size of the protective devices depends on the current need. The protective device
also performs the line protection and sometimes also the device protection of the attached
consumers. In a fault situation, the used power supply must be able to supply the required
power until being controlled.
Regulated power supplies (such as SITOP power) must be provided, in accordance with EN
60204-1, with integrated electronic short-circuit protection capable of independently
protecting SITOP power and the supplied 24 VDC circuits against overloading in the event of
overloads/short circuits.
Circuit-breakers
When selecting circuit breakers from the table below, the following cable conditions need to
be considered:
Ambient temperature 40 C or 55 C
Max. 1 conductor pair bunched
Conductor limit temperature 70 C for normal operation
Maximum cable length:
10 m for the supply cables
30 m for signal lines
To be laid separately from other cables and conductors carrying operating current
Cable type: PVC conductor cable
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 179
Table 5- 46 Types of circuit breaker depending on conductor cross-section and temperature
Conductor cross-
section
Max. value up to 40 C Max. value up to 55 C
1.5 mm
2
10 A 10 A
2.5 mm
2
20 A 10 A
4 mm
2
25 A 16 A
6 mm
2
32 A 20 A
24 V busbar 20 A 20 A
The tripping characteristic of the circuit-breakers must be chosen appropriately for the
consumers to be protected and the maximum current provided by the power supply device in
a short-circuit situation.
The MCBs can be selected according to Siemens catalog "BETA Modular Installation
Devices - ET B1".
5.8.7 Line formation
The corresponding different supply lines should be configured and constructed depending on
the size of the drive group and the overall length. This ensures that should one line fail, the
power supply to all attached consumers does not fail. The fault-free consumer lines remain
operational.
The maximum connectable cross-section of the consumers must also be considered:
6.0 mm
2
for the 24 V power supply terminal adapter of the power busbar
2.5 mm
2
for the 24 V power supply infeed terminal of the CU and SMC components
0.5 mm
2
for the digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs
Example for the splitting of the consumer lines:
NCU / NX
Line / Motor Modules
Supply of the Sensor Modules
Consumers such as relays, valves, etc.
Additional brakes not supplied from the Motor Module
Multiple power supplies are recommended for larger plant concepts.
Example of the separation:
Power supply for the direct drive system (NCU, NX, LM, MM, SME and SMC)
Power supply for additional consumers, such as brakes, valves and power contactors
If required, the circuit-breakers can be equipped with additional auxiliary switches. If these
signal contacts are fed to a higher-level controller, a detailed fault diagnosis can be
performed when the circuit-breakers trip.
Connection of the Components
5.8 Electronics Power Supply
Guidelines for machine configuration
180 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Notes
SINAMICS components have a reverse polarity protection on the 24 VDC infeed side.
Line, Motor, Braking, Capacitor and Control Supply Modules are short-circuit resistant on
the 24 V busbar for a maximum current of 20 A. The 24 V terminal adapter for the infeed
has a maximum connection cross-section of 6 mm
2
.
If no higher short-circuit current can occur, a protection can be omitted. This means the
components can be connected directly to the power supply.
If higher short-circuit current occur, a protection against over-current / short-circuit must
be provided, max. 20 A, however. In a fault situation, the used power supply must be able
to supply the required current until tripping.
The maximum protection of the power supply infeed for Control Unit and Sensor Module
Cabinet depends on the connected cable cross-section (max. 2.5 mm
2
), maximum 20 A,
however.
The maximum protection of the controller inputs/outputs at the other components
depends on the connected cable cross-section:
Table 5- 47 Controller inputs/outputs and their connectable cross-sections
Component max. cable cross-section
Control Unit 0.5 mm
2

Sensor Module Cabinet (SMC) 1.5 mm
2

Smart Line Module 1.5 mm
2

Active Line Module 1.5 mm
2

Motor Module 1.5 mm
2

Controller outputs at the Line, Motor and Braking Module, Control Unit and Sensor
Module Cabinet are short-circuit resistant.
Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 181
5.8.8 Power Supply Connection Example

X124
NCU
7x0
X524
SMC
10
X524
SMC
10
X524
SMC
10
Active
Line
Module
24 VDC
X24
Single
Motor
Module
24 VDC
Single
Motor
Module
24 VDC
Single
Motor
Module
24 VDC
Single
Motor
Module
24 VDC
Single
Motor
Module
24 VDC
Single
Motor
Module
24 VDC
Pl
SlTOP
40 A
external
-F
-F
-F -F
<1> Power supply protection in accordance with manufacturer details, KT 10.1
catalog, Chapter 7
<2> max. connection cross-section 2.5 mm
2
, max. fuse 20A
<3> max. connection cross-section 6 mm
2
, max. fuse 20A
<4> The selection of the protection depends on the total current of the connected
consumers.
<5> The cross-section depends on the selected protection, on the required current
and the type of laying.
Line
DCL DCL DCL DCL DCL DCL DCL

Figure 5-39 Power Supply Connection Example
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
The Control Supply Module (CSM) is a 24 VDC power supply unit integrated as a separate
SINAMICS component in the drive group.
The CSM supplies all SINAMICS components in the drive group and also components, such
as Control Unit or Sensor Module Cabinet with 24 VDC. The maximum output current is
20 ADC. An external power supply is not essential.
Only the power supply network is used for the startup of the CSM. As an option, the CSM
provides the 24 VDC power supply via the line voltage or, in a fault situation (e.g. power
failure), from the DC link of the drive group. The switching is performed automatically internal
in the CSM.
The functionality of the complete drive group can be retained should the line power supply
fail. Depending on the energy content in the DC link, the CSM can maintain the supply of the
24 V busbar. This allows transient line fluctuations to be bridged without the drive group
failing.
Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
182 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
To achieve longer bridging times, additional Capacitor Modules can be used to increase the
DC link capacity. The consequent increased storage capacity of the DC link acts positively
should the line voltage drop.
Specific emergency return movements, such as those required in the machine tool area, can
also be initiated. This is necessary, for example, to stop fast rotating spindles as fast as
possible or to protect expensive workpieces by making appropriate return movements of the
axis. Further measures, however, must be considered for the realization.
CSM for line failure
For the planning of the line failure concepts, those components located outside the
SINAMICS drive group must also be considered (line contactor, controller, etc.).
If, in the event of a fault, the primary energy supply of the CSM comes from the DC link, this
can be performed only in the voltage range UDC link = 430 - 882 VDC (300 - 430 VDC for
< 1 min). If these limits are overshot or undershot, the corresponding error messages will be
generated by the system and internal pulse suppression will be triggered. The drives coast to
a standstill and can no longer be controlled!
To limit the maximum/minimum DC link voltage, the use of Capacitor and Braking Modules
may be necessary.

Note
The supply voltage corresponds to PELV (protective extra-low voltage). The required
connection of the ground potential to the protective conductor system is realized in the CSM.

Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 183
5.9.1 Connection example
l > l > l >
1) Permissible types:
a) SlRlUS circuit breaker, 3RV 1021 1DA10, set to 3A
b) KTS-R-6 branch circuit fuse (class RK1)
2) The line supply connection must be established at all times.
3) Dl/DO, controlled by the Control Unit
4) No additional load permitted downstream of line contactor
5) The current carrying capacity of the DO must be observed; an output coupling device must be used if required.
6) Contact through the rear of the mounting surface or shielding buses in accordance with the EMC Directive
Line reactor
Line filter
Fuses
Circuit
breaker
Line
contactor
(optional)
Overcurrent
protection device
Disconnector unit
Additional loads
1 to n Motor Modules RCCB
(optional)
Motor
Modules
Control
Supply
Module
Line
Module
DO
CU
Dl
CU
M M
2)
DC 24 V
U1 W1 V1 L1 L3 L2
W1
X1 X1
V1 U1 L3 L2 L1
L
E
D
s
L
E
D
s
2)
6)
6)
1)
3)
3)
4)
5)
6)
l > l > l >
DCP
DCN
+
DCP
DCN
+
PE
1L1
1L2
1L3
PE
L1
L2
L3
L
E
D
s
DC LlNK
READY
DC LlNK
READY
DC LlNK
READY

Figure 5-40 Example connection of Control Supply Module
Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
184 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
The Control Supply Module (CSM) is connected to the line supply (380 V 3 AC 10 % up to
480 V +10 %) via the appropriate screw terminals (0.2 to 4 mm
2
). This connection should
preferably be made without using an isolating device (e.g. contactor).
The CSM has an internal line filter (Class A for TN line supplies), and the pre-charging circuit
for the DC link inside the unit is electrically isolated from the 24 V supply.
The CSM also features a current limitation function. If cables with a cross-section of 2.5 mm
2

are used and a maximum operating temperature of 40 C is observed, there is no need for
additional fuse protection on the 24 V side, nor do the cables on that side have to be laid in a
way that makes them short-circuit proof.
If it is necessary to create multiple branches, we recommend using a SITOP select
diagnostics module as a form of overcurrent protection. You can find more information on
fuse protection in the chapter titled "Control cabinet installation and EMC".

Note
If a selectively tripping, AC/DC-sensitive RCCB is used for the drive line-up, the Control
Supply Module must always be connected to the line supply downstream of this circuit
breaker.

Note
Connecting to the line
When engineering the line supply of the CSM, it should be noted that the CSM may not be
connected to the line supply after the Line Module is connected to the line supply. When
charging, this prevents the DC link from being immediately loaded by the CSM.

Note
Using several Control Supply Modules
It is possible to use several CSMs in one DC link, but they must not be connected in parallel.
An individual line, complete with 20 A fuse protection, must be created for each CSM.

Note
Installation of the 24 V terminal adapter
If necessary, the 24 V terminal adapter can be installed on the right-hand side of the CSM.
The adapter must be screwed tight using the screw supplied.

Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 185
5.9.2 Criteria for the protection, line formation and monitoring
Devices and cables must be protected against overload and short-circuit in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications and appropriate standards.
The primary protection is performed by the device protection of the CSM power supply and
the line protection between the protective device and the power supply.
Recommended circuit-breakers (IEC 898) in the suppy cable can be found in the technical
data in the Equipment Manual for Booksize Power Units. The appropriate cable cross-
section must be considered.
The 24 VDC output circuit of the CSM must normally use an appropriate protection to protect
the device in an overload/short-circuit situation.
Regulated power supplies, such as the CSM in contrast, are equipped with an integrated
electronic short-circuit protection as required by the EN 60204-1 standard for the electronic
equipment for machines, that independently protects the CSM and the supplied 24 VDC
circuits against over-current in an overload/short-circuit situation. This applies, for example,
to the direct power supply for the drive group via the 24 V busbar.
The corresponding load feeders must be selectively protected for the supply to external
components. Circuit-breakers are suitable (order no.: 5S, ETB1 catalog) or the SITOP
Select diagnostic module (order no.: 6EP1961-2BA.0). The rated size of the protective
devices depends on the required current. The protective device also performs the line
protection and sometimes also the device protection of the attached consumers. In a fault
situation, the CSM must be able to supply the required current until tripping.
The cable layout of the external consumers must conform to the associated conditions:
The loading by the attached consumers (also refer to the Equipment Manual for Booksize
Power Units); the concurrency factor depending on the operation of the machine may
need to be considered.
Current carrying capacity of the conductors used and cables in normal and short-circuit
conditions
The ambient temperature
Cable bundling (e.g. laying in a common duct)
The cable types
EN60204-1 and EN 60439 (VDE 660, Part 500) can be referred to when selecting the
overcurrent protective devices.
If required, the circuit-breakers can be equipped with additional auxiliary switches. If these
signal contacts are fed to a higher-level controller, a detailed fault diagnosis can be
performed when the circuit-breakers trip.
Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
186 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.9.3 Interconnection of the voltage output for the CSM
Interconnection of the 24 VDC voltage output for the Control Supply Module
Exclusive supply of the drive group
The appropriate jumper plugs are used to connect the secondary 24 VDC voltage output
to the 24 V busbar of the drive group. It is not permissible to connect a number of CSM
modules in parallel using 24 V jumper plugs. This means the Control Supply Module only
supplies the drive group consisting, for example, of Line, Motor, Capacitor and Braking
Modules.
An additional SITOP Modular power supply must be provided to supply power to the
other external consumers.
Supply of external components, such as CU and SMC
An appropriate connection adapter can be used to supply power for external consumers
as well. For example, only a specific Control Supply Module can be used for these
consumers. This means an external power supply can be omitted.

NOTICE

The maximum current carrying capacity of the DC link busbars is 100 A. This must be
considered for the positioning of the CSM in the drive group. The CSM must not be
installed between or in front of the 300 mm components! In preference, the CSM should
be placed at the end of the drive group.



Note
The maximum length of the supply cables for the 24 VDC electronic power supply
between the power supply and the SINAMICS components must not exceed 10 meters.
The connection cable does not need to be shielded nor twisted. The maximum value of
the ripple voltage, however, must not be exceeded. If this is not the case, shielded or
twisted cables should be used.

Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 187
Use of several Control Supply Modules, division of the consumer lines
An additional CSM must be provided if the load caused by the supplied consumers causes
the maximum output current (20 A) of the CSM to be exceeded. The 24 VDC busbar must
not be jumpered in front of the new infeed, because a new potential begins after the
additional infeed.
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Control
Supply
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Control
Supply
Module
1
Control
Supply
Module
2
M + M +
Supply by the CSM 2 Supply by the CSM 1
Example 1: Load > 20 A
Example 2: Load > 20 A
24 VDC busbar
DC-link
busbar
24 VDC busbar
DC-link
busbar

Figure 5-41 24 VDC division
The corresponding different supply lines must be configured and constructed depending on
the size of the drive group and the overall length. This ensures that should one line fail, the
power supply to all attached consumers does not fail. The fault-free consumer lines remain
operational.
Multiple Control Supply Modules are recommended for larger plant concepts. This achieves
a decoupling and reduces possible influencing of the supplied components amongst each
other.
Example: Subdivision of the consumer groups:
CSM for the direct drive system (CU, Line Module, Motor Module and SMC)
CSM for additional consumers, such as brakes, valves and power contactors
Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
188 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Example: Division of protection (e.g. automatic devices) for consumer lines
NCU
Supply of the Sensor Modules
Consumers such as relays, valves, etc.

DANGER

The Control Supply Module has two supply circuits!
Risk of electrical shock. Dangerous voltage present for as long as five minutes after the
supply has been switched off.
The protective cover may be opened only after this time has expired.
When opening the protective cover for the DC link, you must press the release catch. A
suitable tool (e.g. unlocking tool for opening the DC link protective covers) must be used
for this purpose.
The components may be operated only when the protective covers of the DC link are
closed. Damaged components (e.g. with a defective lock on the protective cover) must
not be operated any longer.

CAUTION

The danger note for the DC link discharge time must be placed on the component in the
national language.
A set of labels in 16 languages is provided with the component.

Connection of the Components
5.9 Control Supply Module (CSM)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 189
5.9.4 Control Supply Module Power Supply - Connection Example
X124
NCU
7x0
X524
SMC
10
X524
SMC
10
X524
SMC
10
Active
Line
Module
24 VDC
Motor
Module
(CSM 1)
24 VDC
Motor
Module
(CSM 1)
24 VDC
Control
Supply
Module
1
24 VDC
Control
Supply
Module
2
24 VDC
Control
Supply
Module
3
24 VDC
Motor
Module
(CSM 2)
24 VDC
Motor
Module
(CSM 2)
24 VDC
CSM 1
CSM 1
NCU
CSM 2 CSM 3
SMC
L1
L2
L3
Pl
3 AC/PE 380...480 V 50/60 Hz
NCU
SMC
24 VDC 1L+
1M
Valves Contactors
24 VDC 3L+
3M
CSM 2 CSM 3
<4>
<1> <1> <1> <1>
-Q1 -Q2 -Q3 -Q4
<5>
<2>
<3>
<7>
<3>
<7>
<3>
<7>
<8> <8> <8>
<6> <6> <6>
<5>
<4>
<5>
<4>
<5>
<4>
-F1 -F2 -F3 -F4
<5>
DCL DCL DCL DCL DCL DCL DCL DCL

Figure 5-42 CSM power supply connection example
1. Protection using the manufacturer's specifications
2. Max. connection cross-section 2.5 mm
2
, max. fuse 20 A
3. Max. connection cross-section 6 mm
2
, max. fuse 20 A
4. The selection of the protection depends on the total current of the connected consumers.
5. The cross-section depends on the selected protection and on the required current.
6. The current carrying capacity of the 24 VDC busbar is max. 20 A; if this value is
exceeded, the 24 V busbar must be interrupted and an additional supply selected.
Connection of the Components
5.10 Cable Lengths
Guidelines for machine configuration
190 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
7. The 24 VDC terminal adapters are included with the supplied Line Module. If additional
terminal adapters are required, they must be ordered separately (6SI3162-2AA00-0AA0).
8. Observe the maximum current carrying capacity of the DC link busbar on the Control
Supply Module (100 A) when the drive group is put together; see also Section Current
Carrying Capacity of the DC Link Busbar (Page 30).
5.10 Cable Lengths
5.10.1 General information

DANGER
If the shielding procedures described and the specified cable lengths are not observed, the
machine may not operate properly.

5.10.2 Cable shielding and routing
In order to comply with the EMC requirements, certain cables must be routed apart from
other cables and from certain components. To full EMC requirements, the following cables
must be used with shields:
Line supply conductors from line filter via line reactor to Line Module
All motor cables (if necessary, including cables for motor holding brake)
Cables for "fast inputs" of the Control Unit
Cables for analog direct voltage/current signals
Signal cables for sensors
Cables for temperature sensors

DANGER

A suitable PE conductor must be connected to all devices in protection class I.
The protective conductor connection of the individual components must be at least 4
mm.

Connection of the Components
5.10 Cable Lengths
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 191
Alternative measures (e.g. routing behind mounting plates, suitable clearances) can also be
used provided they have similar results. This excludes measures that relate to the design,
installation, and routing of motor power cables and signal cables. If unshielded cables are
used between the line supply connection point and line filter, make sure that no interfering
cables are routed in parallel.
The cable shields must be connected as close to the conductor terminal connections as
possible to ensure a low-impedance connection with cabinet ground. For Siemens power
cables in which the shield is connected to the connector shell (see relevant catalog), this is a
sufficiently good shield support.
With components that do not have any special shield connection or where the shield
connection is not sufficient, the cable shields can be connected to the metal mounting plate
using hose clamps and toothed rails. The cable length between the shield contact point and
the terminals for cable conductors must be kept as short as possible.
Shield contact plates with pre-prepared clip contacts are available for contacting the shields
for power cables of Line Modules and Motor Modules. Up to a module width of 100 mm,
these plates are part of the scope of delivery of the components, or they are integrated in the
connector.
All cables inside the cabinet must be routed as closely as possible to parts connected with
cabinet ground, such as a mounting plate or cabinet wall. Ducts made of sheet steel or
cables routed between steel sheets (e.g. between the mounting plate and back wall) should
provide adequate shielding.
Avoid, where possible, routing unshielded cables, connected to the drive line-up, in the
immediate vicinity of noise sources, e.g. transformers. Signal cables (shielded and
unshielded) connected to the drive line-up must be laid at a great distance from strong
external magnetic sources (e.g. transformers, line reactors). In both cases, a distance of
300 mm is usually sufficient.

DANGER
The drive components generate high leakage currents in the protective conductor. The
components must only be operated in cabinets or in closed electrical operating areas and
must be connected with the protective conductor. To protect against electric shock, the
protective conductor connection at the control cabinet or machine must be implemented in
accordance with one of the following measures:
Fixed connection and protective conductor connection by means of 10 mm
2
Cu or
16 mm
2
Al
Fixed connection and automatic disconnection of the supply system if the protective
conductor is interrupted

Connection of the Components
5.10 Cable Lengths
Guidelines for machine configuration
192 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.10.3 Equipotential Bonding
The SINAMICS S120 Booksize drive system is designed for use in control cabinets with
protective conductor terminal.
If the drive line-up is arranged on a common unpainted metal-surfaced mounting plate, e.g.
with a galvanized surface, no additional equipotential bonding is needed within the drive line-
up as
All parts of the switchgear assembly are connected to the protective conductor system.
The mounting plate is connected with the external PE conductor by means of a finely-
stranded copper conductor with a cross-section of 16 mm, including the outer conductor.
From a cross-section of 25 mm copper, the outer cross-section of the finely-stranded
conductor is halved.
For other installation methods, equipotential bonding must be implemented using conductor
cross-sections as stated in the second item in the list or at least equal to the conductance.
If components are mounted on DIN rails, the data listed in the second item applies for
equipotential bonding. If only smaller connection cross-sections are permitted on the
components, use the largest possible, e.g. 6 mm
2
for SMC. These requirements also apply
to distributed components located outside the cabinet.
For a PROFIBUS connection between two control cabinets, a fine-wire potential equalizing
conductor with a cross-section of 4 mm
2
should be used. This conductor must be laid
together with the PROFIBUS connection cable and connected to the NCU 7x0 using a cable
lug.
Equipotential bonding and shielding for PROFIBUS
The cable shield must be connected over a large contact surface area.
PROFlBUS X126 connection
Equipotential bonding connections
at the functional ground
PROFlBUS X136/MPl connection

Figure 5-43 PROFIBUS and function ground connections
5.10.4 Protective Ground Connection
The bodies of electrical resources which because of their fastening cannot be included in the
protective measure must be connected with the protective conductor circuit of the switching
device combination (control cabinet) in order to establish the protection connection.
All protective conductors must be selected to conform with EN 60204-1 or EN 60439-1 and
connected in accordance with the specifications of the associated device manuals.
Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 193
5.11 Motor Connection
5.11.1 Motor connection plug
5.11.1.1 Installation of the motor connection plug with locking mechanism
Motor connection plugs with locking mechanism are available in two versions:
Crimp plug for pre-assembled motor cables
Screw connector for motor cables that need to be assembled
The way in which the motor connection plug is installed depends on the type of Motor
Module used.

Note
With Double Motor Modules, the rear motor connection plug must be installed first and then
locked.

Installation on Motor Modules without pre-assembled interlock bolt

2
1
3
1,8 Nm
TX20

Figure 5-44 Installation example: Crimp plug

Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
194 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1. Screw the interlock bolt into the threaded socket provided in the enclosure.
2. Insert the plug, including the motor cable, and lock it in place by turning a screwdriver or
size 4 hexagon socket-head screw clockwise by a turn (90).
Installation on Motor Modules with pre-assembled interlock bolt
If Motor Modules with a pre-assembled interlock bolt are used, step 1 described above can
be omitted.
1
2
3

Figure 5-45 Installation example: Screw connector

Simply insert the connector, including the motor cable, and lock it in place by turning a
screwdriver or size 4 hexagon socket-head screw clockwise by a turn (90).
5.11.1.2 Installation of the motor connection plug with screwed joint
The way in which the motor connection plug with screwed joint is installed depends on the
type of Motor Module used.

Note
With Double Motor Modules, the rear motor connection plug must be installed first and then
locked.
Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 195

Installation on Motor Modules with interlock bolt
1
2

Figure 5-46 Installation of the motor connection plug with screwed joint

1. Use a TX20 screwdriver to remove the interlock bolt from the lower side of the enclosure.
2. Insert the plug, including the motor cable, and screw in with a TX20 screwdriver.
Installation on Motor Modules without interlock bolt
If the motor connection plug with screwed joint is being installed on a Motor Module without a
pre-assembled interlock bolt, step 1 described above can be omitted.
Simply insert the plug, including the motor cable, and screw in with a TX20 screwdriver.
Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
196 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.11.1.3 Removal and coding
Removing the motor connection plug
The motor connection plug of a pre-assembled motor cable might have to be removed if the
cable needs to be routed through narrow cable glands, for example.
U
W
+
V
-

Figure 5-47 Motor connection plug with screwed joint
U
V
W

Figure 5-48 Crimp version motor connection plug with locking mechanism

In the case of motor connection plugs with a screwed joint, the pipe clamp first needs to be
released. The interlock in the plug can then be raised using a pair of engineer's pliers, for
example, and the cable can be removed.
Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 197



Figure 5-49 Removing the motor connection plug with screwed joint
In the case of motor connection plugs with a locking mechanism, the clamp first needs to be
released. The interlock then has to be raised using a screwdriver, for example. After that, the
insert can be removed, followed by the motor cable.



Figure 5-50 Removing the crimp plug with locking mechanism
Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
198 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Coding the motor connection plug
The coding of a motor connection plug is illustrated below, using the example of a plug with
screwed joint. Coding can be used to prevent incorrect connections being made, particularly
in the case of Double Motor Modules.
Coding plugs
Coding plugs Coding plugs
Coding plugs Coding plugs
Motor
connector

Figure 5-51 Coding the motor connection plug
The coding plugs are included in the scope of delivery of the motor cables and screw
connectors (motor connection plug with locking mechanism and screwed joint).
Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 199
5.11.2 Connection examples
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

1
24 V jumper
DRlVE-CLiQ socket 2
ln addition for Double Motor Modules
DRlVE-CLiQ socket 3
1) Required for Safety
2) SMC required for motors without DRlVE-CLiQ interface
3) 24 V to the next module
4) Optional, e.g. for encoderless motors
U
U
X2
BR-
W2
BR+
V2
U2
+
-
SMC
2)
1)
4)
4)

EP +24 V
EP M1
-Temp
1
2
3
4
X22
+Temp
E
3
M
~
X203
3)
+
M
+
M
8
8
8
1)
EP +24 V
EP M1
-Temp
1
2
3
4
X21
+Temp
DCP
DCN
L
E
D
s
DC LlNK
READY
2)
X1
BR-
W2
BR+
V2
U2
+
-
SMC
8
E
3
M
~
X202
DCP
DCN
X200 X201

Figure 5-52 Connection example of Motor Modules 3 A to 30 A and Double Motor Modules 3 A to 18 A
Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
200 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
DRlVE-CLiQ socket 2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
o
c
k
e
t

1
24 V jumper
Motor Module
Fan
1) Required for Safety
2) ln addition for Motor Modules 132 A to 200 A
3) Contact through the shield plate
4) 24 V to the next module
5) Optional, e.g. for encoderless motors
U
4)
+
M
+
M
8
8
3)
1)
5)
-
1
2
X12
+
EP +24 V
EP M1
-Temp
1
2
3
4
X21
+Temp
L
E
D
s
DC LlNK
READY
2)
X11
E
3
M
~
X202
BR-
W2
BR+
V2
U2
1
2
DCP
DCN
DCP
DCN
X200 X201

Figure 5-53 Example connection of Single Motor Modules 45 A to 200 A
5.11.3 Motor/brake connection
Table 5- 48 Terminal strip X1/X2 Motor Modules 3 A to 30 A and Double Motor Modules 3 A to 18 A
Terminal Technical specifications
U (U2)
V (V2)
W (W2)
Motor connection
+ (BR+)
- (BR-)
Brake connection
max. load current 2 A
min. load current 0.1 A

PE connection Threaded hole M5/3 Nm
1

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234

Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 201
Table 5- 49 Terminal strip Single Motor Module 45 A to 200 A
Terminals Technical specifications
U2
V2

W2
45 A to 60 A:
Threaded bolt M6/6 Nm
1)

85 A:
Threaded bolt M8/13 Nm
1)

132 A to 200 A:
Threaded bolt M8/13 Nm
1)

+ (BR+)
+ -

- (BR-)
X11 brake connector
2)
:
Voltage 24 V DC
Max. load current 2 A
Min. load current 0.1 A
Max. connectable cross-section 2.5 mm
2
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 2 (see chapter Connection methods)
The brake connector is part of the pre-assembled cable

Single Motor Module with a rated output current of 45 A to 60:
Threaded bolt for motor cables: M6/6 Nm
1)
Threaded hole for PE: M6/6
Nm
1)


PE connection
Single Motor Module with a rated output current of 85 A
Threaded bolt for motor cables: M8/13 Nm
1)
Threaded hole for PE: M6/6 Nm
1)

Single Motor Module with a rated output current of 132 A to 200 A
Threaded bolt for motor cables: M8/13 Nm
1)
Threaded hole for PE: M8/13 Nm
1)

1) For ring cable lugs in accordance with DIN 46234
2) The circuit for protecting the brake against overvoltage is integrated in the Motor Module and does not need to be
installed externally. The max. load current is 2 A, the min. load current 0.1 A.


Note
The overall length of the power cables (motor supply cables and DC-link cables) must not
exceed the values given in chapter "Possible line reactor and line filter combinations".

Note
The motor brake must be connected via connector X11. The BR- cable must not be
connected directly to electronic ground (M).

WARNING
Only protective extra-low voltages (DVC A) that comply with EN 60204-1 must be
connected to all connections and terminals between 0 and 48 VDC.
The voltage tolerances of the motor holding brakes (24 V 10%) must be taken into
account.

Connection of the Components
5.11 Motor Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
202 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.11.4 X21/X22 EP terminals / temperature sensor Motor Module
Table 5- 50 Terminal strip X21/X22
Terminal Function Technical specifications
1 + Temp
2 - Temp
Temperature sensors: KTY 84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
switch with NC contact
3 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses)

4 EP M1 (Enable Pulses)
Supply voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
Current consumption: 10 mA
Isolated input
Signal propagation times:
L H: 100 s
H L: 1000 s
The pulse inhibit function is only available when Safety
Integrated Basic Functions are enabled.
Max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm
2

Type: Screw terminal 1 (see chapter Connection methods)


NOTICE
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.

NOTICE
The function of the EP terminals is only available when Safety Integrated Basic Functions
are enabled.

Note
The temperature sensor input is not needed if the motors feature an integrated DRIVE-CLiQ
interface or if temperature values are detected by means of a different module (SMC, SME,
TM).

Connection of the Components
5.12 Sensor Systems Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 203
5.12 Sensor Systems Connection
5.12.1 Introduction
The encoder system should be connected to SINAMICS S120 via DRIVE-CLiQ.
Motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces (e.g. synchronous motors 1FK7 and 1FT6, and induction
motors 1PH7) are designed for this purpose. These motors simplify commissioning and
diagnostics because the motor and encoder type are identified automatically.
Motors and external encoders without DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Motors without DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces, as well as external encoders, must be connected via
Sensor Modules to enable the encoder and temperature signals to be evaluated. Sensor
Modules Cabinet-Mounted (SMC) are available for installation in control cabinets and Sensor
Modules External (SME) for installation outside control cabinets.
If not otherwise specified, only one encoder system can be connected to each Sensor
Module.
Motors and external encoders with DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces can be connected to the associated Motor Module
directly via the MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables available. The connection of the
MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cable at the motor has degree of protection IP67.
The DRIVE-CLiQ interface supplies the motor encoder via the integrated 24 VDC supply and
transfers the motor encoder and temperature signals and the electronic rating plate data,
e.g. a unique identification number, rated data (voltage, current, torque, etc.) directly to the
Control Unit. Different encoder cable are therefore no longer required for the various encoder
types, e.g. resolvers or absolute encoders. Wiring can be effected throughout with a
MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cable.
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder is an absolute encoder with integrated DRIVE-CLiQ interface (see
the section titled "DRIVE-CLiQ encoder").
Connection of the Components
5.12 Sensor Systems Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
204 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.12.2 Overview of Sensor Modules
Sensor Modules Cabinet-Mounted (SMC)
Sensor Modules Cabinet-Mounted can be ordered and configured separately. They are used
when a motor with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not available or when external encoders in
addition to the motor encoder are required. Only one encoder system can be connected to
each Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted. The SMCs evaluate these measuring systems and
convert the calculated values to DRIVE-CLiQ. Neither motor nor encoder data are saved.

Note
The SMC supplies the power to the encoder; the SMC, however, must be provided
separately with 24 VDC power.

SMC30 SMC20 SMC10
30 mm 50 mm 30 mm 30 mm

Figure 5-54 Overview of Sensor Modules Cabinet-Mounted (SMC)
Sensor Modules External (SME)
The Sensor Modules SME20, SME25, SME120, and SME125 are only intended for use on
machines (in North America, in accordance with the NFPA 79 "Electrical Standard for
Industrial Machinery") and may only be connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces of
proprietary components.
Direct encoder systems outside the cabinet can be connected to the Sensor Modules
External. The SMEs evaluate these encoder systems and convert the calculated values to
DRIVE-CLiQ. No motor or encoder data is stored in the SMEs.

Note
The SME provides the encoder power supply. The power supply for the SME is provided
from the connected DRIVE-CLiQ cable. This must be taken into consideration when the
DRIVE-CLiQ cable is selected.

Connection of the Components
5.12 Sensor Systems Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 205
The Sensor Modules External have a higher degree of protection (IP67) and are therefore
suitable for installation outside the cabinet.
SME20/25 SME120 SME125

Figure 5-55 Overview of Sensor Modules External (SME)
Connectable encoder systems
Table 5- 51 Connectable encoder systems
SMC SME
Encoder systems SMC10
30 mm
SMC10
50 mm
SMC20
30 mm
SMC30
30 mm
SME20 SME25 SME120 SME125
Resolver Yes Yes - - - - - -
Incremental encoder sin/cos
(1 Vpp)
with/without reference signal
- - Yes - Yes - Yes -
Absolute encoder EnDat 2.1 - - Yes - - Yes - Yes
Incremental encoder TTL / HTL - - - Yes - - - -
Absolute encoder SSI - - Yes
1)
Yes
2)
- Yes
1)
- Yes
1)

Temperature
evaluation
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3)
- Yes
(electric-
ally
isolated)
Yes
(electric-
ally
isolated)
1) Only possible for SSI encoders with 5 V supply
2) Possible for SSI encoders with 5 V or 24 V supply
3) With prescribed adapter cable 6FX8002-2CA88
Connection of the Components
5.12 Sensor Systems Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
206 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.12.3 X200-X203 DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Table 5- 52 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X200-X202: Single Motor Module
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X200-X203: Double Motor Module
Pin Name Technical specifications
1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply

B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces included in the scope of delivery;
blanking plate (50 pieces) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0
5.12.4 Examples of encoder connections
Motor
Module
DRlVE-CLiQ

M
3~
E
Motor
24 VDC
SMC
Sensor cable
(Power supply and sensor cable)
Power cable
Control cabinet

Figure 5-56 Sensor connection using Sensor Module Cabinet (SMC)
Connection of the Components
5.12 Sensor Systems Connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 207
Motor
Module

M
3~
E
Motor
SMl
DRlVE-CLiQ cable
(Power supply and sensor data)
Power cable
Control cabinet

Figure 5-57 Sensor connection via a motor with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface
NCU
7x0
E
Motor
SME
DRlVE-CLiQ cable
(Power supply
and sensor data)
Sensor cable
(Power supply
and sensor signal)
Control cabinet

Figure 5-58 Sensor connection using Sensor Module External (SME)
Connection of the Components
5.13 Brake connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
208 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
5.13 Brake connection
5.13.1 General Notes
The motors are optionally available with integrated holding brake. The holding brake
prevents the axes from making unwanted movements in the switched off state.

WARNING
The use of the motor holding brake as operational brake is not permitted!

WARNING
When holding brakes are used, the user must observe the special technological and
machine-specific regulations and standards to ensure the person and machine protection.
In addition, the residual risks must be evaluated, for example, the effects of hanging axes.

5.13.2 Connection of the Brake Directly on the Motor Module
A brake control is integrated in the Motor Module. The maximum output current is 24 VDC
2 A.
The power supply for the BR+/BR- connection terminals is provided directly from the
integrated 24 VDC power supply busbar.
The connection of the brake supply cable is made at the appropriate terminal blocks
provided on the Motor Module. The brake cables are normally integrated in the
preassembled motor supply cable that is also shielded.
The maximum cable length of the brake supply cable is 50 meters.
Connection for the device size 3 A to 30 A or 2 x 3 A to 2 x 18 A
The connection is made to the shared -X1 motor connection terminal: BR+/BR- terminal,
max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm
2

Connection for device size 45 A to 200 A
The connection is made to a separate -X11 brake connection terminal: BR+/BR- terminal,
max. connectable cross-section 1.5 mm
2

Connection of the Components
5.13 Brake connection
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 209

-
+
U2
V2
BR+
W2
BR-
X1

M
3~
E
Motor
Module
Motor

Motor Module 3 A to 30 A;
2 x 3 A to 2 x 18 A
2
1
X1, U2
X1, V2
BR+
X1, W2
BR-
X11

M
3~
E
Motor
Module
Motor

Motor Module 45 A to 200 A
The brake outlet is internally equipped with an overvoltage protection circuit. This reduces
high voltage peaks that can occur when the brake is switched off and protects the electronic
outputs. An additional external protective circuit for the brake output is not required. The
brake output is short-circuit resistant. The following monitoring is also performed on the
brake outlet:
Current flow only when the brake is switched on; monitors whether a consumer is
attached
Wire breakage only when the brake is switched on



Note
The above-mentioned monitoring is possible only when the brake is directly attached to
the Motor Module without interface contactor.

5.13.3 Connection of the Brake using Interface Relay
The motor holding brake can be attached directly to the provided connecting terminal or
indirectly using an interface relay switched between. This may be necessary, for example,
when the brake rated current IBR > DC 2 A or the connection voltage of the brake is 1AC
230 V. It is important, however, that the rated current of the interface relay is > 100 mA to
prevent a fault message from the brake monitoring.
Connection of the Components
5.14 Brake Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
210 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Brake current IBR > 2 A DC
Motor
Module
BR+
-K
-F
L-
L+
BR-
-R -Q
DC 24 V

Figure 5-59 Brake current IBR > 2 A DC
Protective circuit for the interface relay is not required because this function exists in the
Motor Module. A protective circuit, however, must be provided for the brake.
Supply voltage not 24 VDC.
BR+
-K
BR-
-F
N
1 AC 230 V 50 Hz
Motor
Module
-Q -R
L

Figure 5-60 Supply voltage not 24 VDC.
Protective circuit of the brake coil required. For the choice of the protective circuit, ensure
that the demagnetization of the brake is achieved fast. This is performed, for example, with
varistors for an AC supply power (also refer to the motors configuring guide).
5.14 Brake Control
For the brake control, a differentiation is made between:
Conventional brake control and
Safe brake control
Connection of the Components
5.14 Brake Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 211
The control command to open or close the holding brake is transferred directly to the Motor
Module over the DRIVE-CLiQ from the Control Unit that logically links and monitors the
signals with the system-internal execution sequences. The Motor Module then performs the
action and controls the output for the holding brake appropriately.
Conventional brake control
The exact execution control is described in the SINAMICS S [27012704] List Manual. For
example, the p1215, p1219, p1224 and p0855 parameters can be used to configure the
operation of the holding brake.
The control (open/close) of the holding brake is differentiated as follows:
Opening of the holding brake after pulse enable (e.g. using ON/OFF1)
Immediate close of the holding brake after a successful pulse suppression (e.g. using
ON/OFF2)
The brake acts immediately after pulse suppression. It is possible that the holding brake
operates against any motion that occurs. In the long term, this will damage the holding
brake. Consequently, the direct pulse suppression and closing of the holding brake
should be avoided.
Close the holding brake only after braking with pulse suppression (e.g. using
ON/OFF1=1->0)
The holding brake acts when the motor has been brought to a standstill. The pulse
suppression results after a deceleration time.
Unconditional opening of the holding brake using the execution control command and the
p0855 parameter.



Note
For the selection/deselection of the brake, any pending pulse enable will not be further
influenced. Unconditional opening of the holding brake can, for example, lead to
dangerous motions involving hanging axes. Additional safety measures may need to be
adopted.

p1215
<1
0
1
2
BRAKE
LOW
(Brake always closed)
HlGH
(Brake always open)
Drive
software
0: Close brake
1: Release brake
p0855
Brake must be released

Figure 5-61 Operating modes of the conventional brake control
Connection of the Components
5.14 Brake Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
212 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Timing examples:
In all cases listed below, the drive starts the motion with an ON command (BB/OFF1). For
clarification, the closing and opening times are set to 500 ms. The acceleration and
deceleration times are 7 seconds (OFF1) and 4 seconds (OFF3), respectively. The drive will
be accelerated to a speed of 2000 RPM. Important control and status bits (OFF1/2/3, holding
brake status, pulse enable) are also shown.

Speed actual value
Pulse enable
[r0899.11]
Holding brake
[r0899.12]
OFF3
OFF2
ON/OFF1
Start with ON command;
stop with OFF1 command
Speed actual value
Pulse enable
[r0899.11]
Holding brake
[r0899.12]
OFF3
OFF2
ON/OFF1
Start with ON command;
stop with OFF3 command (rapid stop)


Speed actual value
Pulse enable
[r0899.11]
Holding brake
[r0899.12]
OFF3
OFF2
ON/OFF1
Start with ON command;
stop with OFF2 command (coast to standstill)
Speed actual value
Pulse enable
[r0899.11]
Holding brake
[r0899.12]
OFF3
OFF2
ON/OFF1
Start with ON command; stop with OFF1 command and
during braking; stop with OFF3 Command

Connection of the Components
5.14 Brake Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 213

Speed actual value
Pulse enable
[r0899.11]
Holding brake
[r0899.12]
OFF3
OFF2
ON/OFF1
Start with ON command;
stop with OFF1 command;
stop with OFF3;
stop with OFF2


The switch-off behavior in a fault situation will be assigned to the associated fault numbers
and largely corresponds to a stop behavior OFF1/2/3.
Safe Brake Control (SBC)
Note
The "Safe brake control" function is activated only in conjunction with the enable of the "Safe
standstill" (SH) function.
"Safe brake control" does not detect any fault in the holding brake itself, such as a short
circuit of the brake winding, worn out brake, etc.
Wire breakage will be monitored only for each activation of the brake, not, however, during
operation.

The control paths must be provided as two channels for the "Safe brake control". This is
performed with a separate control by the Control Unit and the Motor Module. These units
switch and monitor the brake control independent of each other.
For safety-related functions, it is necessary for the fault detection to perform in a defined
interval a test using forced dynamization. In this case, the switch-off path must be performed
and tested in the two monitoring channels at least once within a defined interval. The "forced
checking procedure" cycle must be controlled externally and mechanically in the appropriate
manner by means, for example, of a brief interruption to the two "Safe standstill" (SH) inputs
on the Control Unit and on the Motor Module.
Connection of the Components
5.14 Brake Control
Guidelines for machine configuration
214 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
The dynamization is also performed:
For each brake control with "open holding brake" and "close holding brake"
For selection of the "Safe standstill" function



Note
The monitoring and the forced checking procedure of the brake outlet is possible only
when the brake is connected directly and not using a coupling relay to the connection
terminals! The p9602 and p9802 parameters can be used to specify the control operation.
The "Safe brake control" is performed independent of the setting in p1215. A "Safe brake
initiation" always has priority over the conventional brake control.

When the "Safe standstill" function is selected, an internal OFF2 command will be issued
and the holding brake closed immediately.
p1215
&
0
1
2
0
1
LOW
(Brake always closed)
HlGH
(Brake always open)
HlGH
(no safe brake control)
SAFETY software
(SH or safety fault)
Drive software
Safety parameters (safe brake control)
p9602 Control Unit
p9802 Motor Module
0: Close brake
1: Release brake
BRAKE

Figure 5-62 Operating modes of the safe brake control
Connection of the Components
5.15 Voltage Protection Module (VPM), external
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 215
5.15 Voltage Protection Module (VPM), external
General information
The external Voltage Protection Module (VPM) is used for the 1FE1 and 2SP1 motors and
for motors with an electromagnetic force (EMF) of 800 V to 2,000 V to limit the DC link
voltage at the converter in a fault situation.
If the line voltage fails when the motor is running at maximum speed, or as consequence the
pulses at the converter are cleared, the motor returns high-voltage energy to the DC link.
The Voltage Protection Module detects an excessive DC link voltage (> 800 V) and short-
circuits the three motor supply cables. The energy stored in the motor is converted into heat
by the short circuit between the motor supply cables.
Integration
The installation must be performed in accordance with the VPM 120 or VPM 200
connection diagram.
Above and below the device, clearance spaces of approx. 200 mm must be provided for
the cable routing.
Any installation position is possible.
No switching elements may be added to the U, V, W connection cables between the
drive, VPM and motor!
The air intake temperature measured 10 mm below the device must not exceed 55 C.

CAUTION

In the event of non-compliance and if the limit values specified in the "technical data"
are exceeded (see VPM operating instructions), there is a danger of device overloading,
irreparable damage to the device, and impairment of electrical safety.

NOTICE

The device must be equipped with a safety switching unit and may be used only for its
proper purpose. Other applications, e.g. armature short circuits in operation, are not
permissible.
The warning notices attached to the device must be observed.

Connection of the Components
5.15 Voltage Protection Module (VPM), external
Guidelines for machine configuration
216 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Operation with VPM is possible only in conjunction with SINAMICS, SIMODRIVE 611 digital,
SIMODRIVE 611 universal HR/HRS, and 1FE1/2SP1 motors. When the external VPM is
used, shielded 6FX8 motor supply cables are required.

NOTICE
Depending on the size of the type used, the conditions associated with the relevant VPM
operating instructions must be observed.
VPM 120, order No.: A5E00302281B
VPM 120 PG, order No.: A5E01017613A
VPM 200, order No.: A5E00302261B
VPM 200 PG, order No.: A5E01018358A
VPM 200 DYN, order No.: A5E00777655A

WARNING
Under fault conditions, voltages up to 2 kV can occur at cables that are cut or damaged.
Depending on the speed of the motors, the motor terminal voltage of the 1FE1 motors can
attain values as high as 2 kV.

Connection of the Components
5.15 Voltage Protection Module (VPM), external
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 217
Connection example for VPM 120
Motor Module
SlNAMlCS S120
NCU 7x0
M
Motor 1FE1
<1>
<2>
Voltage Protection
Module 120
Dl/DO 14 10
X132
L+
-X3
U2/V2/W2/PE
U3/V3/W3/PE
U4/V4/W4/PE
<2>
<2>
<1>
NX1x
Dl/DO 11 11
X122
L+
No further components may be included between the Motor Module and the
Voltage Protection Module.
Depending on whether the associated axis runs under an NCU or NX, the -X3
signal contact for the VPM must be wired on the NCU or NX assigned to the
drive. A separate digital input must be provided for each VPM. These digital
inputs must be parameterized manually.
Length of cable
max. 1.5 m
Length of cable
max. 50 m
lnterconnect OFF2 for
SERVO, VECTOR drive object
Bl: p0845 = 722.14
lnterconnect OFF2 for the
SERVO, VECTOR drive object
Bl: p0845 = 722.11

Figure 5-63 Connection of Voltage Protection Module VPM 120
Signaling contact X3
The X3 signaling contact closes after t > 2 min or after resetting the temperature switch.
8
on
> 55 C
8
off
< 60 C
> 2 min
8

Figure 5-64 Signaling contact X3 of the Voltage Protection Module
Connection of the Components
5.15 Voltage Protection Module (VPM), external
Guidelines for machine configuration
218 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

WARNING
Measures must be adopted to prevent the drive from starting automatically.

If the external VPM is being used, the following parameter needs to be set on the NCU or
NX:
p0643[0...n]
Description:
Setting overvoltage protection for synchronous motors in field weakening mode
Value:
0: No action
1: Voltage Protection Module (VPM)
Additional references
For more detailed information on the external Voltage Protection Module, please refer to the
following:
/GH2/SINAMICS S120/, Booksize Power Units, Motor Side Power Components, VPM/

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 219
Signal Interconnection
6

Introduction
The drive wizard assigns functions to NCU and NX terminals (see Section NCU 7x0 and
NX1x Terminal Assignment (Page 69)). This section discusses the interconnection of the
terminals between the SINUMERIK and SINAMICS S120 components.
The used terminals must be controlled from a higher-level controller or PLC. As far as safety
functions are concerned, the NCU and NX or the Motor Modules must be controlled in
accordance with the required safety categories (see Section Safety Integrated (Page 83)).
For the applications
The following pages show the signal interconnection for typical SINUMERIK /
SINAMICS S120 applications.
The following table shows the characteristics of the individual applications. The listed
applications show only a few possiblities. If necessary, the control must be adapted to the
requirements of the associated application.
Table 6- 1 Applications
Safety Line contactor Application Infeed
Drive-
integrated
1)

System/drive-
integrated
2)

Without safety
3)

With safety
4)

1 With DRIVE-CLiQ: No No No No
2 With DRIVE-CLiQ: No No Yes No
3 Without DRIVE-CLiQ: No No Yes No
4 With DRIVE-CLiQ: Yes No No Yes
5 Without DRIVE-CLiQ: Yes No No Yes
6 With DRIVE-CLiQ: No Yes No No
7 Without DRIVE-CLiQ: No Yes No No

1) Safety realized with external safety controller (e.g. 3TK28 safety relay or SIMATIC S7 F control) using the SINAMICS
SH/SBC function
2) Safety realized with the system/drive-integrated safety function of the SINUMERIK 840D sl
3) Line contactor provided, however, without safe control
4) Line contactor provided, with safe control
Signal Interconnection
6.1 Application 1
Guidelines for machine configuration
220 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
6.1 Application 1
X122 X132
1
2
7
8
10
4 5 (M)
PLC
DO
DO
M
Dl
<1>
NCU 7x0
EP
L+
ON/OFF 1
lnfeed
2. OFF3
Axes
Can be connected directly to a 24 VDC supply,
if control via PLC not required
<1>
lnfeed
operation
lnfeed
Ready to start
lnfeed
with
DRlVE-CLiQ

Figure 6-1 Infeed with DRIVE-CLiQ (SLM/ALM 16 kW to 120 kW)
Signal Interconnection
6.1 Application 1
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 221
Interconnection of the PLC input signals
"Infeed ready" (NCU terminal X132.8)
The infeed is ready for 1 signal.
Interconnection of the PLC output signals
"ON/OFF1" of the infeed (NCU terminal X122.1)
The 0/1 edge activates the infeed. Interlocking with "infeed ready" (NCU terminal X132.8)
is desirable.
"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NCU. The additional interconnection to
the individual NX components (NX terminal X122.2) means these axes also receive the
"2. OFF3" signal. The enable does not need to be carried out via a PLC. A fixed
protective circuit with 24 VDC is also possible.
Interconnection between NCU and NX components
After activating the infeed, given correct operation, the "Infeed operation" state will be
attained and all axes (BI: p0864) will be enabled. This status must also be forwarded to
the NX components (NCU terminal X132.7 and NX terminal: X122.1).
Signal Interconnection
6.2 Application 2
Guidelines for machine configuration
222 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
6.2 Application 2
X122 X132
1
2
7
8
10
4
PLC NCU 7x0
DO
DO
Dl
M
5 (M)
EP
K1
L+
<1>
lnfeed
with
DRlVE-CLiQ
Some terminal assignments made via
macro
E.g. interlocking with ON/OFF1 infeed (X122.1)
<1> Can be connected directly to a 24 VDC supply,
if control via PLC not required
Line contactor
Feedback
Control
Line contactor
Operation
lnfeed ON/OFF1
lnfeed
2. OFF3 axes
Ready to start
lnfeed
L+
M
K1

Figure 6-2 Infeed with DRIVE-CLiQ (SLM/ALM 16 kW to 120 kW) and line contactor without safe control
Interconnection of the PLC input signals
"Infeed ready" (NCU terminal X132.8)
The infeed is ready for 1 signal.
Signal Interconnection
6.2 Application 2
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 223
Interconnection of the PLC output signals
"ON/OFF1" of the infeed (NCU terminal X122.1)
The 0/1 edge activates the infeed. Interlocking with "infeed ready" (NCU terminal X132.8)
is desirable.
"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NCU. The additional interconnection to
the individual NX components (NX terminal X122.2) means these axes also receive the
"2. OFF3" signal. The enable does not need to be carried out via a PLC. A fixed
protective circuit with 24 V DC is also possible.
Interconnection between NCU and NX components
After activating the infeed, given correct operation, the "Infeed operation" state will be
attained and all axes (BI: p0864) will be enabled. This status must also be forwarded to
the NX components (NCU terminal X132.7 and NX terminal: X122.1).
Line contactor control
The line contactor is controlled via the "Line contactor control" function (NCU terminal
X132.10). The signal state for the line contactor (form A contact) can be returned (NCU
terminal X132.4). This control ensures that the line contactor always switches in a defined
manner and so prevents overloading or damaging the line contactor and/or the infeed.

NOTICE

The described control is conducted with standard signals with regard to the safety
engineering. If the appropriate safety categories must be satisfied, the control must be
conducted in accordance with the required safety categories using a safety controller.

Signal Interconnection
6.3 Application 3
Guidelines for machine configuration
224 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
6.3 Application 3
X122 X132
1
2
5 (M)
PLC
EP
L+
NCU 7x0
DO
DO
DO
Dl
Dl
X21.1
X21.2
X22.3
Dl
M
Dl
DO
<3>
<4>
<5>
<1>
<2>
PLC
PLC
DO
M
7
8
10
9
Smart Line
Module
5/10 kW
Can be connected directly to a 24 VDC supply, if control via PLC not
required
<1>
<2>
<3>
lnfeed prewarning <4>
lnfeed reset <5>
2. OFF3
Axes
lnfeed ready
lnfeed operation

Figure 6-3 Infeed without DRIVE-CLiQ (SLM 5/10 kW); line contactor without safe control
Signal Interconnection
6.3 Application 3
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 225
Interconnection of the PLC input signals
"Infeed Ready" (SLM terminal X21.1)
The infeed is operating for 1 signal.
Interconnection of the PLC output signals
"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NCU. The additional interconnection to
the individual NX components (NX terminal X122.2) means these axes also receive the
"2. OFF3" signal. The enable does not need to be carried out via a PLC. A fixed
protective circuit with 24 V DC is also possible.
Interconnection of the NCU 7x0 component
"Infeed Ready" (connection between SLM terminal X21.1 and NCU terminal X122.1)
After activating the infeed, given correct operation, the "Infeed operation" state will be
attained and all axes (BI: p0864) will be enabled. This status must also be forwarded to
the NX components (NX terminal: X122.1).
The Smart Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not switched on/off using a Drive
Object of the NCU. The control is performed exclusively via terminals on the Smart Line
Module, for example, from a PLC or hardware controller.
Line contactor control
The line contactor must be controlled from an external PLC or hardware controller. Internal
line contactor control using a Drive Object by the NCU is not possible.
The following activation/deactivation conditions must be observed for the control (also see
the "Line Contactor Control" chapter):
PLC input signal
"Line contactor feedback"
Query the switching state of the line contactor
Signal Interconnection
6.3 Application 3
Guidelines for machine configuration
226 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
PLC output signal
"Line contactor control"
Control the line contactor taking into consideration the activation/deactivation condition

CAUTION

If the named conditions are not observed, the line contactor and the infeed can be
damaged.

NOTICE

The described control is conducted with standard signals with regard to the safety
engineering. If the appropriate safety categories must be satisfied, the control must be
conducted in accordance with the required safety categories using a safety controller.

Smart Line Module operation
The Smart Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not switched on/off using a Drive
Object of the NCU. The control is performed exclusively via terminals on the Smart Line
Module, for example, from a PLC or hardware controller.
Interconnection of the PLC input signals
"Infeed Ready" (SLM terminal X21.1)
Infeed operational
"Infeed PreWarning" (SLM terminal X21.2)
Overtemperature advance warning
Interconnection of the PLC output signals
"Infeed Reset" (SLM terminal X22.3)
Reset of a pending fault
Signal Interconnection
6.4 Application 4
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 227
6.4 Application 4
X122 X132
X122
1
2
3
7
10
4
8
4
7
8
1
2
3
4
7
8
ON/OFF1
lnfeed
1
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
2
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
3
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
4
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
PLC PLC
L+
L+ L+
M
1
2
3
4
NCU 7x0 NX 1x
DO Dl 0
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl 0
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
lN
lN
OUT
lN
lN
OUT
OUT
DO
Dl
Dl
DO
Dl
OUT
OUT
lN
lN
Dl/DO12
Dl/DO13
Dl/DO14
Dl/DO8
Dl/DO9
Dl/DO8
Dl/DO9
Safety
control
<5>
Safety
control
<5>
Safety
control
<5>
2. OFF3
Axes
Unsafe
signals
from the
safety
controller
Unsafe
signals
from the
safety
controller
ON/OFF1
lnfeed
2. OFF3
Axes
2. OFF3
Axes
SH / SBC
Group 1
SH / SBC
Group 2
SH / SBC
Group 1
SH / SBC
Group 2
Feedback
signal
SH / SBC
Group 2
Feedback
signal
SH / SBC
Group 1
Feedback
signal
SH / SBC
Group 2
lnfeed
with
DRlVE-CLiQ
lnfeed ready
<2> Line contactor control <1> lnfeed operation
<5> 3TK28 safety relay or SlMATlC S7 F controller
<3> Line contactor feedback <4> Bl: p0864 = 722.0
<2>
<4>
<1>
<3>
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
lnfeed operation
Feedback
signal
SH / SBC
Group 1
Active
Active
Active
Active

Figure 6-4 Infeed with DRIVE-CLiQ (SLM/ALM 16 kW to 120 kW), use of a drive-integrated SH/SBC safety function by
SINAMICS and line contactor with safe control
Signal Interconnection
6.4 Application 4
Guidelines for machine configuration
228 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Interconnection of the PLC input signals
"Infeed ready" (NCU terminal X132.8)
The infeed is ready for 1 signal.
Interconnection of the PLC output signals
NOTICE
To achieve safe control of the line contactor and the drive-integrated SH/SBC safety
function by SINAMICS, the control signals must be provided by a safety relay (3TK28) or a
SIMATIC F controller. This is the only way to ensure that disconnection is achieved in
accordance with the required safety categories.

"ON/OFF1" of the infeed (NCU terminal X122.1)
The 0/1 edge activates the infeed. Interlocking with "infeed ready" (NCU terminal X132.8)
is desirable.



Note
The "ON/OFF1" signal must also be locked by the safety controller.

"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NCU. The "2. OFF3" must be
interconnected to the NX components provided (NX terminal X122.2). This means that
the axes downstream from the NX also receive the enable.



Note
The "2. OFF3" signal must also be locked by the safety controller.

Interconnection between the safety controller and the NCU and NX components
The SH/SBC function must be controlled by the safety controller using two channels.
The first channel goes to the NCU/NX.
The second channel goes to the Motor Module.
If required, appropriate groups (1/2) can be formed that must be controlled depending on
the switching condition. The feedback of the SH/SBC function must be evaluated in the
safety controller.
Signal Interconnection
6.4 Application 4
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 229
Interconnection between NCU and NX components
After activating the infeed, given correct operation, the "Infeed operation" state will be
attained and all axes (BI: p0864) will be enabled. This status must also be forwarded to
the NX components (NCU terminal X132.7 and NX terminal X122.1).
Line contactor control
Note
The SINAMICS ("Safe Standstill" and "Safe Brake Control") safety functions satisfy the
requirement for safety integrity level 2 (SIL2) in accordance with IEC 61508. This
corresponds to the control category 3 in accordance with DIN EN 954-1 and DIN VDE 0801.
The "Safe Standstill" function prevents an unwanted start-up from standstill of the motor
connected to the drive unit.
The need for a line contactor for the safe separation of the energy supply to the motor is no
longer assured.

The line contactor is controlled via the "Line contactor control" function (NCU terminal
X132.10). The signal state for the line contactor (form A contact) can be returned (NCU
terminal X132 4). This control ensures that the line contactor always switches in a defined
manner and so prevents overloading or damaging the line contactor and/or the infeed.

NOTICE

The described control must be locked by the safety controller in accordance with the
required safety category.

Signal Interconnection
6.5 Application 5
Guidelines for machine configuration
230 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
6.5 Application 5
5
5
X122 X132
X122
1
2
3
7
10
4
8
4
7
8
1
2
3
4
7
8
PLC
PLC
1
2
3
4
NCU 7x0 NX 1x
Dl 0
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl 0
Dl1
Dl2
Dl3
Dl4
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
lN
lN
OUT
OUT
DO
DO
Dl
Dl
Dl
Dl
DO
Dl
OUT
OUT
lN
lN
EP
L+
DO
Dl DO
Dl
X21.1
X21.2 X22.3
<2>
<4>
<5>
PLC
DO
PLC
lN
lN
lN
lN
lN
lN
OUT
<1>
<1>
1
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
2
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
3
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
4
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
Dl/DO13
Dl/DO14
Dl/DO12
Dl/DO8
Dl/DO9
Dl/DO8
Dl/DO9
Safety
Controller
<6>
Safety
Controller
<6>
2. OFF3
Axes
Unsafe
signals
from the
safety
controller
Unsafe
signals
from the
safety
controller
ON/OFF1
lnfeed
2. OFF3
Axes
2. OFF3
Axes
lnfeed
Ready
SH / SBC
Group 1
lnfeed
Operation
Safety controller (3TK28 safety relay or a SlMATlC S7 F
controller)
lnfeed ready
SH / SBC
Group 2
SH / SBC
Group 1
SH / SBC
Group 2
Feedback
signal
SH / SBC
Group 1
Active
Feedback
signal
SH / SBC
Group 2
Feedback
signal
SH / SBC
Group 1
Active
Feedback
signal
SH / SBC
Group 2
Active
<3>
Smart Line
Module
5/10 kW
<3> Bl: p0864 = 722.0
<4> lnfeed prewarning
<5> lnfeed reset
<6> 3TK28 safety relay or a SlMATlC S7 F controller
BlCO interconnection
must be activated by
the user
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
<1>
<2>
Active
Figure 6-5 Infeed without DRIVE-CLiQ (SLM 5 kW to 10 kW), use of a drive-integrated SH/SBC safety function by
SINAMICS and line contactor with safe control
Signal Interconnection
6.5 Application 5
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 231
Interconnection of the PLC input signals
"Infeed Ready" (SLM terminal X21.1)
The infeed is operating for 1 signal.
Interconnection of the PLC output signals
NOTICE
To achieve safe control of the line contactor and the drive-integrated SH/SBC safety
function by SINAMICS, the control signals must be provided by a safety relay (3TK28) or a
SIMATIC F controller. This is the only way to ensure that disconnection is achieved in
accordance with the required safety categories.

"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NCU. The "2. OFF3" must be
interconnected to the NX components provided (NX terminal X122.2). This means that
the axes downstream from the NX also receive the enable.



Note
The "2. OFF3" signal must also be locked by the safety controller.

Interconnection between the safety controller and the NCU and NX components
The SH/SBC function must be controlled by the safety controller using two channels.
The first channel goes to the NCU/NX.
The second channel goes to the Motor Module.
If required, appropriate groups (1/2) can be formed that must be controlled depending on
the switching condition. The feedback of the SH/SBC function must be evaluated in the
safety controller.
Signal Interconnection
6.5 Application 5
Guidelines for machine configuration
232 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Interconnection of the NCU 7x0 component
"Infeed Ready" (connection between SLM terminal X21.1 and NCU terminal X122.1)
After activating the infeed, given correct operation, the "Infeed operation" state will be
attained and all axes (BI: p0864) will be enabled. This status must also be forwarded to
the NX components (NX terminal: X122.1).
The Smart Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not switched on/off using a Drive
Object of the NCU. The control is performed exclusively via terminals on the Smart Line
Module, for example, from a PLC or hardware controller.



Note
The "Infeed Ready" signal must also be locked by the safety controller.

Line contactor control
Note
The SINAMICS ("Safe Standstill" and "Safe Brake Control") safety functions satisfy the
requirement for safety integrity level 2 (SIL2) in accordance with IEC 61508. This
corresponds to the control category 3 in accordance with DIN EN 954-1 and DIN VDE 0801.
The "Safe Standstill" function prevents an unwanted start-up from standstill of the motor
connected to the drive unit.
The need for a line contactor for the safe separation of the energy supply to the motor is no
longer assured.

The line contactor must be controlled from an external PLC or hardware controller. Internal
line contactor control using a Drive Object by the NCU is not possible.
The following activation/deactivation conditions must be observed for the control (also see
the "Line Contactor Control" chapter):
PLC input signal
"Line contactor feedback"
Query the switching state of the line contactor
Signal Interconnection
6.5 Application 5
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 233
PLC output signal
"Line contactor control"
Control the line contactor taking into consideration the activation/deactivation condition

CAUTION

If the named conditions are not observed, the line contactor and the infeed can be
damaged.

NOTICE

The described control must be locked by the safety controller in accordance with the
required safety category.

Smart Line Module operation
The Smart Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not switched on/off using a Drive
Object of the NCU. The control is performed exclusively via terminals on the Smart Line
Module, for example, from a PLC or hardware controller.
Interconnection of the PLC input signals
"Infeed Ready" (SLM terminal X21.1)
Infeed operational
"Infeed PreWarning" (SLM terminal X21.2)
Overtemperature advance warning
Interconnection of the PLC output signals
"Infeed Reset" (SLM terminal X22.3)
Reset of a pending fault
Signal Interconnection
6.6 Application 6
Guidelines for machine configuration
234 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
6.6 Application 6
DRlVE-CLiQ
X122 X132
1
2
3
7
8
10
4
7
8
L+
NX 1x
Dl 0
Dl 1
Dl 2
Dl 3
4
Dl 7
NCU 7x0
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
EP
L+
Dl/DO 14
Dl/DO 13
Dl/DO 12
Dl/DO 8
Dl/DO 9
2. OFF3
Axes
lnfeed
Ready to start
ON/OFF1
lnfeed
lnfeed
with
DRlVE-CLiQ

Figure 6-6 Infeed with DRIVE-CLiQ (SLM/ALM 16 kW to 120 kW); use of the SINUMERIK system/drive-integrated safety
function
Signal Interconnection
6.6 Application 6
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 235
Interconnection to the NCU component
"Infeed ready" (NCU terminal X132.8)
The infeed is ready for 1 signal.
"ON/OFF1 Line Module" (NCU terminal X122.1)
The 0/1 edge activates the infeed. The "Infeed Ready" signal (NCU terminal X132.8) is
used for the control.
"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NCU. The input is hard-wired with the
24 VDC.
Interconnection to the NX component
"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NX. The input is hard-wired with the 24
V DC.
Interconnection between NCU and NX components
After activating the infeed, given correct operation, the "Infeed operation" state will be
attained and all axes (BI: p0864) will be enabled. This status must also be forwarded to
the NX components (NCU terminal X132.7 and NX terminal: X122.1).
Operation of the infeed
After the NCU power up, the infeed is activated automatically.
Realization of the safety control
The system/drive-integrated safety function performs this task. External safety relays or
safety controllers are thus no longer required. The terminal control of the SH/SBC function
via NCU/NX and Motor Modules is no longer essential because this function is controlled by
the system.
The SINAMICS ("Safe Standstill" and "Safe Brake Control") safety functions satisfy the
requirement for safety integrity level 2 (SIL2) in accordance with IEC 61508. This
corresponds to the control category 3 in accordance with DIN EN 954-1 and DIN VDE 0801.
The "Safe Standstill" function prevents an unwanted start-up from standstill of the motor
connected to the drive unit.
The need for a line contactor for the safe separation of the energy supply to the motor is no
longer assured.

NOTICE
When servicing work is performed, power must be removed and, if necessary, the
disconnector unit must be turned off.

Signal Interconnection
6.7 Application 7
Guidelines for machine configuration
236 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
6.7 Application 7
X122 X132
X122
4
2
1
2
EP
L+
NX 1x
Dl0
Dl1
NCU 7x0
L+
DO
X21.1
1
7
8
3
8
10
4
7
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
EP
EP
L+
DO
X21.2
Dl
X22.3
DO
Dl
Dl
PLC
<2>
<1>
2. OFF3
Axes
Smart Line
Module
5/10 kW
lnfeed
Operation
lnfeed
Operation
2. OFF3
Axes
X122.1 NX terminal
lnfeed
Ready
<1> lnfeed prewarning
<2> lnfeed reset

Figure 6-7 Infeed without DRIVE-CLiQ (SLM 5/10 kW); use of the SINUMERIK system/drive-integrated safety function
Signal Interconnection
6.7 Application 7
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 237
Interconnection of the NCU 7x0 component
"Infeed Ready" (connection between SLM terminal X21.1 and NCU terminal X122.1)
After activating the infeed, given correct operation, the "Infeed operation" state will be
attained and all axes (BI: p0864) will be enabled. This status must also be forwarded to
the NX components (NX terminal: X122.1).
"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NCU. The input is hard-wired with the
24 V DC.
Interconnection to the NX component
"2. OFF3" for all axes (NCU terminal X122.2)
The "2. OFF3" will be forwarded to all axes of the NX. The input is hard-wired with the 24
V DC.
Smart Line Module operation
The Smart Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not switched on/off using a Drive
Object of the NCU. The control is performed exclusively via terminals on the Smart Line
Module, for example, from a PLC or hardware controller.
Interconnection of the PLC input signals
"Infeed Ready" (SLM terminal X21.1)
Infeed operational
"Infeed PreWarning" (SLM terminal X21.2)
Overtemperature advance warning
Interconnection of the PLC output signals
"Infeed Reset" (SLM terminal X22.3)
Reset of a pending fault
Realization of the safety control
The system/drive-integrated safety function that is an integrated part of the system performs
this task. External safety relays or safety controllers are thus no longer required. The
terminal control of the SH/SBC function via NCU/NX and Motor Modules is no longer
essential because this function is controlled by the system.
The SINAMICS ("Safe Standstill" and "Safe Brake Control") safety functions satisfy the
requirement for safety integrity level 2 (SIL2) in accordance with IEC 61508. This
corresponds to the control category 3 in accordance with DIN EN 954-1 and DIN VDE 0801.
The "Safe Standstill" function prevents an unwanted start-up from standstill of the motor
connected to the drive unit.
The need for a line contactor for the safe separation of the energy supply to the motor is no
longer assured.
When servicing work is performed, power must be removed and, if necessary, the
disconnector unit must be turned off.
Signal Interconnection
6.7 Application 7
Guidelines for machine configuration
238 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 239
Typical circuit diagrams
7
7.1 Connection Notes, Technical Data, Device Selection
The associated connection notes and technical data from the current operating and
configuring guides, and catalogs and application manuals must be used for the configuring of
the drive components, safety switching devices, contactors, etc., listed in the typical circuit
diagrams.
Selection of the switching devices
3TK SIGUARD safety combinations
Typical circuit diagrams as well as the descriptions of functions are included in the
"Safety Integrated" Application Examples, order no.: 6ZB5000-0AA01-0BA0.
Positive-action contacts
SIRIUS 3RT, 3RH, -0BA1 and 3TH power and auxiliary contactors must be chosen with
positive-action auxiliary contacts in accordance with ZH1/457, IEC 60947-5-1.
Contact reliability
The auxiliary switches, switching contacts of the switching devices and the main power
switch must be suitable for the reliable switching of breaking currents 17 V, 5 mA.
Surge suppression
For EMC and function reliability reasons, all switching devices, coils, inductances, brakes,
etc., must be generally connected using RC elements, varistors, diodes or diodes
combinations to counter switching overvoltages, provided such units are not already
integrated in the devices.
This is also the case for switching devices controlled by PLC outputs.




Note
The selection of the surge suppression affects the switch-off delay of the
devices. This influence must also be taken into account for the configuring.
For the selection and the technical data, see the LV10 (Low-voltage Switchgear) catalog.

Installation and execution specifications for control cabinets
For the form of the control cabinets for the installation of drive components, the following
important specifications must be observed when selecting:
DIN EN 60439-1 (VDE 0660 Part 500), low-voltage switchgear combination
DIN EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), electrical equipment for machines, safety
DIN VDE 0106 Part 100, protection against electrical shock
Typical circuit diagrams
7.2 Functional description of the typical circuit diagrams
Guidelines for machine configuration
240 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
EMC regulations (89/336 EEC) and low-voltage regulations (73/23/EEC)
The associated environmental requirements (e.g. housing degree of protection IP..,
installation altitude, ambient temperature, etc.)
7.2 Functional description of the typical circuit diagrams
The following section uses typical circuit diagrams to illustrate and describe in detail the
individual applications and functions of the drive control.
First, the connection of the system to the line voltage and the the 24 VDC power supply is
discussed. Simple control connections using the PROFIBUS interface or digital interface to a
higher-level PLC are also described. Building on the general switching notes, safety-oriented
functions are described in additional typical circuit diagrams. The PLC controller handles the
coordinated execution of the drive control, but does not have any safety-related function.
Layout of the typical circuit diagrams
Circuit manual group =1
Line infeed and creation of the 24 VDC power supply
Circuit manual group =2
Drive group with line contactor, Active Line Module, without safety functions
Circuit manual group =3
Drive group without line contactor, Smart Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ connection,
without safety functions, motor protection with Voltage Protection Module (VPM).
Circuit manual group =4
Activate/deactivate/stop drives or drive group in an emergency (emergency stop) using
drive-integrated safety function
Circuit manual group =5
Drives start / stop / safe standstill (axis-specific) using drive-integrated safety function
Circuit manual group =6
Drives or drive group on/off; stop in an emergency (emergency stop); safety using drive-
integrated safety function of the SINUMERIK 840D sl; ET 200S distributed peripherals.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.2 Functional description of the typical circuit diagrams
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 241
The following section does not further discuss the setpoint and actual value interface and the
user's machine control. This means they are shown only in general form.

Note
For machines that must be placed in a lower category (e.g. 1 or 2 in accordance with EN
9541) based on the danger analysis / risk evaluation or type C standard, the control can in
general be derived from the provided typical circuit diagrams and constructed as a simpler,
single channel system structure!
This is also true for subareas/subfunctions of a machine, which, for example, in accordance
with the type C standards, must be constructed with a different lower or higher control
category than that of the base machine. For example, after the danger analysis / risk
evaluation it can also be necessary that a hydraulic/pneumatic clamping unit must be
controlled in the work area using a two-handed control device in accordance with category 4.

Note
All subsequent typical circuit diagrams do not contain any safety-relevant or other possible
machine-specific essential interlocks with the user-provided machine control.

Typical circuit diagrams
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Guidelines for machine configuration
242 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Line infeed and creation of the 24 VDC power supply
Line infeed including the main power switch
Power outlets including fuses for the Line Modules
24 VDC power supply for the drive group
24 VDC power supply for other consumers
Selection of equipment:

=1.-Q11 Disconnector unit with leading auxiliary switch for switching off
The disconnector unit disconnects the electrical equipment from the
energy supply. The disconnector unit should not be switched off while
the machine is running.
For selection, see the Manual and the LV10/NC61 catalog. The leading
auxiliary switch is required for enabling the Line Module.

=1.-F23
=1.-Q24
=1.-Q26
=1.-Q27
Protection against overcurrent for the Line Module
Depending on the requirement, either a fuse or a miniature circuit
breaker can be used. The associated specifications of the safety
characteristics must be observed.
For assignment, see the Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual; for
selection, see NC61 catalog

=2.-Q15 Line contactor
Optionally, a line contactor can be used; see also Section Line Contactor
Control (Page 97) or Safety Integrated (Page 83); for selection, see
NC61 catalog

=1.-V23
=1.-V24
=1.-V27

Line filter
See the Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual; for selection, see
NC61 catalog
=1.-R23
=1.-R24
=1.-R26
=1.-R27
Line reactor
See the Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual; for selection, see
NC61 catalog
Typical circuit diagrams
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 243
=1.-T31
=1.-T33
=1.-T36
SITOP power 24 VDC power supply for SINAMICS components
Separate power supply (24 VDC, 20 A) for the power supply busbar of
the drive group and for external components. The corresponding power
consumptions of the individual SINAMICS components must be taken
into consideration for the layout. The maximum total current of the power
supply busbar is 20 A DC.
See Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual
See KT10.1 catalog

=1.-T41 SITOP power 24 VDC power supply for auxiliary components
Separate power supply (24 VDC) for the controller and auxiliary
components, such as valves, contactors, etc.
See Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual
See KT10.1 catalog

=1.-Q31
=1.-Q33
=1.-Q36
=1.-Q41

Protection of the supply units
See Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual
See KT10.1 catalog
=1.-F42...-F48
=1.-F52-F58
=1.-F62-F64
Protection of the individual circuits
The potential assignment of the circuits is chosen freely. The maximum
permitted values in accordance with details supplied by the manufacturer
must be observed for the protection of the individual components. The
overload and short-circuit protection must also be observed.
See Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual
See KT10.1 catalog

Line infeed and power supply of the automation system is provided as shown in the following
typical circuit diagrams.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Guidelines for machine configuration
244 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Circuit manual group examples = 1
2
)
2
)
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
3 3
4 5
3 4
= 3 / 5 . 7 4 6P
r
io
r

t
o

m
a
in
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
,

s
e
r
v
ic
in
g

a
n
d

c
le
a
n
in
g

w
o
r
k

o
n

t
h
e

m
a
c
h
in
e
,

t
h
e

e
n
e
r
g
y

s
u
p
p
ly

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
a
f
e
ly

e
le
c
t
r
ic
a
lly

is
o
la
t
e
d
.

J
u
s
t

s
w
it
c
h
in
g

o
f
f

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

s
u
f
f
ic
e

h
e
r
e
!


1
)

S
p
e
c
if
y

t
h
e

m
a
x
.

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n
!
2
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
3
)

T
h
e

m
a
in

p
o
w
e
r

s
w
it
c
h

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
e
le
c
t
e
d

f
o
r

t
h
e

e
le
c
t
r
ic
a
l
e
q
u
ip
m
e
n
t

in

a
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t

w
it
h

t
h
e

r
e
q
u
ir
e
m
e
n
t
s
,

f
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
le
,

E
N
5
6
0
2
0
4
-
1
,

S
e
c
t
io
n

5
.
3
.

T
h
e

a
s
s
o
c
ia
t
e
d

t
e
c
h
n
ic
a
l
d
a
t
a

m
u
s
t

b
e

o
b
s
e
r
v
e
d

f
o
r

t
h
e

s
e
le
c
t
io
n
.

S
e
le
c
t
io
n

b
a
s
e
d

o
n

t
h
e

t
o
t
a
l
lo
a
d
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

p
la
n
t
.
f
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
le
,

f
o
r

a
u
x
ilia
r
ie
s
,

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
f
a
n
s
,

e
t
c
.
P
o
w
e
r

l
i
n
e

i
n
f
e
e
d
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
P
e
r
m
it
t
e
d

lin
e

v
o
lt
a
g
e

/

lin
e

f
o
r
m
,

s
e
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
in
f
e
e
d

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n
m
a
x
.

.
.
.
A
A
ll
c
a
b
le
s

m
a
r
k
e
d

#

m
u
s
t

b
e

la
id

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

a
n
d

g
r
o
u
n
d
-
f
a
u
lt

r
e
s
is
t
a
n
t
.
L
in
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
w
it
c
h
D
e
t
a
ils
,

s
e
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l
A
u
x
ilia
r
y

s
w
it
c
h
in
g

e
le
m
e
n
t

le
a
d
in
g

in

t
h
e

s
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

d
ir
e
c
t
io
n

<

1
0
m
s
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m

Figure 7-1 Circuit Manual Group =1, Page 1
Typical circuit diagrams
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 245
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p
s

d
e
r
i
v
a
t
i
o
n
s
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

d
i
a
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
2
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
4
)

T
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

is

u
s
e
d

o
n
ly

f
o
r

t
h
e

e
le
c
t
r
ic
a
l
is
o
la
t
io
n
.

T
o

a
c
h
ie
v
e

a

s
a
f
e

d
is
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
io
n

o
f

t
h
e

e
n
e
r
g
y

s
u
p
p
ly

t
o

t
h
e

m
o
t
o
r
,

a
ls
o

r
e
f
e
r

t
o

t
h
e

"
S
a
f
e

S
t
a
n
d
s
t
ill


f
u
n
c
t
io
n
,

t
y
p
ic
a
l
c
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m

=
4
/
=
5
.
6
)

l
f

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

is

u
s
e
d

t
o

t
h
e

r
e
a
liz
e

s
a
f
e
t
y

f
u
n
c
t
io
n
s
,

a
n

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
ia
t
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
m
u
s
t

b
e

p
r
o
v
id
e
d

t
h
a
t

s
a
t
is
f
ie
s

t
h
e

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

s
a
f
e
t
y

c
a
t
e
g
o
r
y
.

R
e
p
r
e
s
e
n
t
a
t
io
n

o
n
ly

a
s

e
le
c
t
r
ic
a
l
is
o
la
t
io
n
.

P
r
io
r

t
o

m
a
in
t
e
n
a
n
c
e
,

s
e
r
v
ic
in
g

a
n
d

c
le
a
n
in
g

w
o
r
k

o
n

t
h
e

m
a
c
h
in
e
,

t
h
e

e
n
e
r
g
y

s
u
p
p
ly

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
a
f
e
ly

e
le
c
t
r
ic
a
lly

is
o
la
t
e
d
.

J
u
s
t

s
w
it
c
h
in
g

o
f
f

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

s
u
f
f
ic
e

h
e
r
e
!
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
p
la
t
e
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
p
la
t
e
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
p
la
t
e
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
p
la
t
e
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
p
la
t
e
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
p
la
t
e
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
p
la
t
e
M
o
u
n
t
in
g
p
la
t
e
L
in
e
L
o
a
d
L
in
e
L
o
a
d
L
in
e
L
o
a
d
L
in
e
L
o
a
d
A
ll
c
a
b
le
s

m
a
r
k
e
d

#

m
u
s
t

b
e

la
id

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

a
n
d

g
r
o
u
n
d
-
f
a
u
lt

r
e
s
is
t
a
n
t
.
L
in
e

f
u
s
e
t
o

p
r
o
t
e
c
t

a
g
a
in
s
t

o
v
e
r
-
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
D
e
t
a
ils
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

3
R
T
.
.
.

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
le
c
t

u
s
in
g

t
h
e

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
ia
t
e

t
e
c
h
n
ic
a
l
d
a
t
a
D
e
t
a
ils
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
l
o
g

C
ir
c
u
it
-
b
r
e
a
k
e
r
t
o

p
r
o
t
e
c
t

a
g
a
in
s
t

o
v
e
r
-
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
D
e
t
a
ils
,

s
e
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l
3
R
T
.
.
.

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
e
le
c
t

u
s
in
g

t
h
e

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
ia
t
e

t
e
c
h
n
ic
a
l
d
a
t
a
D
e
t
a
ils
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
l
o
g

L
in
e

c
o
m
m
u
t
a
t
in
g

r
e
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
t
a
ils
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
l
o
g

6
S
L
3
.
.
.

lin
e

f
ilt
e
r

T
h
e

lin
e

f
ilt
e
r
s

a
r
e

s
u
it
a
b
le

o
n
ly

f
o
r

t
h
e

d
ir
e
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
io
n

t
o

t
h
e

T
N

n
e
t
w
o
r
k
D
e
t
a
ils
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
l
o
g


Figure 7-2 Circuit Manual Group =1, Page 2
Typical circuit diagrams
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Guidelines for machine configuration
246 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
2
4

V
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

1
L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

2
L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

3
L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

4
e
.
g
.

S
l
T
O
P

p
o
w
e
r
6
E
P
1
4
3
6
-
3
B
A
0
0
K
T
1
0
.1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

e
.
g
.

S
l
T
O
P

p
o
w
e
r
6
E
P
1
4
3
6
-
3
B
A
0
0
K
T
1
0
.1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

e
.
g
.

S
l
T
O
P

p
o
w
e
r
6
E
P
1
4
3
6
-
3
B
A
0
0
K
T
1
0
.1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

l
f

t
h
e

ju
m
p
e
r

is

s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
d
,

a

lin
e

in
s
u
la
t
io
n

m
o
n
it
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

in
s
t
a
lle
d
.
A
ll
c
a
b
le
s

m
a
r
k
e
d

#

m
u
s
t

b
e

la
id

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

a
n
d

g
r
o
u
n
d
-
f
a
u
lt

r
e
s
is
t
a
n
t
.

Figure 7-3 Circuit Manual Group =1, Page 3
Typical circuit diagrams
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 247
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
2
4

V
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
A
ll
c
a
b
le
s

m
a
r
k
e
d

#

m
u
s
t

b
e

la
id

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

a
n
d

g
r
o
u
n
d
-
f
a
u
lt

r
e
s
is
t
a
n
t
.
e
.
g
.

S
l
T
O
P

p
o
w
e
r
6
E
P
1
4
3
6
-
3
B
A
0
0
K
T
1
0
.1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

l
f

t
h
e

ju
m
p
e
r

is

s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
d
,

a

lin
e

in
s
u
la
t
io
n

m
o
n
it
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

in
s
t
a
lle
d
.
L
o
a
d

v
o
lt
a
g
e
N
C
U

7
1
0
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

1
L
o
a
d

v
o
lt
a
g
e
N
C
U

7
1
0
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

2
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

1
+
2
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
C
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r

g
e
n
e
r
a
l
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

c
ir
c
u
it
s
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

2
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

c
ir
c
u
it
s
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

2
B
r
a
k
e
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

2
E m e r g e n c y
s t o p
l n s t a n t a n e o u s
1
)

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

o
v
e
r
lo
a
d

a
n
d

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
v
ic
e
s
.
2
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1

Figure 7-4 Circuit Manual Group =1, Page 4
Typical circuit diagrams
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Guidelines for machine configuration
248 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
2
4

V
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
A
ll
c
a
b
le
s

m
a
r
k
e
d

#

m
u
s
t

b
e

la
id

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

a
n
d

g
r
o
u
n
d
-
f
a
u
lt

r
e
s
is
t
a
n
t
.
L
o
a
d

v
o
lt
a
g
e
N
C
U

7
1
0
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

3
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

3
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
E
T
2
0
0
S
l
n
p
u
t
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
E
T
2
0
0
S
O
u
t
p
u
t
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
E
T
2
0
0
S
M
o
t
o
r

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
S
a
f
e
t
y

m
o
d
u
le
s
l
n
p
u
t
s
/
o
u
t
p
u
t
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
E
T
2
0
0
S
l
M
1
5
1
1
)

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

o
v
e
r
lo
a
d

a
n
d

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
v
ic
e
s
.
2
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1

Figure 7-5 Circuit Manual Group =1, Page 5
Typical circuit diagrams
7.3 Circuit Manual Group =1
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 249
2
)
2
)
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
2
4

V
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
A
ll
c
a
b
le
s

m
a
r
k
e
d

#

m
u
s
t

b
e

la
id

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

a
n
d

g
r
o
u
n
d
-
f
a
u
lt

r
e
s
is
t
a
n
t
.
L
o
a
d

v
o
lt
a
g
e
N
C
U

7
1
0
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

4
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

4
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
C
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r

g
e
n
e
r
a
l
1
)

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

o
v
e
r
lo
a
d

a
n
d

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
v
ic
e
s
.
2
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1

Figure 7-6 Circuit Manual Group =1, Page 6

Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
250 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Drive group without safety, with line contactor
Power supply of the NCU 710 (=2.-K11)
Control signals to the NCU 710 (=2.-K11)
DRIVE-CLiQ connection to the power units
PROFIBUS connection to the distributed peripherals (=2.-K31)
Control signals to the distributed peripherals
Control of the line contactor (=2.-Q15) by the Control Unit
Supply and control of the Line Module (=2.-Q51), including the integration of the auxiliary
contact of the main power switch
Supply and control of the Single Motor Modules (=2.-Q61; =2.-Q51)
Connection of the motor, holding brake, and SMC20 sensor system to the Motor Module
(=2.-K66; =2.-K76)
Application
The drive group consists of the NCU 7x0 Control Unit (=2.-K11), the Line Module (=2.-Q51),
and two Motor Modules (=2.-Q61/Q71).
The communication and open-loop/closed-loop control functions for the complete drive
group, consisting, for example, of the Active Line Module and Motor Modules, can run in the
Control Unit, whereby the Control Unit is designed for multi-axis operation at all times.
DRIVE-CLiQ is used for the communication between the Control Unit and the connected
SINAMICS components.
Functions
Signal exchange between the NCU 710 Control Unit and the PLC
Interlocking of external status and fault messages:
External fault messages relating, for example, to the monitoring of miniature circuit
breakers (=1.-F42, F44, F45), circuit-breakers (=1.-Q31, Q41), etc., may also need to be
interlocked with the On/Off command. Messages can be visualized appropriately on the
Operator Panel.
Interlocking of component states and system alarms:
Depending on their information and importance, some internal status signals can or must
be linked with the On/Off command, controller enable, etc.
Line contactor control:
An internal control logic handles the control and monitoring of the optional line contactor
(=2.-Q15). The line contactor is switched depending on the On/Off and enabling signals
of the Active Line Module.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 251
Enabling signal from the Active Line Module:
The protective circuit of the Enable Pulses digital input (-X21: 3/ 4) is essential for the
Active Line Module (=2.-Q51). Before the main power switch is used to switch off the
drive group, the Enable Pulses input on the Active Line Module must be disabled via, for
example, a leading ( 10 ms) disabling auxiliary switch on the main power switch.
The "Infeed Ready" signal is activated only when the Line Module is operating correctly
and the DC link has started properly.
Enables for Motor Modules:
The "Infeed Ready" signal from the Line Module must be switched parallel on all
connected Motor Modules in order to attain an enable for the Motor Modules. The
interconnection is made within the drive objects in the Control Unit.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
252 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Circuit manual group examples = 2
1
1
)
4
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
1
2
)
S
e
r
v
ic
e

in
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
4
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2
.
.

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

/

6
S
L
3
.
.

s
e
e

N
C

6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

2
)

l
f

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

is

u
s
e
d

t
o

t
h
e

r
e
a
liz
e

s
a
f
e
t
y

f
u
n
c
t
io
n
s
,

a
n

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
ia
t
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
m
u
s
t

b
e

p
r
o
v
id
e
d

t
h
a
t

s
a
t
is
f
ie
s

t
h
e

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

s
a
f
e
t
y

c
a
t
e
g
o
r
y
.

R
e
p
r
e
s
e
n
t
a
t
io
n

o
n
ly

a
s

e
le
c
t
r
ic
a
l
is
o
la
t
io
n
.
1
)

T
h
e

s
w
it
c
h
in
g

c
a
p
a
c
it
y

o
f

t
h
e

d
ig
it
a
l
o
u
t
p
u
t

f
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l,

f
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
le
,

o
f

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
,

m
u
s
t

b
e

o
b
s
e
r
v
e
d
.

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
iv
e

c
ir
c
u
it

o
f

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

c
o
il
(
e
.
g
.

v
a
r
is
t
o
r
)

is

e
s
s
e
n
t
ia
l
!
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

3
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
L
in
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
R e a d y t o p o w e r - u p
L i n e M o d u l e 1
F e e d b a c k s i g n a l
L i n e c o n t a c t o r
O f f 3
T o t a l d r i v e s
O f f 3 / L M 1
O n / O f f 1
L i n e M o d u l e 1
E A 1 / L M 1
6
)

T
h
e

o
p
t
io
n

b
o
a
r
d

m
a
y

o
n
ly

b
e

r
e
m
o
v
e
d

o
r

in
s
e
r
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

n
o

p
o
w
e
r

is

a
p
p
lie
d

t
o

t
h
e

N
C
U

a
n
d

t
h
e

o
p
t
io
n

b
o
a
r
d
!
7
)

T
h
e

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

f
la
s
h

c
a
r
d

m
a
y

o
n
ly

b
e

r
e
m
o
v
e
d

o
r

in
s
e
r
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

n
o

p
o
w
e
r

is

a
p
p
lie
d

t
o

t
h
e

N
C
U
!
8
)

F
a
s
t

in
p
u
t
s

(
m
u
s
t

b
e

s
h
ie
ld
e
d
)
9
)

J
u
m
p
e
r

o
p
e
n
,

p
o
t
e
n
t
ia
l
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
io
n

f
o
r

d
ig
it
a
l
in
p
u
t
s

(
D
l
)
1
0
)
C
a
n

b
e

in
d
iv
id
u
a
lly

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
e
d

a
s

in
p
u
t
/
o
u
t
p
u
t
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1

Figure 7-7 Circuit Manual Group =2, Page 1
Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 253
P B 1
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
7
-
s
e
g
m
e
n
t

d
is
p
la
y
S
t
a
r
t
u
p

a
n
d

m
o
d
e

s
e
le
c
t
o
r

s
w
it
c
h
P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
U
S
B
H a n d w h e e l , H B G
T C U , P C U , H T , h a n d w h e e l
F a c t o r y n e t w o r k
P r o g r a m m i n g d e v i c e
1
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

p
lu
g

6
S
E
7
9
7
2
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

B
u
s

t
e
r
m
in
a
t
in
g

r
e
s
is
t
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

f
ir
s
t

a
n
d

la
s
t

n
o
d
e

in

a

b
u
s

s
e
g
m
e
n
t
,

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

o
t
h
e
r
w
is
e

t
h
e

d
a
t
a

t
r
a
n
s
m
is
s
io
n

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
ly
.

T
h
e

c
a
b
le

s
h
ie
ld

m
u
s
t

b
e

p
la
c
e
d

w
it
h

a

la
r
g
e

a
r
e
a

o
n

b
o
t
h

s
id
e
s
.
2
)

B
u
s

c
a
b
le

f
o
r

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

6
X
V
1
8
3
0
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

3
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

a
d
d
r
e
s
s

w
ill
b
e

s
e
t

d
u
r
in
g

t
h
e

c
o
n
f
ig
u
r
in
g

Figure 7-8 Circuit Manual Group =2, Page 2
Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
254 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
,
w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
1
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

p
lu
g

6
S
E
7
9
7
2
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

B
u
s

t
e
r
m
in
a
t
in
g

r
e
s
is
t
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

f
ir
s
t

a
n
d

la
s
t

n
o
d
e

in

a

b
u
s

s
e
g
m
e
n
t
,

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

o
t
h
e
r
w
is
e

t
h
e

d
a
t
a

t
r
a
n
s
m
is
s
io
n

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
ly
.

T
h
e

c
a
b
le

s
h
ie
ld

m
u
s
t

b
e

p
la
c
e
d

w
it
h

a

la
r
g
e

a
r
e
a

o
n

b
o
t
h

s
id
e
s
.
2
)

B
u
s

c
a
b
le

f
o
r

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

6
X
V
1
8
3
0
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

P
la
c
e
m
e
n
t

o
n

t
h
e

N
C
U

7
X
0
-
X
1
2
6
P S 2 4 V D C
D r i v e g r o u p 1
P S 2 4 V D C
G e n e r a l
L o a d v o l t a g e
N C U 1 7 0 d r i v e g r o u p 1
C o n t r o l s u p p l y v o l t a g e
D r i v e g r o u p 1 + 2
C o n t r o l v o l t a g e
C o n t r o l l e r g e n e r a l

Figure 7-9 Circuit Manual Group =2, Page 3
Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 255
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
F e e d b a c k s i g n a l
L i n e p o w e r s w i t c h
N T E
F e e d b a c k s i g n a l
R e a d y t o p o w e r - u p
L i n e M o d u l e 1
E B / L M 1
E A / L M 1
L i n e M o d u l e 1
N T E
O f f 3 / L M 1
T o t a l d r i v e s
O f f 3

Figure 7-10 Circuit Manual Group =2, Page 4
Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
256 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
)
1
)
.
.
.
m
m
2
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
=
4
/
5
.
6
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
2
4

V
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
ly
D
C
-
lin
k
M
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
ly

a
n
d

t
h
e

S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

c
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s

>

1
0

m
s
e
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l
M
a
in

p
o
w
e
r

s
w
it
c
h

a
u
x
ilia
r
y

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
M
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

lin
e

c
h
o
k
e

a
n
d

t
h
e

L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le

>

5

m
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

Figure 7-11 Circuit Manual Group =2, Page 5
Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 257
1
)
1
)
1
)
1
1
)
2
)
3
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
H o u s i n g
f
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
le
,

1
F
K
.
.
.
D
r
iv
e

1
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
2
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

6
F
X
5

/

8

p
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g







O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
3
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
5

/

8


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

d
e
p
e
n
d
in
g

t
h
e

S
M
C

M
o
d
u
le
4
)

T
h
e

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
ie
s

o
f

t
h
e

E
n
a
b
le

P
u
ls
e

(
E
P
)

in
p
u
t

is

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

o
n
ly

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

"
S
a
f
e

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
ill
"

(
S
H
/
S
B
C
)

f
u
n
c
t
io
n

o
n

t
h
e

M
o
t
o
r

M
o
d
u
le

a
n
d

o
n

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
U
n
it

is

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d

b
y

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
in
g
.

Figure 7-12 Circuit Manual Group =2, Page 6
Typical circuit diagrams
7.4 Circuit Manual Group =2
Guidelines for machine configuration
258 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
)
1
)
2
)
1
1
)
3
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
H o u s i n g
f
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
le
,

1
F
K
.
.
.
D
r
iv
e

2
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
2
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

6
F
X
5

/

8

p
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g







O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
3
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
5

/

8


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

d
e
p
e
n
d
in
g

t
h
e

S
M
C

M
o
d
u
le
4
)

T
h
e

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
ie
s

o
f

t
h
e

E
n
a
b
le

P
u
ls
e

(
E
P
)

in
p
u
t

is

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

o
n
ly

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

"
S
a
f
e

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
ill
"

(
S
H
/
S
B
C
)

f
u
n
c
t
io
n

o
n

t
h
e

M
o
t
o
r

M
o
d
u
le

a
n
d

o
n

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
U
n
it

is

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d

b
y

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
in
g
.

Figure 7-13 Circuit Manual Group =2, Page 7

Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 259
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Drive group with line contactor, Smart Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ connection, without safety
functions, motor protection without Voltage Protection Module (VPM).
Power supply of the NCU 710 (=3.-K11)
Control signals to the NCU; digital inputs and digital outputs in accordance with standard
macro specifications
DRIVE-CLiQ connection to the Motor Module
PROFIBUS connection to the distributed peripherals
Supply and control of the Smart Line Module (=3.-Q51), including the integration of the
auxiliary contact of the main power switch
Supply and control of the Single Motor Module
Connection of the motor, holding brake and sensor system to the Motor Module (=3.-Q61)
Connection of the motor and separate sensor system (=3.-B78) to the Motor Module (=3.-
Q71)
Motor protection (=3.-F75) by the Voltage Protection Module (VPM)
The drive group consists of the Control Unit (=3.-K11), the Smart Line Module (=3.-Q51), two
Motor Modules (=3.-Q61, =3.-Q71), the Voltage Protection Module (=3.-F75) and the SIMAG
H2 (=3.B78) actual value sensor. The DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used for communication
between the Control Unit and the Motor Modules.
Functions
Signal exchange
The signal exchange between the NCU 710 Control Unit and the PLC
Interlocking of external status and fault messages
External fault signals, such as the monitoring of the safety cut-outs (=1.-F62, =1.-F63,
=1.-F64), circuit-breakers (=1.-Q36, =1.-Q41), etc., may also need to be interlocked with
the On/Off command. Messages can be visualized appropriately on the Operator Panel.
Interlocking of component states and system alarms
Depending on their information and importance, some internal status signals can or must
be linked with the On/Off command, controller enable, etc.
Enable signal from the Smart Line Module (5/10 kW)
The protective circuit of the Enable Pulses digital input (X21: 3/ 4) is required for the
Smart Line Module (=3.-Q51). Before the main power switch is used to switch off the
drive group, the Enable Pulses input on the Smart Line Module must be disabled, for
example, using a leading (<=10 ms) auxiliary switch on the main power switch. The
"Infeed Ready" signal is activated only when the Smart Line Module is operating correctly
and the DC link has started properly.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
260 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Line contactor control
The PLC is used to control the line contactor, because the Line Module 5/10 kW (without
DRIVE-CLiQ) does not have any internal control logic for control and monitoring. An
appropriate activation and deactivation must be observed. See also Section Line
Contactor Control (Page 97).
Signal exchange between the PLC and the Smart Line Module (5/10 kW)
Because the Smart Line Module (5/10 kW) does not have any DRIVE-CLiQ connection,
digital signals are used for the signal exchange between the Smart Line Module and the
PLC.
Enables for Motor Modules
The "Infeed Ready" signal from the Line Module must be switched parallel on all
connected Motor Modules to enable the Motor Modules here. The signal interconnection
is made within the Drive Module in the Control Unit.
Motor protection for the 1FE motor
A Voltage Protection Module (VPM) is provided to protect the 1FE motor against over-
voltages. The signal contact from the VPM must be interconnected with the Control Unit.
When the VPM is triggered, an OFF2 (=3.-K11, X132: 10, DI/DO 14) of the corresponding
axis will be initiated.
Sensor connection for the 1FE motor
Because the 1FE motor does not have an internal encoder, an SMC20 module must be
used to connect a separate external encoder (e.g. SIMAG H2) to the Motor Module.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 261
Circuit manual group examples = 3
1
1
)
1
1
)
4
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
S
L
M

5
/
1
0

k
W
;

w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
1
2
)
S
e
r
v
ic
e

in
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
4
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2
.
.

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

/

6
S
L
3
.
.

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

3
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
O f f 3
T o t a l d r i v e s
O f f 3 / S L M 4
l n f e e d
O p e r a t i o n
R E A D Y / S L M 4
6
)

T
h
e

o
p
t
io
n

b
o
a
r
d

m
a
y

o
n
ly

b
e

r
e
m
o
v
e
d

o
r

in
s
e
r
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

n
o

p
o
w
e
r

is

a
p
p
lie
d

t
o

t
h
e

N
C
U

a
n
d

t
h
e

o
p
t
io
n

b
o
a
r
d
!
7
)

T
h
e

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

f
la
s
h

c
a
r
d

m
a
y

o
n
ly

b
e

r
e
m
o
v
e
d

o
r

in
s
e
r
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

n
o

p
o
w
e
r

is

a
p
p
lie
d

t
o

t
h
e

N
C
U
!
8
)

F
a
s
t

in
p
u
t
s

(
m
u
s
t

b
e

s
h
ie
ld
e
d
)
9
)

J
u
m
p
e
r

o
p
e
n
,

p
o
t
e
n
t
ia
l
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
io
n

f
o
r

d
ig
it
a
l
in
p
u
t
s

(
D
l
)
1
0
)
C
a
n

b
e

in
d
iv
id
u
a
lly

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
e
d

a
s

in
p
u
t
/
o
u
t
p
u
t
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1

Figure 7-14 Circuit Manual Group =3, Page 1
Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
262 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
S
L
M

5
/
1
0

k
W
;

w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
7
-
s
e
g
m
e
n
t

d
is
p
la
y
S
t
a
r
t
u
p

a
n
d

m
o
d
e

s
e
le
c
t
o
r

s
w
it
c
h
P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
U
S
B
P B 1
H a n d w h e e l , h a n d - h e l d t e r m i n a l
T C U , P C U , H T , h a n d w h e e l
F a c t o r y n e t w o r k
P r o g r a m m i n g d e v i c e
1
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

p
lu
g

6
S
E
7
9
7
2
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g



B
u
s

t
e
r
m
in
a
t
in
g

r
e
s
is
t
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

f
ir
s
t

a
n
d

la
s
t

n
o
d
e

in

a

b
u
s

s
e
g
m
e
n
t
,

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

o
t
h
e
r
w
is
e

t
h
e

d
a
t
a

t
r
a
n
s
m
is
s
io
n

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
ly
.

T
h
e

c
a
b
le

s
h
ie
ld

m
u
s
t

b
e

p
la
c
e
d

w
it
h

a

la
r
g
e

a
r
e
a

o
n

b
o
t
h

s
id
e
s
.
2
)

B
u
s

c
a
b
le

f
o
r

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

6
X
V
1
8
3
0
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

3
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

a
d
d
r
e
s
s

w
ill
b
e

s
e
t

d
u
r
in
g

t
h
e

c
o
n
f
ig
u
r
in
g

Figure 7-15 Circuit Manual Group =3, Page 2
Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 263
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
S
L
M

5
/
1
0

k
W
;

w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
1
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

p
lu
g

6
S
E
7
9
7
2
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

B
u
s

t
e
r
m
in
a
t
in
g

r
e
s
is
t
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

f
ir
s
t

a
n
d

la
s
t

n
o
d
e

in

a

b
u
s

s
e
g
m
e
n
t
,

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

o
t
h
e
r
w
is
e

t
h
e

d
a
t
a

t
r
a
n
s
m
is
s
io
n

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
ly
.

T
h
e

c
a
b
le

s
h
ie
ld

m
u
s
t

b
e

p
la
c
e
d

w
it
h

a

la
r
g
e

a
r
e
a

o
n

b
o
t
h

s
id
e
s
.
2
)

B
u
s

c
a
b
le

f
o
r

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

6
X
V
1
8
3
0
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

P
la
c
e
m
e
n
t

o
n

t
h
e

N
C
U

7
X
0
-
X
1
2
6
P S 2 4 V D C
D r i v e g r o u p 4
P S 2 4 V D C
G e n e r a l
L o a d v o l t a g e
N C U 7 1 0 d r i v e g r o u p 4
C o n t r o l s u p p l y v o l t a g e
D r i v e g r o u p 4
C o n t r o l v o l t a g e
C o n t r o l l e r g e n e r a l
P r o t e c t i o n
L i n e M o d u l e 4

Figure 7-16 Circuit Manual Group =3, Page 3
Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
264 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
R e a d y
S m a r t L i n e M o d u l e
W a r n i n g
S m a r t L i n e M o d u l e
D i s a b l e
S m a r t L i n e M o d u l e
D l S A / S L M 4
R e s e t
S m a r t L i n e M o d u l e
R E / S L M 4
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
E
P
/
S
L
M
4
/
5
.
6
7
)
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
S
L
M

5
/
1
0

k
W
;

w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
F e e d b a c k s i g n a l
L i n e c o n t a c t o r
F e e d b a c k s i g n a l
L i n e p o w e r s w i t c h
O f f 3
T o t a l d r i v e s
O f f 3 / S L M 4
L
in
e

C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
6
)

l
f

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

is

u
s
e
d

t
o

t
h
e

r
e
a
liz
e

s
a
f
e
t
y

f
u
n
c
t
io
n
s
,

a
n

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
ia
t
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
m
u
s
t

b
e

p
r
o
v
id
e
d

t
h
a
t

s
a
t
is
f
ie
s

t
h
e

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

s
a
f
e
t
y

c
a
t
e
g
o
r
y
.

R
e
p
r
e
s
e
n
t
a
t
io
n

o
n
ly

a
s

e
le
c
t
r
ic
a
l
is
o
la
t
io
n
.
5
)

S
w
it
c
h
in
g

c
a
p
a
c
it
y

o
f

t
h
e

d
ig
it
a
l
o
u
t
p
u
t

f
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l,

f
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
le

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
,

m
u
s
t

b
e

t
a
k
e
n

in
t
o

c
o
n
s
id
e
r
a
t
io
n
.

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
iv
e

c
ir
c
u
it

o
f

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

c
o
il
(
e
.
g
.

v
a
r
is
t
o
r
)

is

e
s
s
e
n
t
ia
l
!
7
)

W
h
e
n

t
h
e

lin
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

is

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
f
f
,

t
h
e

s
w
it
c
h

o
f
f

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

f
o
r

t
h
e

E
P

a
n
d

R
e
a
d
y

s
ig
n
a
ls

f
r
o
m

t
h
e

S
m
a
r
t

L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le

m
u
s
t

b
e

o
b
s
e
r
v
e
d
.

A
ls
o

s
e
e

t
h
e

"
L
in
e

C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l"

s
e
c
t
io
n

Figure 7-17 Circuit Manual Group =3, Page 4
Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 265
.
.
.
m
m
2
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
E
P
/
S
L
M
4
4 54 6
=
1
-
Q
1
1
=
1
/
1
.1
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
S
L
M

5
/
1
0

k
W
;

w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
2
4

V
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
ly
D
C
-
lin
k
M
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
ly

a
n
d

t
h
e

S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

c
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s

>

1
0

m
s
e
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l
M
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

lin
e

c
h
o
k
e

a
n
d

t
h
e

L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le

>

5

m
A
u
x
ilia
r
y

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
m
a
in

p
o
w
e
r

s
w
it
c
h

Figure 7-18 Circuit Manual Group =3, Page 5
Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
266 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
)
1
)
2
)
1
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
S
L
M

5
/
1
0

k
W
;

w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
H o u s i n g
f
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
le
,

1
F
K
.
.
.
D
r
iv
e

1
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
2
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

6
F
X
5

/

8

p
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g







O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
3
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
5

/

8


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

d
e
p
e
n
d
in
g

t
h
e

S
M
C

M
o
d
u
le
4
)

T
h
e

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
ie
s

o
f

t
h
e

E
n
a
b
le

P
u
ls
e

(
E
P
)

in
p
u
t

is

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

o
n
ly

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

"
S
a
f
e

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
ill
"

(
S
H
/
S
B
C
)

f
u
n
c
t
io
n

o
n

t
h
e

M
o
t
o
r

M
o
d
u
le

a
n
d

o
n

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
U
n
it

is

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d

b
y

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
in
g
.

Figure 7-19 Circuit Manual Group =3, Page 6
Typical circuit diagrams
7.5 Circuit Manual Group =3
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 267
1
)
-
W
.
.
1
)
1
1
)
-
W
.
.
- W . .
- W . .
- W . .
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
H o u s i n g
f
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
le
,

1
F
K
.
.
.
D
r
iv
e

2
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
2
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

6
F
X
5

/

8

p
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
3
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
5

/

8


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

d
e
p
e
n
d
in
g

t
h
e

S
M
C

M
o
d
u
le
4
)

T
h
e

p
r
o
p
e
r
t
ie
s

o
f

t
h
e

E
n
a
b
le

P
u
ls
e

(
E
P
)

in
p
u
t

is

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

o
n
ly

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

"
S
a
f
e

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
ill
"

(
S
H
/
S
B
C
)

f
u
n
c
t
io
n

o
n

t
h
e

M
o
t
o
r

M
o
d
u
le

a
n
d

o
n

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
U
n
it

is

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d

b
y

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
in
g
.
S
U
B
-
D

2
5

p
in
D
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

w
i
t
h
o
u
t

s
a
f
e
t
y
;
S
L
M

5
/
1
0

k
W
;

w
i
t
h

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

Figure 7-20 Circuit Manual Group =3, Page 7

Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
268 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Drive group without line contactor, however, with safety functions using a safety relay
(3TK28..). Disconnection of all drives, also of the group =5 for an emergency stop;
assignment of the digital inputs and outputs using the data of the standard macro.
Power supply of the NCU 710 (=4.-K11)
Control signals on the NCU 710, incl. channel formation for the Safe Standstill (SH)
function; digital inputs and outputs using the data of the standard macros
DRIVE-CLiQ connection to the power units
PROFIBUS connection to the distributed peripherals (=4-K31)
Control signals to the distributed peripherals
Supply and control of the Line Module, including the integration of the auxiliary contact of
the main power switch
Supply and control of the Double Motor Module (=4.-Q61), incl. channel formation for the
Safe Standstill (SH) function
Motor connection (=4.-M62), incl. holding brake and sensor system using the Sensor
Module Cabinet (=4.-K64), to the Motor Module (=4.-Q61)
Motor connection (=4.-M65), incl. holding brake and sensor system with integrated
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Safety control for emergency stop with safety relay (=4.-K71, -K72, -K73)
Application
The higher-level PLC (=4.-K31) allows the complete drive group to be activated and
deactivated in a defined manner. The "Safe Standstill" function is activated time-delayed
safety-related over two channels (the drives should already have stopped).
Functions - drive group On
The deactivation circuit in front of the emergency stop safety switching device (=4.-K71)
must be closed using the following conditions:
Keyswitch (=4.-S71), controller On.
Contactor (=4.-K76) On, Control Unit, Line Module and Motor Modules components
ready. These operational states must be queried and linked by the higher-level PLC.
The emergency off pushbutton (=4.-S73) must not be operated.
The drive group Off pushbutton (=4.-S72) must not be operated.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 269
The feedback loop for the safety switching device (=4.-K71) is closed.
The "Safe Standstill" feedback of the individual drive axes on the Control Unit (=4.-K11-
X122: 7/8; DI/DO 8/9) is monitored for the safe switching state Off for each activation
cycle. This is also the case for the relay contact multiplication (=4.K72/-K73). If required,
the safety-related functions of the user-provided machine control can also be added to
the feedback loop.
Drive group (=4.-S74) On pushbutton, the safety switching device (=4.-K71) is activated
and latches. The drive group is activated. Once the DC link has been charged, and the
Line Modules and the Motor Modules report ready, the drive axes can be operated with
the corresponding controller enables via PROFIBUS.
Drives Start/Stop
The (=4.K78) Drives Start pushbutton activates the axis-specific controller enables. The
(=4.-S77) Drives Stop pushbutton brings the drives to a standstill. The type of the standstill
action must be defined in the Drive Object of the Control Unit.
Drive group / drives Off
The Emergency Stop (=4.-S73) pushbutton or the Drives / Drive Group Off (=4.-S72)
pushbutton brakes the drives as fast as possible at a set current level (OFF3) of the drive
components to a standstill, provided they have not yet been stopped by the PLC program.
The instantaneous contact of the safety switching device (=4.-K72) on the Control Unit is
used to control the OFF3 switch off command (=4.-K11-X122:2, DI1).
Once the braking action has completed, a time delay (=4.-K71) and a replication block (=4.-
K73) is used to select safety-relevant the "Safe Standstill" function. This is done with the
Control Unit (=4.-K11-X122:3, DI2) and parallel with the associated Motor Module (=4.-Q61,
=5.-Q11, -X21/22:3, EP).
The "Safe Standstill" function must be controlled using safe engineering. Depending on the
requirement in the corresponding categories in accordance with EN 954-1.
The Drives Off (=4.-S72) pushbutton also acts on the PLC -E445. This means PLC logic can
be used to determine which switch-off command caused the drive group to be shutdown.
??The PLC can be used for logical linking, which, independent of the operational state of the
components, drive group can also be switched off by the contactor (=4.K76)??.
The drives are stopped with emergency stop in the stop category 1 in accordance with EN
602041, "Controlled Stopping", the energy supply is interrupted only when the standstill is
achieved.
Holding brake
The holding brake is controlled coordinated using the Motor Module. When the "Safe
Standstill" is selected, the brake is closed immediately. Consequently, the "Safe Standstill"
function should be selected only when the drives have been brought to a standstill.
Otherwise the holding brake can be damaged.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
270 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Circuit manual group examples = 4
R M S H / S B C ( 1 )
R M S H / S B C ( 2 )
E B / L M 2
1
1
)
1
1
)
L i n e M o d u l e 2
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
4
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
1
2
)
S
e
r
v
ic
e

in
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
4
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2
.
.

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

/

6
S
L
3
.
.

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

3
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
O f f 3
T o t a l d r i v e s
O f f 3 / L M 2
O n / O f f 1 E A 1 / L M 2
6
)

T
h
e

o
p
t
io
n

b
o
a
r
d

m
a
y

o
n
ly

b
e

r
e
m
o
v
e
d

o
r

in
s
e
r
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

n
o

p
o
w
e
r

is

a
p
p
lie
d

t
o

t
h
e

N
C
U

a
n
d

t
h
e

o
p
t
io
n

b
o
a
r
d
!
7
)

T
h
e

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

f
la
s
h

c
a
r
d

m
a
y

o
n
ly

b
e

r
e
m
o
v
e
d

o
r

in
s
e
r
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

n
o

p
o
w
e
r

is

a
p
p
lie
d

t
o

t
h
e

N
C
U
!
8
)

F
a
s
t

in
p
u
t
s

(
m
u
s
t

b
e

s
h
ie
ld
e
d
)
9
)

J
u
m
p
e
r

o
p
e
n
,

p
o
t
e
n
t
ia
l
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
io
n

f
o
r

d
ig
it
a
l
in
p
u
t
s

(
D
l
)
1
0
)
C
a
n

b
e

in
d
iv
id
u
a
lly

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
e
d

a
s

in
p
u
t
/
o
u
t
p
u
t
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
S a f e s t a n d s t i l l
S a f e b r a k e
c o n t r o l d r i v e 1 + 2
S a f e s t a n d s t i l l
S a f e b r a k e
c o n t r o l d r i v e 3
S a f e s t a n d s t i l l
f e e d b a c k
D r i v e 1 + 2
D r i v e 3
R e a d y t o p o w e r - u p
L i n e M o d u l e 2
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)

Figure 7-21 Circuit Manual Group =4, Page 1
Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 271
2
)
P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
U
S
B
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p
s

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
7
-
s
e
g
m
e
n
t

d
is
p
la
y
S
t
a
r
t
u
p

a
n
d

m
o
d
e

s
e
le
c
t
o
r

s
w
it
c
h
P B 1
H a n d w h e e l , h a n d - h e l d t e r m i n a l
T C U , P C U , H T , h a n d w h e e l
F a c t o r y n e t w o r k
P r o g r a m m i n g d e v i c e
1
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

p
lu
g

6
S
E
7
9
7
2
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

B
u
s

t
e
r
m
in
a
t
in
g

r
e
s
is
t
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

f
ir
s
t

a
n
d

la
s
t

n
o
d
e

in

a

b
u
s

s
e
g
m
e
n
t
,

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

o
t
h
e
r
w
is
e

t
h
e

d
a
t
a

t
r
a
n
s
m
is
s
io
n

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
ly
.

T
h
e

c
a
b
le

s
h
ie
ld

m
u
s
t

b
e

p
la
c
e
d

w
it
h

a

la
r
g
e

a
r
e
a

o
n

b
o
t
h

s
id
e
s
.
2
)

B
u
s

c
a
b
le

f
o
r

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

6
X
V
1
8
3
0
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

3
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

a
d
d
r
e
s
s

w
ill
b
e

s
e
t

d
u
r
in
g

t
h
e

c
o
n
f
ig
u
r
in
g
.

Figure 7-22 Circuit Manual Group =4, Page 2
Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
272 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
1
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

p
lu
g

6
S
E
7
9
7
2
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

B
u
s

t
e
r
m
in
a
t
in
g

r
e
s
is
t
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

f
ir
s
t

a
n
d

la
s
t

n
o
d
e

in

a

b
u
s

s
e
g
m
e
n
t
,

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

o
t
h
e
r
w
is
e

t
h
e

d
a
t
a

t
r
a
n
s
m
is
s
io
n

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
ly
.

T
h
e

c
a
b
le

s
h
ie
ld

m
u
s
t

b
e

p
la
c
e
d

w
it
h

a

la
r
g
e

a
r
e
a

o
n

b
o
t
h

s
id
e
s
.
2
)

B
u
s

c
a
b
le

f
o
r

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

6
X
V
1
8
3
0
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

P
la
c
e
m
e
n
t

o
n

t
h
e

N
C
U

7
X
0
-
X
1
2
6
P S 2 4 V D C
D r i v e g r o u p 2
P S 2 4 V D C
G e n e r a l
L o a d v o l t a g e
N C U 7 1 0 d r i v e g r o u p 2
C o n t r o l s u p p l y v o l t a g e
D r i v e g r o u p 2
C o n t r o l v o l t a g e
C o n t r o l l e r g e n e r a l
P r o t e c t i o n
L i n e M o d u l e 2
C o n t r o l v o l t a g e
E m e r g e n c y s t o p
c i r c u i t s d r i v e g r o u p
C o n t r o l s u p p l y v o l t a g e
l n s t a n t a n e o u s
e m e r g e n c y s t o p d r i v e
B r a k e
D r i v e g r o u p 2
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)

Figure 7-23 Circuit Manual Group =4, Page 3
Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 273
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
F e e d b a c k s i g n a l
L i n e p o w e r s w i t c h
F e e d b a c k s i g n a l
L i n e M o d u l e 2
r e a d y t o s t a r t
E m e r g e n c y s t o p d r i v e
l n s t a n t a n e o u s
E m e r g e n c y s t o p d r i v e 3
l n s t a n t a n e o u s
D r i v e 1 + 2
D r i v e 3
O n / O f f 1
L i n e M o d u l e 2
F G / L M 2
O f f 3
T o t a l d r i v e s
O f f 3 / L M 2

Figure 7-24 Circuit Manual Group =4, Page 4
Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
274 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
)
1
)
.
.
m
m
2
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
=
2
/
5
.
8
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
M
a
x
.

le
n
g
t
h

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

lin
e

c
h
o
k
e

a
n
d

t
h
e

L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le
>

5

m
M
a
x
.

le
n
g
t
h

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
ly

d
e
v
ic
e

a
n
d

t
h
e

S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

c
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
>

1
0

m
s
e
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l
2
4

V
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
ly
D
C
-
lin
k
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

m
a
x
.

le
n
g
t
h

Figure 7-25 Circuit Manual Group =4, Page 5
Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 275
1
)
1
)
2
)
1
)
3
)
1
1
)
1
1
)
2
)
3
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
D
r
iv
e

1
D
r
iv
e

2
S
U
B
-
D

2
5

p
in
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
2
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

p
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
le

6
F
X
5

/

8








s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
3
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
5

/

8

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
4
)

T
h
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
iv
e

c
ir
c
u
it

o
f

t
h
e

E
n
a
b
le

P
u
ls
e
s

(
E
P
)

in
p
u
t

is

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

o
n
ly

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

"
S
a
f
e

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
ill
"

f
u
n
c
t
io
n

o
n

t
h
e

M
o
t
o
r

M
o
d
u
le

a
n
d

o
n

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
U
n
it

is

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d

b
y

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
in
g
.
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

3
H o u s i n g
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
H o u s i n g
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
E m e r g e n c y
s t o p d e l a y e d
8
)

S
H
/
S
B
C

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

d
e
la
y
e
d

-

1
2
3
e
.
g
.

1
F
K
.
.
.
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)

Figure 7-26 Circuit Manual Group =4, Page 6
Typical circuit diagrams
7.6 Circuit Manual Group =4
Guidelines for machine configuration
276 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
N
/
O
F
F
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r
O
f
f
/
O
n
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

(
C
U
,

L
M
,

M
o
M
o
)
R
e
a
d
y

t
o

p
o
w
e
r
-
u
p
D
r
iv
e
s
/

d
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
f
f
D
r
iv
e
s
/

d
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n
in

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y
M
o
n
it
o
r
e
d

O
n

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

d
e
la
y
e
d
D
r
iv
e
s
/

d
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
D
r
iv
e
s
/

d
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
f
f
D
r
iv
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
D
r
iv
e
s
S
t
o
p
D
r
iv
e
s
S
t
a
r
t
O p e r a t o r p a n e l
R
e
a
d
y

t
o

p
o
w
e
r
-
u
p
D
e
la
y
e
d
l
n
s
t
a
n
t
a
n
e
o
u
s
2
)

S
e
t

t
(
v
)

>

m
a
x
.

b
r
a
k
in
g

t
im
e

f
o
r

t
h
e

d
r
iv
e






(
0
.
5

-

3
0

s
)
3
)

P
la
c
e

ju
m
p
e
r

o
r

a
d
d

s
a
f
e
t
y
-
r
e
le
v
a
n
t

m
o
n
it
o
r
in
g

c
ir
c
u
it
s

t
o

t
h
e

u
s
e
r

p
r
o
v
id
e
d

m
a
c
h
in
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r
.
4
)

A
d
d
it
io
n
a
l
in
t
e
r
lo
c
k
in
g


o
r

a
c
t
iv
a
t
io
n

e
le
m
e
n
t
s
5
)

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n

a
s

s
p
e
c
if
ie
d

in

t
h
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l

Figure 7-27 Circuit Manual Group =4, Page 7

Typical circuit diagrams
7.7 Circuit Manual Group =5
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 277
7.7 Circuit Manual Group =5
Axis-specific drive with safety functions; shutdown with emergency stop (circuit manual
group =4) or with the separate Axis Drive Stop pushbutton. Assignment of the digital inputs
and outputs using the data of the standard macros.
Supply and control of the Single Motor Module, incl. axis-specific channel formation for
the Safe Standstill (SH) function
Connection of the motor and the SMC20 sensor system to the Motor Module
Control of the motor holding brake using the contactor (=5.-K24), internal brake control of
the Motor Module is not activated
Safety control for the axis-specific emergency stop with safety relay (=5.-K21, -K23)
Application
The control is used where one or more drives must be selectively shutdown from a running
axis group in safe engineering. The drive can be shut down safely from the drive group via a
two-channel key-operated switch or, for example, via light barriers or limit switches. The
drive must have been previously shutdown safely using the PLC logic. The "Safe Standstill"
function is used to prevent an unwanted restart.
Functions
Start drives
The two-channel stop circuit in front of the safety switching device (=5.-K21) must be closed
using the following conditions:
Drive Stop key-operated switch (=5. S21) closed.
Emergency Stop Circuit Protection (=4. -K42) closed.
The Start (=5. -S22) pushbutton and the closed feedback loop is used to activate the
contactor (=5.-K21) with "monitored start" which then self-locks.
The state of the safety switching device (=5.-K21) is queried using PLC -E526 (=4./Bl. 4.5).
The drive can now be traversed using the PLC.
Stop drives
The Drives Stop (=5.-S21) keyswitch, or emergency stop (=4.-K72), is used to shutdown the
safety switching device (=5. -K21). The instantaneous contact uses the PLC input (=4./Bl.
4.5) and the internal PROFIBUS connection to remove the OFF3 command from the drives,
the drive (=5.-M15) is braked at the torque limit.
The off-delayed contact (=5.-K21) is used to select and activate the "Safe Standstill" function
on the Control Unit (=4. -K11-X122:4, DI3) and the Motor Module (=5.-Q11-X21:3, EP) on
two channels.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.7 Circuit Manual Group =5
Guidelines for machine configuration
278 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
"Safe Standstill" function feedback
The "Safe Standstill" function is monitored in the Control Unit and in the Motor Module.
A corresponding feedback from the Control Unit (=4.-K11-X122:8, DI/DO 9) and the coupling
relay (=5.-K28) is linked with the safety relay (=5.-K21) in the On circuit. The On circuit is
enabled only when the feedback from the safe standstill functions properly.
The "Safe Standstill" function is actively monitored after each stop action.
Holding brake
A braking current > 2 A DC means that the power cannot come directly from the Motor
Module, but will be supplied from a separate infeed.
The holding brake is controlled time-coordinated by the PLC logic using PLCA527. When the
drive is stopped, an off-delayed contact is used for the contactor (=5.-K24) to also safely
shutdown the brake using hardware. This means a fault in the PLC cannot cause an
incorrect control of the brake when the drive is stationary.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.7 Circuit Manual Group =5
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 279
Circuit manual group examples = 5
1
)
2
)
1
)
1
1
)
3
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
H o u s i n g
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
S
U
B
-
D

2
5

p
in
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
8
)

S
H

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

d
e
la
y
e
d
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

d
e
la
y
e
d

1
2
3
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g
;

o
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h

2
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

6
F
X
5

/

8

p
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
le
,

s
e
e

N
C
6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g
;

o
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h


3
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

6
F
X
5

/

8

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le
;

m
a
x
.

le
n
g
t
h

>

1
0
0

m

d
e
p
e
n
d
in
g

o
n

t
h
e

S
M
C

m
o
d
u
le
4
)

T
h
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
iv
e

c
ir
c
u
it

o
f

t
h
e

E
n
a
b
le

P
u
ls
e
s

(
E
P
)

in
p
u
t

is

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

o
n
ly

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

"
S
a
f
e

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
ill
"

(
S
H
)

f
u
n
c
t
io
n

o
n

t
h
e

M
o
t
o
r

M
o
d
u
le

a
n
d

o
n

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
U
n
it

is

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d

b
y

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
in
g
.
5
)

H
o
ld
in
g

b
r
a
k
e

s
u
r
g
e

s
u
p
p
r
e
s
s
io
n
,

s
e
e

M
o
t
o
r
s

f
o
r

H
S
A

+

V
S
A

P
J

g
u
id
e
,

A
l
_
S

s
e
c
t
io
n
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
.
D
r
i
v
e
s

S
t
a
r
t
/
S
t
o
p

/

S
a
f
e

S
t
a
n
d
s
t
i
l
l
(
a
x
i
s
-
s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
)

Figure 7-28 Circuit Manual Group =5, Page 1
Typical circuit diagrams
7.7 Circuit Manual Group =5
Guidelines for machine configuration
280 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
S
t
o
p

d
r
iv
e
s
S
t
a
r
t

d
r
iv
e
s

E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
3
T
K
2
8
2
7
-
1
B
B
4
1

r
e
l
a
y

s
a
f
e
t
y

c
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
o
n
it
o
r
e
d

s
t
a
r
t
1
)

S
e
t

t

(
v
)

>

m
a
x
.

b
r
a
k
in
g

t
im
e


f
o
r

t
h
e

d
r
iv
e
2
)

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n

o
f

t
h
e

s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e

a
s

s
p
e
c
if
ie
d

in

t
h
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l
T
im
e
-
d
e
la
y
e
d
H
o
ld
in
g

b
r
a
k
e

o
p
t
io
n
E
n
a
b
le

O
n

c
ir
c
u
it
D
r
i
v
e
s

S
t
a
r
t
/
S
t
o
p

/

S
a
f
e

S
t
a
n
d
s
t
i
l
l
(
a
x
i
s
-
s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
)
D
r
i
v
e

3

Figure 7-29 Circuit Manual Group =5, Page 2
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 281
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
A drive group without main contactor, however, with the system/drive-integrated safety
function of the SINUMERIK 840D sl; connection of the safety sensor technology / actuators
using ET200S.
Power supply of the NCU 710 (=6.-K11)
Control signals to the NCU 710; digital inputs and digital outputs using the data of the
standard macros
DRIVE-CLiQ connection to the power units
PROFIBUS connection to the ET200S distributed peripherals (=6.-K82)
Control signals to the ET200S distributed peripherals
Supply and control of the Line Module, including the integration of the auxiliary contact of
the main power switch
Supply and control of the Double Motor Module (=6.-Q61)
Motor, holding brake and sensor system (motor-integrated sensor component)
connection to the Motor Module
Constant motor outgoing feeder using ET200S "Standard" motor starter (=6.-Q86.1)
Constant motor outgoing feeder using ET200S "Fail-safe" motor starter (=6.-Q95.1)
Safety control with ET200S safe digital input modules (=6.-K92.1, -K93) and output
modules (=6.-K94)
Safe interface level for external signals (=6.-K132, -K134)
All sensor/actuator signals required for the safety function are connected to the fail-safe
modules of the ET200S peripherals (=6.-K92.1, -K93, -K94, -K95). All fail-safe signals are
linked using the system/drive-integrated safety function of the SINUMERIK 840D sl. External
safety relays or safety controllers are no longer required. An external control of the SH/SBC
function using the terminals on the NCU or on the Motor Modules is also not required but is
performed internally by the system.
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
282 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Circuit manual group examples = 6
4
)
1
1
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
O n 8 / O f f 1
L i n e M o d u l e 3
E A 1 / L M 3
O f f 3
T o t a l d r i v e s
O f f 3 / L M 3
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

3
E B / L M 3 R e a d y t o p o w e r - u p
L i n e M o d u l e 3
R
M

S
H
/
S
C
B
G
r
o
u
p

1
1
2
)
S
e
r
v
ic
e

in
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
4
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

6
F
X
2
.
.

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

/

6
S
L
3
.
.

s
e
e

N
C

6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g

6
)

T
h
e

o
p
t
io
n

b
o
a
r
d

m
a
y

o
n
ly

b
e

r
e
m
o
v
e
d

o
r

in
s
e
r
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

n
o

p
o
w
e
r

is

a
p
p
lie
d

t
o

t
h
e

N
C
U

a
n
d

t
h
e

o
p
t
io
n

b
o
a
r
d
!
7
)

T
h
e

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

f
la
s
h

c
a
r
d

m
a
y

o
n
ly

b
e

r
e
m
o
v
e
d

o
r

in
s
e
r
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

n
o

p
o
w
e
r

is

a
p
p
lie
d

t
o

t
h
e

N
C
U
8
)

F
a
s
t

in
p
u
t
s

(
m
u
s
t

b
e

s
h
ie
ld
e
d
)
9
)

J
u
m
p
e
r

o
p
e
n
,

p
o
t
e
n
t
ia
l
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
io
n

f
o
r

d
ig
it
a
l
in
p
u
t
s

(
D
l
)
1
0
)
C
a
n

b
e

in
d
iv
id
u
a
lly

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
e
d

a
s

in
p
u
t
/
o
u
t
p
u
t
1
1
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1

Figure 7-30 Circuit manual group =, page 1
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 283
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
2
)
/ 8 . 1
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
7
-
S
e
g
m
e
n
t
d
is
p
la
y
S
t
a
r
t
u
p

a
n
d

m
o
d
e

s
e
le
c
t
o
r

s
w
it
c
h
U
S
B
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S
H a n d w h e e l , h a n d - h e l d t e r m i n a l
T C U , P C U , H T , h a n d w h e e l
F a c t o r y n e t w o r k
P r o g r a m m i n g d e v i c e
1
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

p
lu
g

6
S
E
7
9
7
2
-
.
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g


B
u
s

t
e
r
m
in
a
t
in
g

r
e
s
is
t
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

f
ir
s
t

a
n
d

la
s
t

n
o
d
e

in

a

b
u
s

s
e
g
m
e
n
t
,

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

o
t
h
e
r
w
is
e

t
h
e

d
a
t
a

t
r
a
n
s
m
is
s
io
n

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
ly
.

T
h
e

c
a
b
le

s
h
ie
ld

m
u
s
t

b
e

p
la
c
e
d

w
it
h

a

la
r
g
e

a
r
e
a

o
n

b
o
t
h

s
id
e
s
.
2
)

B
u
s

c
a
b
le

f
o
r

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

6
X
V
1
8
3
0
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g

3
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

a
d
d
r
e
s
s

w
ill
b
e

s
e
t

d
u
r
in
g

t
h
e

c
o
n
f
ig
u
r
in
g

Figure 7-31 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 2
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
284 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
io
n

L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le

3
P
S

2
4

V
D
C


d
r
iv
e

lin
e

3
P
S

2
4

V
D
C


g
e
n
e
r
a
l
L
o
a
d

v
o
lt
a
g
e
N
C
U

7
1
0
D
r
iv
e

lin
e

3
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
D
r
iv
e

lin
e

3
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
E
T
2
0
0
S

c
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r
l
n
p
u
t
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
E
T
2
0
0
S

c
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r
O
u
t
p
u
t
s

Figure 7-32 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 3
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 285
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k

s
ig
n
a
l
M
a
in

p
o
w
e
r

s
w
it
c
h
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
,

E
T
2
0
0
S

c
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r
M
o
t
o
r

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
,

E
T
2
0
0
S

c
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r
S
a
f
e
t
y

m
o
d
u
le
s
l
n
p
u
t
s
E
T
2
0
0
S

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
u
p
p
ly

v
o
lt
a
g
e
l
M
1
5
1
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k

s
ig
n
a
l
R
e
a
d
y

t
o

p
o
w
e
r
-
u
p
L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le
N
T
E
/
G
r
.
3
E A 1 / L M 3
O f f 3 / L M 3
E
n
a
b
le
L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le

3
O
F
F
3
T
o
t
a
l
d
r
iv
e
s

Figure 7-33 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 4
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
286 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
)
1
)
.
.
m
m
2
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
m
a
x
.

le
n
g
t
h

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

lin
e

c
h
o
k
e

a
n
d

t
h
e

L
in
e

M
o
d
u
le
>

5

m
m
a
x
.

le
n
g
t
h

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
ly

d
e
v
ic
e

a
n
d

t
h
e

S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

c
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
>

1
0

m
s
e
e

d
e
v
ic
e

m
a
n
u
a
l
2
4

V
D
C

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
ly
D
C
-
lin
k
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

2
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

1
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3

S
e
e

N
C

6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

m
a
x
.

le
n
g
t
h
H
K
/
H
A
S
N
T
E
/
G
r
.
3

Figure 7-34 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 5
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 287
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
1
)
2
)
2
)
3
)
3
)
3
)
3
)
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
D
r
iv
e

1
D
r
iv
e

2
1
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
2

/

6
S
L
3


S
e
e

N
C

6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
2
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

p
o
w
e
r

c
a
b
le

6
F
X
5

/

8

S
e
e

N
C

6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
3
)

P
r
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
le
d

s
ig
n
a
l
c
a
b
le

6
F
X
5

/

8

S
e
e

N
C

6
1

c
a
t
a
lo
g


O
b
s
e
r
v
e

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

le
n
g
t
h
4
)

T
h
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
iv
e

c
ir
c
u
it

o
f

t
h
e

E
n
a
b
le

P
u
ls
e
s

(
E
P
)

in
p
u
t

is

r
e
q
u
ir
e
d

o
n
ly

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

"
S
a
f
e

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
ill
"

f
u
n
c
t
io
n

o
n

t
h
e

M
o
t
o
r

M
o
d
u
le

a
n
d

o
n

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
U
n
it

is

a
c
t
iv
a
t
e
d

b
y

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
iz
in
g
.
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

3
H o u s i n g
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
s
o
c
k
e
t

2
H o u s i n g
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
s
o
c
k
e
t

1
D
R
l
V
E
-
C
L
i
Q
S
o
c
k
e
t

0
2
4

V
D
C

b
u
s
b
a
r
s
D
C
-
lin
k

b
u
s
b
a
r
s

Figure 7-35 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 6
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
288 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
2
)
2
)
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
-
W
.
.
-
W
.
.
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
L
o
g
ic
F a i l - s a f e m o t o r s t a r t e r
S t a n d a r d m o t o r s t a r t e r
C
h
ip

c
o
n
v
e
y
o
r
H
y
d
r
a
u
lic
s
2
)

T
h
e

d
im
e
n
s
io
n
in
g

o
f

t
h
e

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r
s

t
o

b
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

d
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

t
y
p
e

o
f

la
y
in
g
,

b
u
n
c
h
in
g

f
a
c
t
o
r

a
n
d

a
m
b
ie
n
t

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

in

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
it
h

E
N
6
0
2
0
4
-
1

a
n
d

E
N
6
0
4
3
9
-
1
A
ll
c
a
b
le
s

m
a
r
k
e
d

#

m
u
s
t

b
e

la
id

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

a
n
d

g
r
o
u
n
d
-
f
a
u
lt

r
e
s
is
t
a
n
t
.

Figure 7-36 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 7
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 289
s
n
e
m
e
i
S
S
0
0
2

T
E
- K 8 2
- A 8 3
P o w e r m o d u l e
- K 8 3 . 1
- K 8 4
- K 8 4 . 1
- K 8 4 . 2
- K 8 5
P o w e r m o d u l e
- K 8 5 . 1
- K 8 6
P o w e r m o d u l e
- Q 8 6 . 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F E D C B A
F E D C B A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
m
u
t
a
D
.
b
r
a
e
B
.
r
p
e
G
m
u
t
a
D
g
n
u
r
e
d
n

d
n
a
t
s
u
Z
e
t
t
o
h
c
S
l
l
i
W
-
r
e
b
r
e
p
S
6
0
.
6
0
.
3
1
m
r
o
N
e
m
a
N
1
H
+
3
1
6
=
8
t
t
a
l
B
.
l
B
C o p y r i g h t ( C ) S I E M E N S A G 2 0 0 5 A l l R i g h t s R e s e r v e d
.
d
.
s
r
E
/
.
f
.
s
r
E
/
.
r
p
s
r
U
)
3
(
:


.
r
N
-
.
n
h
c
i
e
Z
S
N
E
M
E
I
S
F
S
F
B
N
O
:
S
S
E
R
D
A
N
O


F
F
O
1 2 4 8 6
1
2
3
4
6
.
.
6 E S 7 1 5 1 - 1 B A 0 0 - 0 A B 0
F
H

1
-
1
5
1
M
I
E
-
M
P
V
4
2

C
D
T M - E 2 4 V D C
/ 3 . 1
I
D

4
E 0 . 0E 0 . 2
/ 3 . 3
C
D

V
4
2
/ 3 . 2
E 0 . 1E 0 . 3
/ 3 . 4
/ 3 . 5
I
D

4
E 0 . 4E 0 . 6
/ 3 . 7
C
D

V
4
2
/ 3 . 6
E 0 . 5E 0 . 7
/ 4 . 1
/ 4 . 2
I
D

4
E 1 . 0E 1 . 2
/ 4 . 4
C
D

V
4
2
/ 4 . 3
E 1 . 1E 1 . 3
/ 1 1 . 7
/ 1 3 . 7
I
D

4
E 1 . 4E 1 . 6
/ 1 . 5
C
D

V
4
2
/ 1 3 . 8
E 1 . 5E 1 . 7
/ 4 . 5
E
-
M
P
V
4
2

C
D
T M - E 2 4 V D C
/ 4 . 6
O
D

4A 0 . 0A 0 . 2
C
D

V
4
2
/ 4 . 7A 0 . 1A 0 . 3
D
-
M
P
V
4
2

C
D
T M - D 2 4 V D C
S
D
/ 7 . 2
P r o j e c t : S I N A M I C S _ N C U 7 1 0 _ 3
E L C A D v e r s i o n : 7 . 3 . 0
A r c h i v e : S I M A N I C S / 6 / 8S I E M E N S A G
R e f . n o . : N P / . . . . . . .
1
.
2
/
3
B
P
8
.
4
/
+
L
4
5
5
.
5
/
1
=
+
L
5
5
5
.
5
/
1
=
+
L
6
5
7
.
5
/
1
=
+
L
8
5
8
.
5
/
-
L
1
4
8
.
7
/
E
P
2
1
X
-
N
O
F
F
O
)
1
V
4
2

C
D
P
D
-
S
U
B
I
F
O
R
P
+
L
1
C
D
V
4
2
M
2
M
1
+
L
2
8
A
4
A
6
2
7
3
8
A
4
A
4
A
3
2
+
L
-
L
E
P
1
X
U
A
6
2
7
3
8
4
5
1
8
A
4
A
7
A
3
A
6
2
7
3
8
4
5
1
8
A
4
A
7
A
3
A
6
2
7
3
8
4
5
1
8
A
4
A
7
A
3
A
6
2
7
3
8
4
5
1
8
A
4
A
7
A
3
A
8
A
4
A
6
2
7
3
8
A
4
A
4
A
3
2
+
L
-
L
E
P
1
X
U
A
6
2
7
3
8
4
5
1
8
A
4
A
7
A
3
A
8
1
9
2
4
2
1
+
LM
1
1
4
+
1
A
2
1
5
-
2
A
3
1
6
2
X
U
A
4
1
7
3
X
U
A
5
3
L
5
2
L
3
1
L
1
3
T
6
2
T
4
1
T
2
1
0
1
.
9
/
1
.
3
1
/
+
L
4
5
+
L
5
5
1
.
9
/
+
L
6
5
+
L
8
5
1
.
9
/
-
L
1
4
1
.
9
/
E
P
P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S
P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
E
T
2
0
0
S

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

m
o
d
u
l
e
s
S t a n d a r d m o t o r s t a r t e r
1
)

P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S

p
lu
g

6
S
E
7
9
7
2
-
.
.
.

s
e
e

l
K
P
l

c
a
t
a
lo
g


B
u
s

t
e
r
m
in
a
t
in
g

r
e
s
is
t
o
r

m
u
s
t

b
e

s
w
it
c
h
e
d

o
n

f
o
r

t
h
e

f
ir
s
t

a
n
d

la
s
t

n
o
d
e

in

a

b
u
s

s
e
g
m
e
n
t
,

b
e
c
a
u
s
e

o
t
h
e
r
w
is
e

t
h
e

d
a
t
a

t
r
a
n
s
m
is
s
io
n

d
o
e
s

n
o
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
e

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
ly
.

T
h
e

c
a
b
le

s
h
ie
ld

m
u
s
t

b
e

p
la
c
e
d

w
it
h

a

la
r
g
e

a
r
e
a

o
n

b
o
t
h

s
id
e
s
.

Figure 7-37 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 8
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
290 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
P o w e r m o d u l e
T M - D F 2 4 V D C
P R O F l s a f e
M o t o r s t a r t e r f a i l s a f e
P R O F l s a f e a d d r e s s
P R O F l s a f e a d d r e s s
P R O F l s a f e a d d r e s s
P o w e r m o d u l e
E
T
2
0
0
S

o
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
s

Figure 7-38 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 9
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 291
1
3
.
0
6
.
0
6
S
p
e
r
b
e
r
-
W
i
l
l
C
h
u
t
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
M
o
d
e

p
r
e
s
e
le
c
t
io
n
T
o
o
l
r
e
c
o
v
e
r
y

o
f

t
h
e

lim
it
s

in

t
h
e

s
e
t
u
p

m
o
d
e
1

A
u
t
o
m
a
t
ic
2

S
e
t
u
p
3

T
e
s
t

o
p
e
r
a
t
io
n
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)

Figure 7-39 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 10
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
292 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F E D C B A
F E D C B A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
m
u
t
a
D
.
b
r
a
e
B
.
r
p
e
G
m
u
t
a
D
g
n
u
r
e
d
n

d
n
a
t
s
u
Z
e
t
t
o
h
c
S
l
l
i
W
-
r
e
b
r
e
p
S
6
0
.
6
0
.
3
1
m
r
o
N
e
m
a
N
1
H
+
3
1
6
=
1
1
t
t
a
l
B
.
l
B
C o p y r i g h t ( C ) S I E M E N S A G 2 0 0 3 A l l R i g h t s R e s e r v e d
.
d
.
s
r
E
/
.
f
.
s
r
E
/
.
r
p
s
r
U
)
3
(
:


.
r
N
-
.
n
h
c
i
e
Z
P r o j e c t : S I N A M I C S _ N C U 7 1 0 _ 3
E L C A D v e r s i o n : 7 . 3 . 0
A r c h i v e : S I M A N I C S / 6 / 1 1S I E M E N S A G
R e f . n o . : N P / . . . . . . .
S
+
1
1
1
S
-
1 31 4
0
I
D
3
9
K
-
3
.
9
/
I
D
E
P
1
S
V
1
2
A 4
6
=
2 32 4
4
I
D
3
9
K
-
3
.
9
/
I
D
E
P
2
S
V
9
1 0
A 1 2
6
=
0
1
5
1
1
S
-
1 31 4
2
I
D
3
9
K
-
3
.
9
/
I
D
E
P
1
S
V
3
4
A 3
2 32 4
6
I
D
3
9
K
-
3
.
9
/
I
D
E
P
2
S
V
1 1
1 2
A 1 1
S
+
7
1
1
S
-
1 31 4
3
.
1
E
1
.
4
8
K
-
4
.
8
/
I
D
I
D

S
0
0
2
T
E
f
o
r

t
h
e

d
r
iv
e
+
L
6
8
A 7
6
=
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
l

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
l

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
l

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
l

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
A
g
r
e
e
m
e
n
t
S
T
O
P

A

ju
m
p
e
r
(
t
o

o
p
e
n

t
h
e

m
o
t
o
r

b
r
a
k
e
s

u
s
in
g

t
h
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r

f
o
r

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

o
r

S
T
O
P

A
)
A
c
k
n
o
w
le
d
g
e

E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

S
t
o
p
0
)

O
f
f
1
)

J
u
m
p
e
r

Figure 7-40 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 11
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 293
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F E D C B A
F E D C B A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
m
u
t
a
D
.
b
r
a
e
B
.
r
p
e
G
m
u
t
a
D
g
n
u
r
e
d
n

d
n
a
t
s
u
Z
e
t
t
o
h
c
S
l
l
i
W
-
r
e
b
r
e
p
S
6
0
.
6
0
.
3
1
m
r
o
N
e
m
a
N
1
H
+
3
1
6
=
2
1
t
t
a
l
B
.
l
B
C o p y r i g h t ( C ) S I E M E N S A G 2 0 0 3 A l l R i g h t s R e s e r v e d
.
d
.
s
r
E
/
.
f
.
s
r
E
/
.
r
p
s
r
U
)
3
(
:


.
r
N
-
.
n
h
c
i
e
Z
P r o j e c t : S I N A M I C S _ N C U 7 1 0 _ 3
E L C A D v e r s i o n : 7 . 3 . 0
A r c h i v e : S I M A N I C S / 6 / 1 2S I E M E N S A G
R e f . n o . : N P / . . . . . . .
S
+
1
2
1
S
-
3
I
D
3
9
K
-
3
.
9
/
I
D
E
P
1
S
V
7
8
A 7
6
=
2
3
1
3
2
1
1
1
2
4
1
4
2
2
1
2
7
I
D
3
9
K
-
3
.
9
/
I
D
E
P
2
S
V
1 5
1 6
A 1 5
6
=
U
)
1
0
O
D
4
9
K
-
4
.
9
/
P
E
P
M
1
2
A 4
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
l

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
l

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
O

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
1
)

S
w
it
c
h
in
g

c
a
p
a
c
it
y

o
f

t
h
e

d
ig
it
a
l
o
u
t
p
u
t

f
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l,

e
.
g
.

t
h
e

t
u
m
b
le
r
,

m
u
s
t

b
e

t
a
k
e
n

in
t
o

c
o
n
s
id
e
r
a
t
io
n
.

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
iv
e

c
ir
c
u
it

o
f

t
h
e

m
a
g
n
e
t
ic

c
o
il
(
e
.
g
.

v
a
r
is
t
o
r
)

is

e
s
s
e
n
t
ia
l
!
D
o
o
r

m
a
g
n
e
t
t
u
m
b
le
r
U
n
lo
c
k

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
iv
e

d
o
o
r
D o o r c l o s e d
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
iv
e

d
o
o
r

Figure 7-41 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 12
Typical circuit diagrams
7.8 Circuit Manual Group =6
Guidelines for machine configuration
294 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F E D C B A
F E D C B A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
m
u
t
a
D
.
b
r
a
e
B
.
r
p
e
G
m
u
t
a
D
g
n
u
r
e
d
n

d
n
a
t
s
u
Z
e
t
t
o
h
c
S
l
l
i
W
-
r
e
b
r
e
p
S
6
0
.
6
0
.
3
1
m
r
o
N
e
m
a
N
1
H
+
3
1
6
=
3
1
t
t
a
l
B
.
l
B
C o p y r i g h t ( C ) S I E M E N S A G 2 0 0 3 A l l R i g h t s R e s e r v e d
.
d
.
s
r
E
/
.
f
.
s
r
E
/
.
r
p
s
r
U
)
3
(
:


.
r
N
-
.
n
h
c
i
e
Z
P r o j e c t : S I N A M I C S _ N C U 7 1 0 _ 3
E L C A D v e r s i o n : 7 . 3 . 0
A r c h i v e : S I M A N I C S / 6 / 1 3S I E M E N S A G
R e f . n o . : N P / . . . . . . .
8
.
8
/
+
L
4
5
1
O
D
4
9
K
-
4
.
9
/
P
E
P
M
5
6
A 8
6
=
1 3
2 3
3 3
1 4
2 4
3 4
4 4 4 3
3 T K 2 8 3 0 - 1 C B 3 0
2
3
1
K
-
/ 1 3 . 5
A 1A 2
5 1
/ 1 3 . 7
5 2
V
4
2

C
D
2
O
D
4
9
K
-
4
.
9
/
P
E
P
M
9
1 0
A 1 2
6
=
1 3
2 3
3 3
1 4
2 4
3 4
4 4 4 3
3 T K 2 8 3 0 - 1 C B 3 0
4
3
1
K
-
/ 1 3 . 6
A 1A 2
5 1
/ 1 3 . 8
5 2
1
X
-
1
2
3
1
K
-
2
.
3
1
/
1 31 4
1
X
-
2
3
4
3
1
K
-
3
.
3
1
/
1 31 4
4
2
3
1
K
-
2
.
3
1
/
5 15 2
4
.
1
E
2
.
4
8
K
-
5
.
8
/
I
D
I
D

S
0
0
2
T
E
M
+
L
1
3
A 4
4
3
1
K
-
3
.
3
1
/
5 15 2
5
.
1
E
2
.
4
8
K
-
5
.
8
/
I
D
I
D

S
0
0
2
T
E
M
+
L
5
7
A 8
+
L
4
5
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
O

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
E
T
2
0
0
S

D
O

P
R
O
F
l
s
a
f
e
C
ir
c
u
it

d
ia
g
r
a
m
S
l
N
A
M
l
C
S

/

S
l
N
U
M
E
R
l
K

S
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

L
i
n
e
D
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
D
r
i
v
e
s

o
r

d
r
i
v
e

g
r
o
u
p

O
n
/
O
f
f
S
h
u
t
d
o
w
n

i
n

a
n

e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

(
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
)
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p
d
e
la
y
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k

s
ig
n
a
l
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

d
e
la
y
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k

s
ig
n
a
l
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y

s
t
o
p

d
e
la
y
e
d
P
o
t
e
n
t
ia
l
-
f
r
e
e

s
ig
n
a
l
e
x
c
h
a
n
g
e

t
o

o
t
h
e
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
lle
r
s

o
r

p
la
n
t

s
e
c
t
io
n
s

Figure 7-42 Circuit Manual Group =6, Page 13

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 295
Additional Information
8
8.1 Distributed configuration
For the distributed installation, an external busbar is used for the DC link connection. From
there, the cables are led to the power units. DC link rectifier adapters are used for the
connection to the power units..
-F -F -F -F
Line
Module
Motor
Modules
Line
400 V 3 AC
Line filter Line choke

External
DC-link busbar
max. 10 m
DC-link rectifier
adapter

Figure 8-1 Distributed configuration
Depending on the component width, two variants are available:
Component width 50/100 mm
DC link rectifier adapter with connection option from 0.5 mm to 10 mm,
max. 36 A
Component width 150 ... 300 mm
DC link rectifier adapter with connection option from 35 mm to 95 mm,
max. 240 A
Additional Information
8.2 Cooling Systems
Guidelines for machine configuration
296 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Additional references
For details of DC link rectifier adapters in booksize format and information on cable
installation, please refer to
/GH2/ SINAMICS S120/Booksize Power Units Equipment Manual/.

Note
The internal DC link busbar must not be used if the DC link rectifier adapter is connected to a
power section. The DC link bridge provided must be removed. Each power section requires
a DC link rectifier adapter.

WARNING
The DC link connection cables must be laid in such a way that they are ground-fault and
short-circuit proof in accordance with DIN/VDE 0100 or suitable fuse protection must be
provided.

8.2 Cooling Systems
8.2.1 Introduction
For the SINAMICS System S120, three cooling systems are differentiated:
Internal air cooling
External air cooling
Cold plate cooling
8.2.2 Internal Air Cooling

All SINAMICS S120 booksize components are installed within a control cabinet. The total
heat loss of all components is dissipated in the control cabinet. There are three ways to
remove the heat from the control cabinet:
Filter fan
Heat exchanger
Cooling unit
The device to be used depends on the associated environmental conditions and the required
cooling capacity. The configuring must also maintain the specified clearances for the
ventilation. No other components may be placed in these areas.
Additional Information
8.2 Cooling Systems
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 297
8.2.3 External Air Cooling

The external air cooling is a cooling system for SINAMICS booksize power units. The
through-hole technology is used for this construction form. The booksize power unit with its
heat sink can be placed in the rectangular cutout of the control cabinet rear wall and installed
with a seal. The heat sink with its cooling fins and fan (contained in scope of delivery)
extends at the back out of the control cabinet and the heat dissipation is made externally
from the control cabinet or in a separate air duct.
Power unit with
external cooling
and heatsink seal
Fan assembly
SW10
6 Nm
M6 threaded studs

Figure 8-2 Installation of a booksize power section with external air cooling
Additional Information
8.2 Cooling Systems
Guidelines for machine configuration
298 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
8.2.4 Cold Plate
Cold plate cooling is a cooling system for SINAMICS S120 booksize power units. The flat
aluminum cooling plate located at the rear side of the devices serves as thermal interface.
Special advantages of the cold plate technology
1. It is particularly suitable for machine concepts in which a high level of dirt accumulates in
the machine vicinity. The reduction of the cabinet-internal heat loss simplifies the heat
dissipation of a sealed control cabinet (IP54).
2. Advantageous for machine concepts for which liquid is already present in the process.
This heat dissipation method is thus suitable for both internal and external cold plate
cooling of the power components.
A distinction is made between:
Cold plate with an external air heat sink
The components of the drive group are typically all attached with screws to the cooling
fins of an air heat sink located outside the control cabinet.
Cold plate with an external liquid heat sink
The components of the drive group are typically all attached with screws to the liquid heat
sink located outside the control cabinet.
Derating must be applied with 300 mm wide modules, given the heat transferred to the
external heat sink. If the temperature at the interface to the power unit is 40 C, derating
is 80% for 6SL3136-7TE28-0AAx/6SL3126-1TE31-3AAx and 70% for 6SL3136- 7TE31-
2AAx/6SL3126-1TE32-0AAx.
When the Active Line Modules and Motor Modules feature direct liquid cooling (6SL3135-
7TE31-2AA3/6SL3125-1TE32-0AA3), the derating referred does not apply to the above
cold plate modules.
Cold plate with internal liquid heat sink
This is considered to be a liquid cooling using a connection adapter. The liquid passes
through the integrated channels in the cold plate.
Additional Information
8.2 Cooling Systems
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 299



Cold plate
with internal liquid cooling
(in preparation)
with liquid heat sink with air heat sink
Cooling type
SlNAMlCS S120 Booksize power unit with cold plate

Figure 8-3 Cooling systems for cold plate

Note
The associated notes contained in the manuals must be observed for the configuring and the
layout of the corresponding component. This ensures that devices in the control cabinet are
not damaged as a result of leaks, etc.


Additional Information
8.2 Cooling Systems
Guidelines for machine configuration
300 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 301
Activate/Deactivate Drive System
9
9.1 Overview of the Status Signals
lnfeed operation
r0863.0
NCU 7x0: X132.7
lnfeed
Operating voltage 24 V or
voltage at the terminals
U1:V1:W1
lnfeed ready
r0899.0
NCU 7x0: X132.8
Enable infeed
NCU 7x0: X122.1
(0/1 edge)
Axis pulse enable
NCU 7x0: DB axis.DBX 21.7
Axis closed-loop controller enable
NCU 7x0: DB axis.DBX 2.1
OFF3 (rapid stop)
NCU 7x0: X122.2
SH/SBC active
Drives in cyclical operation
NCU 7x0: DB10.DBX108.5
Drive ready
NCU 7x0: DB10.DBX108.6
NC ready
NCU7x0: DB10.DBX108.7
Activate Rapid stop Connect Enable

Figure 9-1 Overview of the Status Signals
Activate/Deactivate Drive System
9.2 Drive Group with Several Axes
Guidelines for machine configuration
302 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
9.2 Drive Group with Several Axes
The Motor Module is controlled via the -X21, -X22 terminal block and DRIVE-CLiQ at the -
X200/201/202/203 terminal block. The detailed function description for the individual signals
and control/status words is contained in the following document:
\LH1\SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
To enable the Motor Module, the "infeed ready" signal must be connected from the Line
Module.
The following function diagrams show how the individual signals interact.
Activate/Deactivate Drive System
9.2 Drive Group with Several Axes
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 303
Activating the infeed
-
8
9
3
2

-
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

d
i
a
g
r
a
m
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
f
p
_
8
9
3
2
_
5
5
_
e
n
g
.
v
s
d
D
O
:

A
_
I
N
F
S
I
N
A
M
I
C
S

S
1
2
0
/
S
1
5
0
1
5
.
0
4
.
0
8
V
0
2
.
0
6
.
0
1
A
c
t
i
v
e

I
n
f
e
e
d

-
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
P
O
W
E
R

O
N

<
1
>
S
1
:

P
o
w
e
r
-
o
n

i
n
h
i
b
i
t

Z
S
W
A
E
.
6

=

1

Z
S
W
A
E
.
0
/
1
/
2

=

0
S
2
:

R
e
a
d
y

t
o

p
o
w
e
r
-
u
p

Z
S
W
A
E
.
0

=

1

Z
S
W
A
E
.
1
/
2
/
6

=

0

L
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

i
s

o
p
e
n

W
a
i
t

f
o
r

p
o
w
e
r
-
o
n
S
5
a
:

D
i
s
c
h
a
r
g
e

r
a
m
p

Z
S
W
A
E
.
0
/
1
/
2

=

1

Z
S
W
A
E
.
6

=

0

R
a
m
p
-
d
o
w
n

V
d
c

v
i
a

r
a
m
p

p
3
5
6
6
,

t
h
e
n

c
a
n
c
e
l

t
h
e

p
u
l
s
e
s
S
4
:

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

Z
S
W
A
E
.
0
/
1
/
2

=

1

Z
S
W
A
E
.
6

=

0

P
u
l
s
e
s

a
n
d

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

a
r
e

e
n
a
b
l
e
d

R
a
m
p
-
u
p

V
d
c

v
i
a

t
h
e

r
a
m
p
S
3
a
:

C
l
o
s
e

t
h
e

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

(
r
e
f
e
r

t
o

[
8
9
3
4
]

)

P
r
e
-
c
h
a
r
g
i
n
g

T
i
m
e

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g
,

r
e
f
e
r

t
o

[
8
9
6
4
.
7
]
&
"
0

=

O
F
F
1
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
0
)
"
0

=

O
F
F
1
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
0
)
&
"
E
n
a
b
l
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
3
)
&
& &
"
0

=

O
F
F
1
"


(
S
T
W
A
E
.
0
)
"
0

=

O
F
F
2
"
(
S
T
W
A
E
.
1
)
&
"
0

=

O
F
F
2
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
1
)
<
1
>

P
O
W
E
R

O
N

=

2
4

V

e
l
e
c
t
r
o
n
i
c
s

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

O
F
F

-
-
>

O
N

o
r

R
E
S
E
T

b
u
t
t
o
n
.
p
0
8
5
7
.
.
.
p
0
8
6
2
,

p
3
4
9
0
.
.
.
p
3
4
9
1
M
i
s
s
i
n
g

e
n
a
b
l
e

s
i
g
n
a
l
s
[
8
9
3
4
]
r
3
4
0
2
&
2
4

V

a
t

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s

p
o
w
e
r

u
n
i
t
"
0

=

O
F
F
2
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
1
)
"
0

=

O
F
F
1
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
0
)
"
C
o
m
m
i
s
s
.

c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
d
"
(
p
1
0

=

0

a
n
d

p
9

=

0
)
T
p
0
8
6
2
S
3
:

R
e
a
d
y

Z
S
W
A
E
.
0
/
1

=

1

Z
S
W
A
E
.
2
/
6

=

0

L
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

i
s

c
l
o
s
e
d
"
0

=

O
F
F
2
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
1
)
"
C
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g
"

(
p
1
0

0

o
r

p
9

0
)
0

V

a
t

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s

p
o
w
e
r

u
n
i
t
&
"
C
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g
"

(
p
1
0

0

a
n
d

p
9


0
)
"
0

=

O
F
F
2
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
1
)
0

V

a
t

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
,

p
o
w
e
r

u
n
i
t
S
7
:
O
p
e
n

t
h
e

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
6
:


O
p
e
n

t
h
e

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
"
E
n
a
b
l
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
3
)
"
0

=

O
F
F
1
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
0
)
T
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
l
o
o
p

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
r
0
8
6
3
.
0
[
2
6
1
0
.
1
]
t
o

S
E
R
V
O
/
V
E
C
T
O
R
&
"
0

=

O
F
F
1
"


(
S
T
W
A
E
.
0
)
"
0
=

O
F
F
1
"


(
S
T
W
A
E
.
0
)
"
E
n
a
b
l
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
"

(
S
T
W
A
E
.
3
)
0

V

a
t

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s

p
o
w
e
r

u
n
i
t

1
p
3
4
9
0
1

1
T
p
3
4
9
0
&
F
a
u
l
t
s
/
a
l
a
r
m
s

F
0
6
0
0
0

F
0
7
2
2
0

F
0
7
3
0
0

A
0
6
6
0
2
<
2
>

S
T
W
A
E
.
x
x

=

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

w
o
r
d
,

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
,

i
n
f
e
e
d

b
i
t

x
x









Z
S
W
A
E
.
x
x

=

S
t
a
t
u
s

w
o
r
d
,

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
,

i
n
f
e
e
d

b
i
t

x
x
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
<
2
>
0
0
0
p
0
1
1
5
[
3
]

(
2
0
0
0
.
0
0

s
)
E
n
e
r
g
i
z
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
r
0
8
6
3
.
1
[
8
9
6
4
.
6
]

Figure 9-2 "Infeed activation" function diagram
Activate/Deactivate Drive System
9.2 Drive Group with Several Axes
Guidelines for machine configuration
304 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Activating the drive
S
4
:

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

Z
S
W
A
.
0
0
/
0
1
/
0
2

=

1


Z
S
W
A
.
1
1

=

1

Z
S
W
A
.
0
6

=

0

P
u
l
s
e
s

e
n
a
b
l
e
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

e
n
a
b
l
e
d


N
o

j
o
g

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
:

S
e
t
p
o
i
n
t
s

e
n
a
b
l
e
d
-
2
6
1
0

-
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

d
i
a
g
r
a
m
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
f
p
_
2
6
1
0
_
5
4
_
e
n
g
.
v
s
d
D
O
:

S
E
R
V
O
,

V
E
C
T
O
R
S
1
2
0
/
S
1
5
0
/
G
1
3
0
/
G
1
5
0
2
8
.
1
0
.
0
8
V
0
2
.
0
6
.
0
1
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

-
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r
P
O
W
E
R

O
N
S
1
:

P
o
w
e
r
-
o
n

i
n
h
i
b
i
t

Z
S
W
A
.
0
6

=

1
,

Z
S
W
A
.
1
1

=

0

Z
S
W
A
.
0
0
/
0
1
/
0
2

=

0

P
u
l
s
e
s

i
n
h
i
b
i
t
e
d
S
2
:

R
e
a
d
y

t
o

p
o
w
e
r

u
p

Z
S
W
A
.
0
0

=

1
,

Z
S
W
A
.
1
1

=

0

M
a
i
n

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

i
s

O
P
E
N

W
a
i
t

f
o
r

p
o
w
e
r
-
u
p

o
r

j
o
g
<
2
>
S
5
a
:

R
a
m
p

s
t
o
p

Z
S
W
A
.
0
0
/
0
1

=

1
Z
S
W
A
.
1
1

=

1

Z
S
W
A
.
0
2
/
0
6

=

0

R
a
m
p
-
d
o
w
n

t
o

|
n
|

<
=

0
,

t
h
e
n
i
n
h
i
b
i
t

t
h
e

p
u
l
s
e
s
S
5
b
:

F
a
s
t

s
t
o
p

Z
S
W
A
.
0
0
/
0
1

=

1
,

Z
S
W
A
.
1
1

=

1

Z
S
W
A
.
0
2
/
0
6

=

0

B
r
i
n
g

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

t
o

|
n
|

<
=

0

a
l
o
n
g

t
h
e

f
a
s
t

s
t
o
p
p
i
n
g

r
a
m
p

o
r

t
o
r
q
u
e

l
i
m
i
t
,

t
h
e
n

i
n
h
i
b
i
t

t
h
e

p
u
l
s
e
s
S
3
:

R
e
a
d
y

Z
S
W
A
.
0
0
/
0
1

=

1
,

Z
S
W
A
.
1
1

=

0

Z
S
W
A
.
0
2
/
0
6

=

0

L
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

i
s

C
L
O
S
E
D

W
a
i
t

f
o
r

p
r
e
-
c
h
a
r
g
i
n
g
&
"
E
n
a
b
l
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
"


(
S
T
W
A
.
0
3
)
"
E
n
a
b
l
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
"

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
3
)
&
"
0

=

O
F
F
"
J
o
g

1
J
o
g

1
&
&
&
P
u
l
s
e

e
n
a
b
l
e

H
W
[
2
7
0
1
.
8
]
[
2
7
1
1
.
8
]
"
0

=

F
a
s
t

s
t
o
p
"
(
S
T
W
A
.
0
2
)
"
0

=

C
o
s
t

d
o
w
n
"

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
1
)
&
P
u
l
s
e

e
n
a
b
l
e

H
W

[
2
7
0
1
.
8
]

[
2
7
1
1
.
8
]
"
0

=

C
o
s
t

d
o
w
n
"
(
S
T
W
A
.
0
1
)
<
1
>

P
O
W
E
R

O
N

=

2
4

V

e
l
e
c
t
r
o
n
i
c
s

s
u
p
p
l
y

O
F
F

-
-
>

O
N

o
r

R
E
S
E
T

b
u
t
t
o
n
.
<
2
>

T
h
e

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

i
s

i
m
p
l
e
m
e
n
t
e
d

a
c
c
o
r
d
i
n
g

t
o

t
h
e

P
R
O
F
I
d
r
i
v
e

p
r
o
f
i
l
e
.
<
3
>

O
n
l
y

f
o
r

S
I
N
A
M
I
C
S

S
1
2
0
:
I
f

a

D
O

I
n
f
e
e
d

(
A
L
M
,

B
L
M

a
n
d

S
L
M
)

i
s

u
s
e
d
,

i
t

c
l
o
s
e
s

t
h
e

l
i
n
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

(
r
e
f
e
r

t
o

[
8
7
3
2
]
[
8
8
3
2
]
[
8
9
3
2
]
)

a
n
d

n
o
t

t
h
e

D
O

S
E
R
V
O
/
V
E
C
T
O
R
.
p
0
8
5
7
.
.
.

p
0
8
6
2
2
0
0
0
.
0
0

s
M
i
s
s
i
n
g

e
n
a
b
l
e

s
i
g
n
a
l
s
[
2
6
3
4
]
F
a
u
l
t
s

F
0
7
3
0
0
.
.
.
F
0
7
8
0
2
F
6
0
0
0
&
P
u
l
s
e

e
n
a
b
l
e

H
W
[
2
7
0
1
.
8
]
D
r
i
v
e

a
t

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
i
l
l
F
a
u
l
t

w
i
t
h

O
F
F
1

?

o
r

O
F
F
3


r
e
s
p
o
n
s
e

D
r
i
v
e

a
t

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
i
l
l

1
D
r
i
v
e

a
t

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
i
l
l
<
4
>
<
4
>
<
4
>
<
4
>
<
4
>
<
4
>

T
h
e
s
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

c
a
n

a
l
s
o

b
e

t
r
i
g
g
e
r
e
d

b
y

a

f
a
u
l
t

r
e
s
p
o
n
s
e
.
&
&
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
l
o
o
p

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
D
e
-
m
a
g
n
e
t
i
z
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
d

(
r
0
0
4
6
.
2
7

=

0
)
&
"
C
o
m
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
i
n
g

c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
d
"

(
p
0
0
1
0

=

0

&

p
0
0
0
9

=

0
)
F
r
o
m

a
l
l

s
t
a
t
e
s
.

.

.

1
"
0

=

O
F
F
"

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
0
)
"
0

=

C
o
a
s
t

d
o
w
n
"

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
1
)
"
0

=

F
a
s
t

s
t
o
p
"

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
2
)
r
0
0
4
6
.
8

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
,

e
n
a
b
l
e

m
i
s
s
i
n
g
"
0

=

C
o
a
s
t

d
o
w
n
"

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
1
)
"
0

=

F
a
s
t

s
t
o
p
"

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
2
)
<
5
>

S
T
W
A
.
x
x

=

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

w
o
r
d
,

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
,

b
i
t

x
x

(
r
0
8
9
8
)

[
2
5
0
1
]
;

Z
S
W
A
.
x
x

=

s
t
a
t
u
s

w
o
r
d
,

s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

b
i
t

x
x

(
r
0
8
9
9
)

[
2
5
0
3
]
.
<
5
>
<
5
>
<
5
>
<
5
>
<
5
>
<
5
>
<
5
>
<
1
>
<
5
>
<
5
>
<
5
>
<
5
>
S
5
c
:

J
o
g
g
i
n
g

-
d
o
w
n

r
a
m
p


Z
S
W
A
.
0
0
/
0
1

=

1
Z
S
W
A
.
1
1

=

1

Z
S
W
A
.
0
2
/
0
6

=

0

R
a
m
p
-
d
o
w
n

t
o

|
n
|

<
=

0
,

t
h
e
n
i
n
h
i
b
i
t

t
h
e

p
u
l
s
e
s
J
o
g

2
J
o
g

m
o
d
e

1
J
o
g

2
N
o

j
o
g

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
"
0

=

O
F
F
"
J
o
g

1
J
o
g

2
O
F
F
3

(
h
a
s

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

o
v
e
r

j
o
g
g
i
n
g
)
D
r
i
v
e

a
t

s
t
a
n
d
s
t
i
l
l
O
F
F
2

(
h
a
s

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

o
v
e
r

j
o
g
g
i
n
g
)
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
l
o
o
p

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
r
0
8
6
3
.
0
N
o

L
T
_
f
a
u
l
t
U
D
C

u
p
l
o
a
d
e
d
&
E
n
e
r
g
i
z
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
r
0
8
6
3
.
1
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

e
n
a
b
l
e
r
0
8
9
9
.
8

1
I
n
f
e
e
d

r
e
a
d
y
p
0
8
6
4
&
"
0

=

O
F
F
"
J
o
g

1
J
o
g

2

1
[
2
5
0
3
.
3
]
<
7
>
<
7
>
<
7
>
<
6
>

O
n
l
y

i
f

?
S
a
f
e
t
y

I
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
e
d
?

i
s

a
c
t
i
v
e
.
<
7
>

T
h
e

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
s

p
1
2
2
6
,

p
1
2
2
7

a
n
d

p
1
2
2
8

i
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e

t
h
i
s

s
t
a
t
u
s
.
<
6
>
<
6
>
<
6
>
T
0
p
0
8
6
2
<
3
>
?
0

=

C
o
a
s
t

d
o
w
n
?

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
1
)
?
0

=

F
a
s
t

s
t
o
p
?

(
S
T
W
A
.
0
2
)
<
4
>
<
5
>
r
0
0
4
6
.
8

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
,
e
n
a
b
l
e

m
i
s
s
i
n
g
<
6
>
<
4
>
<
5
>
[
2
6
3
4
]
<
6
>
<
5
>
[
2
6
3
4
]
[
2
6
3
4
]r
0
0
4
6
.
8

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
,
e
n
a
b
l
e

m
i
s
s
i
n
g
[
2
6
3
4
]
r
0
0
4
6
.
8

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
,
e
n
a
b
l
e

m
i
s
s
i
n
g
r
0
0
4
6
.
8

E
P

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
,
e
n
a
b
l
e

m
i
s
s
i
n
g
[
2
6
3
4
]

Figure 9-3 "Drive activation" function diagram
Activate/Deactivate Drive System
9.2 Drive Group with Several Axes
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 305

Note
Applies to CU320; with integrated drive solutions (e.g. NCU, NX, etc.), some signals are
already processed by means of internal communication

Off responses
OFF1
The immediate specification of n_set = 0 at the ramp generator return ramp (p1121)
causes the drive to be braked.
When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if parameterized) is closed
(p1215). The pulses are suppressed when the closing time (p1217) expires. The zero
speed is detected when the speed actual value is lower than the speed threshold
(p1226) or when the monitoring time (p1227) started when speed setpoint speed
threshold (p1226) has expired.
OFF2
Immediate pulse suppression, the drive coasts to standstill.
The motor holding brake (if parameterized) is closed immediately.
Closing lockout is activated.
OFF3
The immediate specification of n_set = 0 at the OFF3 return ramp (p1135) causes the
drive to be braked.
When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if parameterized) is closed.
The pulses are suppressed when the closing time of the holding brake (p1217)
expires. The zero speed is detected when the speed actual value is lower than the
speed threshold (p1226) or when the monitoring time (p1227) started when speed
setpoint speed threshold (p1226) has expired.
Closing lockout is activated.
Activate/Deactivate Drive System
9.2 Drive Group with Several Axes
Guidelines for machine configuration
306 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Control and status signals
Table 9- 1 Switching on/switching off the control system
Signal name Internal control word Binector input PROFIBUS message
frame 2 106
VDI interface (PLC)
0 = OFF1 STWA.00
STWAE.00
p0840 ON/OFF1 STW1.0 DB(AX).DBX2.1
(controller enable)
DB(AX).DBX1.5/6
(measuring system
selected and OK)
DB(AX).DBX21.7
(pulse enable)
0 = OFF2 STWA.01
STWAE.01
p0844 1. OFF2
p0845 2. OFF2
STW1.1 1
0 = OFF3 STWA.02 p0848 1. OFF3
P0849 2. OFF3
STW1.2 1
Enable operation STWA.03
STWAE.03
p0852 operation
enabled
STW1.3 DBX21.7

Table 9- 2 Activate/deactivate status signals
Signal name Internal status word Parameter PROFIBUS message frame 2 106
Ready to start ZSWA.00
ZSWAE.00
r0899.0 ZSW1.0
Ready ZSWA.01
ZSWAE.01
r0899.1 ZSW1.1
Operation enabled ZSWA.02
ZSWAE.02
r0899.2 ZSW1.2
Closing lockout ZSWA.06
ZSWAE.06
r0899.6 ZSW1.6
Pulses enabled ZSWA.11 r0899.11 ZSW1.11

Function block diagram overview (see SINAMICS S List Manual)
2610 sequence control - sequencer
2634 missing enables, line contactor control
8732 basic infeed - sequencer
8832 smart infeed - sequencer
8932 active infeed - sequencer

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 307
Appendix
A


CAUTION
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are single components, integrated circuits or devices
that can be damaged by electrostatic fields or electrostatic discharges.
Regulations for the ESD handling:
During the handling of electronic components, pay attention to the grounding of the person,
workplace and packaging!
Electronic components may be touched by persons only when
these persons are grounded using an ESD bracelet, or
these persons in ESD areas with a conducting floor wear ESD shoes or ESD grounding
straps.
Electronic components should be touched only when this is unavoidable. The touching is
permitted only on the front panel or on the circuit board edge.
Electronic components must not be brought into contact with plastics or clothing made of
artificial fibers.
Electronic components may only be placed on conducting surfaces (table with ESD coating,
conducting ESD foamed material, ESD packing bag, ESD transport container).
Electronic components may not be placed near display units, monitors or televisions
(minimum distance from the screen > 10 cm).
Measurements must only be taken on boards when the measuring instrument is grounded
(via protective conductors, for example) or the measuring probe is briefly discharged before
measurements are taken with an isolated measuring device (for example, touching a bare
metal housing).

A.1 Abbreviations
Table A- 1 Abbreviations and meanings, German/English
Abbreviation German meaning English meaning
AC Wechselstrom Alternating current
ALM Active Line Module Active Line Module
CBC Communication Board CAN Communication Board CAN
CBE Communication Board Ethernet Communication Board Ethernet
CPU Zentrale Recheneinheit Central Processing Unit
CSM Control Supply Module Control Supply Module
CU Control Unit Control Unit
DC Gleichstrom Direct Current
Appendix
A.1 Abbreviations
Guidelines for machine configuration
308 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Abbreviation German meaning English meaning
DO Antriebsobjekt Drive Object
DP Dezentrale Peripherie Decentralized Peripherals
DRIVE-CLiQ Drive Component Link with IQ Drive Component Link with IQ
EP Impulsfreigabe Enable Pulses
EMC Elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
EN Europische Norm European Standard
FI Fehlerstrom-Schutzschalter Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)
HMI Mensch-Maschine-Schnittstelle Human Machine Interface
IEC Internationale Norm in der Elektrotechnik International Electrotechnical Commission
IT Drehstromversorgungsnetz ungeerdet Insulated three-phase supply network
LED Leuchtdiode Light Emitting Diode
LM : Line Module Line Module
NC Numerische Steuerung Numerical Control
NCK Numerik-Kern mit Satzaufbereitung,
Verfahrbereich usw.
Numerical Control Kernel
NCU Numerical Control Unit Numerical Control Unit
NX Numerical Extension Numerical Extension
OP Bedientafelfront Operator Panel
PE Schutzerde Protective Earth
PLC Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung (SPS) Programmable Logic Controller
SBC Safe Brake Control Safe Brake Control
SH Sicherer Halt Safe standstill
SIL Sicherheitsintegrittsgrad Safety Integrity Level
SLM Smart Line Module Smart Line Module
SMC Sensor Module Cabinet Sensor Module Cabinet
SME Sensor Module External Sensor Module External
SPL Sichere Programmierbare Logik Safe Programmable Logic
STW Steuerwort Control word
TCU Thin Client Unit Thin Client Unit
TM Terminal Module Terminal Module
TN Drehstromversorgungsnetz geerdet Grounded three-phase supply network
TT Drehstromversorgungsnetz geerdet Grounded three-phase supply network
VPM Voltage Protection Module Voltage Protection Module
VS Power supply Voltage Supply
VSM Voltage Sensing Module Voltage Sensing Module
ZSW Zustandswort Status word
Appendix
A.2 Description of drive wizard (up to SINUMERIK V2.5)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 309
A.2 Description of drive wizard (up to SINUMERIK V2.5)
A.2.1 Commissioning Macros Overview
Introduction
For the sake of simplifying drive commissioning, "macros" are included in the software. The
drive group connected to the NCU can be extensively preconfigured by starting and running
a drive wizard in the commissioning phase.
Advantage
The drive wizard performs the following tasks:
Default terminal assignment on the NCU
Connection of all drive objects (topology)
Automatic commissioning of motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
A.2.2 Functions in the macro
Functions in the configuration macro
The "1" and "5" configuration macros parameterize the central measuring of the first
probe of the SINUMERIK 840D sl. The second probe must be parameterized by the user.
For the default settings of BEROs, only the corresponding input or output on the NCU is
configured via the macro. You must make the link to the corresponding axis (BERO) via
separate links.
The safety (SH/SBC) interconnection is to be made according to the "SINAMICS S120"
Commissioning Manual, Chapter "SINAMICS Safety Integrated (Booksize)".
A final test must be carried out for the SH/SBC functions.
A.2.3 Drive wizard for commissioning
Introduction
The following macros are available for drive commissioning:
Macro for infeed (Line Module) with DRIVE-CLiQ -> "1"
Macro for infeed (Line Module) without DRIVE-CLiQ -> "5"
Appendix
A.2 Description of drive wizard (up to SINUMERIK V2.5)
Guidelines for machine configuration
310 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
Macros 100116 for preassigning the data sets and message-frame types
Update macro 150399
This macro executes an update of all drive components.
Overview
The table below lists macros for commissioning. Using the macros "1" or "5" allows a
standard terminal circuit to be achieved. This terminal circuit can be modified according to
the terminal plan.
Table A- 2 Macros for commissioning
Number File name Description
1 pm000001.acx
pm150001.acx
1)


Line Module with DRIVE-CLiQ :
Interconnection p0840 (infeed)
Interconnection 2. OFF 3 (rapid stop)
Reserving input and output terminals for two SH/SBC groups
Bero 1 zero mark substitute
1. Probe
4 x Digital NC Input ($A_IN[1] [4] )
Feedback Line Module
2 x digital NC output ($A_OUT[1] [2] )
ALM:
Shutdown of network identification (p3410=0)
SLM with DRIVE-CLiQ:
Network identification of the SLM is performed automatically
on the next pulse enable (p3410=5).
5 pm000005.acx
pm150005.acx
1)

Line Module without DRIVE-CLiQ :
Interconnection p0864 to all drives
Interconnection 2. OFF 3 (rapid stop)
Reserving input and output terminals for two SH/SBC groups
Bero 1 zero mark substitute
1. Probe
4 x Digital NCK Input ($A_IN[1] [4] )
4 x digital NCK output ($A_OUT[1] [4] )
100116 pm100116.acx The following parameters are set on all 6 drives:
Set up two encoder data sets p140=2
Eight drive data sets p180=8
Profibus protocol p922 = 116
150399 pm150399.acx Update of all drive components
1) Not for 850D sl (NCU7x0)

Appendix
A.2 Description of drive wizard (up to SINUMERIK V2.5)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 311
A.2.4 Procedure for calling ACX macros
Introduction
WARNING
Prior to starting the macro for the drive configuration, all drive releases (ON/OFF1, OFF2,
OFF3, etc.) must be switched off.

Process when calling a macro
The principle processes for calling an individual macro are laid out below.
These steps include:
Process for update macro call 150399 (left in the picture)
Process for calling configuration macro 1 or 5 (on the right in the figure)



Note
For an initial commissioning or component replacement, an update of the drive
components to the current software version can be required. The 150399 macro can be
used to update all components.

Appendix
A.2 Description of drive wizard (up to SINUMERIK V2.5)
Guidelines for machine configuration
312 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
No
p977 = 1 --> 0
Change
No
p977 = 0 --> 1
Change
3. p976 = 1
2. p15 = 0
1. p9 = 30
lnput:
Produce factory
p9 = 1
Perform
Completed
Macro execution
No
p15 = macro no.
("1" or "5")
lnput:
automatically
Macro starts
Selection
configuration macro
Perform POWER ON
Macro execution complete
No
p7829=0
RDY-LED of the compo-
nent flashes red
p7829 = 1
2. p15 = 150399
1. p9 = 30
lnput:
automatically
Update starts
Macro no.: 150399
Components update
settings
POWER ON

Figure A-1 Process macro call for update (left) and for configuration (right)
Appendix
A.2 Description of drive wizard (up to SINUMERIK V2.5)
Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 313
Occurring operator errors
Operator errors that frequently occur when starting macros include:
Incorrect status of p0009
Active enables on the modules



Note
If you have doubts, load the factory settings prior to executing a macro.

Appendix
A.2 Description of drive wizard (up to SINUMERIK V2.5)
Guidelines for machine configuration
314 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1

Guidelines for machine configuration
System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1 315
Index
3
3TK28... safety relay, 84
A
Active Interface Module, 103
Active Line Module, 158
Autotransformer, 75
Axes, 13
C
Cable Installation, 190
Cable Shields, 191
Center infeed, 32
Components
Active Interface Module, 103
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 159
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 164
HFD line reactor, 114
Connection description
HFD line reactor, 115
Control Supply Module
Safety information, 188
D
DC link adapter, 25
DC link busbar
Gain, 30
Overload, 32
DC link rectifier adapter, 295
Dimension drawings
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 163
HFD line reactor, 118
Shield connecting plates, components, external air
cooling, 37
Shield connecting plates, components, internal air
cooling, 33
Smart Line Module with internal air cooling, 133
DRIVE-CLiQ
Connectable components, 158
Notes and characteristics, 150
Rules for wiring, 153
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
DMC20, 159
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 164
E
Electronic rating plate, 150
Emergency return movement, 182
Equipotential Bonding, 192
ET200S PROFIsafe, 90
H
Heat dissipation, 43
HFD line reactor, 114
For Active Line Module, 115
Holding brake integrated in the motor, 208
I
Interface descriptions
Active Interface Module (internal cooling), 109
Active Line Module with internal air cooling, 126
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 160
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 165
Interface relay, 209
Isolating transformer, 76
IT system, 104
L
Line Connections, 73
Line reactors
Combination options with line filters, 113
M
Motor connection plug
Coding, 198
Removal, 196
Motor Module, 158
Motor plug
With locking mechanism, 193
With screwed joint, 194
Motors
Line connection, 74
Index

Guidelines for machine configuration
316 System Manual, (MA1), 10/2009, 6FC5397-6CP10-0BA1
With DRIVE-CLiQ interface, 158
O
Overcurrent, 178
P
Power failure, 182
Power loss, 52
Power loss calculation, 62
PROFINET, 13
PROFIsafe, 90
R
Rating plate, electronic, 15, 150
RCD
Residual-current operated circuit breakers (line-
side), 78
RCM
Residual-current monitors (line-side), 80
References, 3
Residual-current monitors, 80
Residual-current operated circuit breakers, 78
S
Safety information
Active Interface Module internal air cooling, 102
Active Line Module, 175
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 164
HFD line reactors for Active Line Modules, 112
Sensor Module, 158
Sensor Modules, 205
Shield connection
AIM, 107
SINAMICS components, 32
Shielding, 192
SIMATIC S7 F control, 84
SITOP select, 185
SITOP-Modular, 171
SIZER, 14
STARTER, 15
T
Technical data
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 163
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 171
HFD line reactors, 117
Topology
For DRIVE-CLiQ, 153
Total cable lengths, 113
V
Ventilation, 50